Electronic Access Control Catalog - June 2012

Electronic Access Control Catalog - June 2012
Electronic Access Control Catalog
June 2012 Edition
Thank you for choosing Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
electronic access control products. This catalog contains
overviews and technical specifications. In the back of the
catalog you will find several wiring and riser diagrams for a
number of products.
The electronic security industry is ever-changing. In order
to make sure that you have the most current and up to date
product information, we recommend that you register your
catalog by clicking on the registration button in the toolbar
seen on the left side of your viewer. By registering and
providing your email address, you will receive important
updates to your catalog, and other product and solution
information from Ingersoll Rand.
Quick Links
Contact Information
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies Website
securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Customer Care & Sales Support:
877-671-7011
YouTube Channel
http://www.youtube.com/IngersollRandST
Technical Support
www.schlage.com/support
Facebook Page
facebook.com/IngersollRandST
Blog
http://blog.securitytechnologies.com
Twitter
http://twitter.com/IngersollRandST
Electronic Access Control Catalog
Table of Contents
Access Control and Video Systems
005021
Access Control and Video Systems Introduction
ES-5727
SEVMS-SBB bright blue® Video
ES-5955
SIPCAM100 Indoor Mini Dome IP Camera
bright blue® Web-based Access Control
Networked Locking Solutions
003921
SBB bright blue® Controller
003858
SBB-RI bright blue® Reader Interface
005022
003949
SBB-NRI bright blue® Network Reader Interface
Networked Locks
005046
SPEBBLE bright blue® Badging
004446
AD-400 Networked Wireless Electronic Lock
005076
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
004870
AD-401 Wireless Electronic Integrated Lock with
FIPS 201 Compliant Multi-Tech + Keypad Reader
SMS Software
004448
AD-300 Networked Hardwired Electronic Lock
003944
SMS Software Levels
004869
003943
SMS Enterprise Software
AD-301 Hardwired Electronic Integrated Lock with
FIPS 201 Compliant Multi-Tech + Keypad Reader
003942
SMS Premier Software
004382
AD-Series Exit Trim Compatibility
003941
SMS Select Software
005076
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
003940
SMS Express Express
005076
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
004074
CO Software Compatibility Matrix
Security Management System
SMS Hardware
Networked Locking Solutions Introduction
Networked Accessories
004447
PIM400-485 Panel Interface Module For RS485
Communication
004441
PIM400-TD2 Panel Interface Module
Wiegand or Clock & Data Communication
003939
SSRC Smart Reader Controller
004094
TK400 AD-Series Wireless Test Kit
003938
SRCNX-R Reader Controller
004096
WPR400 AD-Series Wireless Portable Reader
ES-5864
SRINX Reader Interface
004014
WRI400 Wireless Reader Interface
005047
SIONX-8 Input Output Board
004013
ES-5072
SURI Universal Reader Interface
GCK400 & ECK400 Wireless Gate Control Kits and
Elevator Control Kits
ES-5069
SRCNX-ENCL Custom Enclosure
004095
004016
CT5000 Offline Controller
ANT400-REM Remote Antennas for
Wireless System
SMS Accessories
ES-5963
RLBD AD-Series Dry Contact Relay Board
003918
SPRC101 Single-Sided Badge Printer
004015
REPTR400 Wireless Repeater Kit
003917
SPR5300 Dual-Sided Badge Printer
ES-5538
001468
SID450 License Scanner
Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld
Device (HHD)
ES-5104
SVCCD-USB Live Video Camera
ES-5114
S3842 Thermal Transfer Printer
Standalone Locking Solutions
Video Management
005023
003933
SEVMS Video Management System
Standalone Locks and Devices
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions Introduction
ES-5867
SNVRSFT NVR Software Solution
004442
AD-200 Standalone Electronic Lock
ES-5099
SMKMBK Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse
004436
AD-250 Standalone Electronic Lock
004382
AD-Series Exit Trim Compatibility
IR-AC-1487 HandKey® ID3D-R Biometric Hand Geometry Reader
004186
CO-100 Standalone Electronic Lock
004400
Biometric Terminal Accessories for HandKey®
004185
CO-200 Standalone Electronic Lock
ES-5278
Enclosure Options for the HandKey® Series
004184
CO-250 Standalone Electronic Lock
004399
HandNet® for Windows
004183
CO-Series Exit Trim Compatibility
002872
Biometrics for Access Control Training Course Outline
004016
CT5000 Offline Controller
Standalone Accessories
ES-5538
Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld
Device (HHD)
ES-5796
Proximity & Smart Keyfobs with iButton® Option
ES-5545
CL-ENCODER2 Magnetic Stripe
Credential Encoder
Electromechanical Locks
005024
Electromechanical Locks Introduction
004998
L-Series Mortise Electrified Lock
004999
ND-Series Cylindrical Electrified Lock
Readers
System Components
005028
System Components Introduction
Von Duprin Electric Strikes
005282
6100 Series Electric Strikes (Von Duprin)
005368
6200 Series Electric Strikes (Von Duprin)
003242
6300 Series Surface Mount Electric Strikes
ES-5990
5100 Series Electric Strikes
Electromagnetic Locks
M400 Series
004204
M490/492 Electromagnetic Locks
004205
M450/452 Electromagnetic Locks
004206
M420/422 Electromagnetic Locks
ES-6012
M490G Electromagnetic Gate Lock
M490DE Delayed Egress Electromagnetic Lock
005025
Readers Introduction
004762
005354
Multi-Technology Readers
Specialty
004256
FIPS 201-1 Compliant Readers
004160
GF3000 Mortise Mounted Shear Lock
Other Readers
004159
GF3000 Surface Mounted Shear Lock
004250
SERIII-W Scramble Keypad
ES-6013
004246
SMR10 & SMR20 Mercury Magnetic Stripe Readers
320M Mortise Mount MiniLine™ Electromagnetic
Lock
ES-5078
SMR5 Magnetic Stripe Reader
004156
40/70 Series Electromagnetic Locks
004252
SEKPDWG & SEKPDMGW Essex Electronic Keypads
Power Supplies
ES-5080
SWSRBL Wiegand Stripe Reader
PS900 Series Power Supplies
ES-5956
SENROLL Enrollment Reader
ES-5902
PS906 6 amp Power Supply
ES-5101
SBSRW Barcode Slot Reader
ES-5901
PS904 4 amp Power Supply
005000
KP212 and KP232 Mullion Mounted Keypad
ES-5900
PS902 2 amp Power Supply
005132
CRM2 and CRP2 Enrollment Readers
VD-5903
PS914 4 amp Power Supply (Von Duprin)
System Component Accessories
Credentials
Pushbuttons
005026
Credentials Introduction
ES-5975
620/631 Series Heavy Duty Pushbuttons
004992
Smart Credentials
003911
700 Series Pushbuttons
004993
Multi-Technology Credentials
ES-5977
740 Series Emergency Break Glass Release
004996
Proximity Credentials
ES-5979
660 Series Mini Station Control
004227
Proximity & Smart Keyfobs with iButton® Option
Keyswitches
004557
SWIEG Wiegand Card
ES-5978
650 Series Keyswitches
Request to Exit Bars
Biometrics
005027
Biometrics Introduction
HandKey® Biometric Hand Geometry Readers
004397
Biometric Access Control Products Quick Reference
004535
HandKey® II Biometric Hand Geometry Reader
003909
672 Series TouchBar
ES-5899
692 Series SmartBar™
Monitoring Stations and Consoles
ES-5988
800 Series Remote and Local Monitoring Stations
ES-5983
8200 Series Consoles
Other
ES-5984
Scan II™ Passive Infrared Motion Sensors
ES-5985
Electronic Horns
ES-5986
Door Position Switches
ES-5987
Armored Door Cords with Caps
005011
PB405 and PB405S Electrified Deadbolts
Appendix
005138
Appendix Introduction
Resource Guides
004085
AD-Series Resource Guide
004084
CO-Series Resource Guide
ES-6047
Credentials Resource Guide
005223
Biometric HandKey® Resource Guide
Solution Sheets
005082
Networked Access Control Solution
005104
Enterprise Security Solution
005105
Standalone Access Control Solution
000076
Open Architecture Solution
Wiring Diagrams
104967
2 Door PS902-4RL-SI 2xM400Plus Maglocks 2xCard
Reader - Rev B
104968
2 Single Doors 7982 Controller 2x4840 4xPushbuttons - Rev B
104969
Pair PS914-2RS 2xEL-RX99 SXF1500 2xDPS - Rev B
104970
Pair PS914-2RS EL 4640 2xPB Keyswitch x Remote
PB
104971
Pair with Mullion PS902-2Q 2xQEL99 SXF1500
9553 2x8310-856- Rev B
104972
Single 4600AO 6000FSE Electric Strike 2xPB - Rev B
104973
Single PS914-FA CX99 EPT10 DPS - Access Control
Option - Rev B
104974
Single PS902 5100FSE Electric Strike - Rev B
104975
Single PS902 L9080EU CT5000 SXF1500 Remote PB
104976
Single PS902 ND80EU Remote PB KP232
104977
Single PS902-FA M400 Maglock CT5000 SXF1500
SCAN ll 621DA PB
104978
Single SBB AD300
104979
Single SBB AD400 PIM400-485-SBB
104980
Single SBB SBB-RI Card Reader FSE Electric Strike
DPS SCAN ll
104981
Single SMS SRCNX-R AD300
104982
Single SMS SRCNX-R AD400 PIM400-485-SMS
104983
Single SMS SRCNX-R SRINX Card Reader FSE
Electric Strike DPS SCAN ll
104984
Single PS904 PS914 2xEL99 HKII Remote Release
Computer
105348
Single AD-300 PIB300-2D ACP by others Weigand
- Rev A
105349
Single AD-300 IR Integrated Partner ACP RS485 Rev A
105350
Single AD-400 PIM400-TD2 ACP by others Wiegand
- Rev A
105351
Single AD-400 PIM400-485 IR Integrated Partner
ACP RS485 - Rev A
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand Company
005157
06/12
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog covers
Schlage’s Security Management System, bright blue and
Video Solutions.
Overview
grow to more than 100 offline doors as it
Schlage provides a comprehensive suite of
has a grouping feature for mass-assignment
access control and video solutions to meet
of people and doors. With SMS Select, you
the security needs and budget of virtually any
can also design and create photo ID badges
customer. With our Standalone, Networked and
as well as associate video clips with offline
Enterprise offerings, we can help you find the
lock transactions. It also delivers advanced
right solution – whether you’re a small office
reporting capabilities and can be seamlessly
building, a university or a global corporation,
upgraded to online levels of SMS. Supported
we have the right products to meet your needs
devices include Schlage’s AD-200, AD-250,
today and grow with you into the future.
CO-200 and CO-250.
Standalone Solutions
Networked Solutions
• SMS Express is an offline, user-friendly and
• bright blue® is the easiest to use web-based
affordable solution that is perfect for small
access control solution on the market today.
to medium sized organizations with basic
It supports up to 32 online devices including
access control needs. It’s best for installations
Schlage’s AD-300 hardwired and AD-400
with less than 100 doors where real-time
wireless electronic locks as well as standard
information is not required. Supported
proximity, magnetic stripe and smart card
devices include Schlage’s AD-200, CO-200,
readers. We use state-of-the-art embedded
CT-5000 offline controller and the BE367
intelligence technology, which means that
Programmable Electronic Deadbolt.
the software resides on the controller board.
• SMS Select was designed for small to
This allows you to access your system like
medium sized organizations as well as colleges
any other web page on the internet. Simply
and universities utilizing offline locks. It’s the
connect a network cable and you are ready to
right choice for any organization that may
manage your system.
Access Control & Video Solutions
Access Control
& Video Solutions
Access Control & Video Solutions
Enterprise Solutions
Video Solutions
• SMS Premier was developed for medium to
• Video surveillance is a critical component to
large sized organizations including financial
any security system. It provides a visual record
institutions, colleges, hospitals, government
of who comes in and out of your facilities and
facilities and more. It supports online and
can be a powerful crime and theft deterrent.
offline devices within the same environment
Schlage’s video solutions can be stand alone
and gives you the ability to manage multi-site
or easily integrated into your bright blue®
facilities either centrally or individually. In
web-based access control system or Security
addition, card transactions can be associated
Management System. Our solutions deliver
with video clips and badging photos for fast
advanced monitoring, with easy investigation
incident recognition and/or resolution. 1, 5, or
and surveillance management features across
10 client licenses are available. Supports AD-
analog, IP and hybrid environments. Whether
Series and CO-Series electronic locks as well
your organization consists of a single facility
as Wiegand readers.
or multiple facilities worldwide, Schlage
• SMS Enterprise was developed specifically
for large, multi-site or global organizations.
It includes all of the features of SMS Premier
along with a standard visitor management
module, redundant recovery option, alarm
graphics package and two-man rule feature.
It also supports an unlimited number of client
licenses to meets the needs of the world’s
largest organizations. Supports AD-Series and
CO-Series electronic locks as well as Wiegand
readers.
delivers the tools you need to manage your
facility with ease and efficiency.
Handheld Programming Device
Used to configure locks and
transfer audits from locks to
the software.
PS902
Power Supply
Interior Facility Doors
AD-200, CO-200: Integrated offline locks
store time zones access rights and audits.
Access Control & Video Solutions
Standalone Access Control Solution:
SMS Express 4.0 or higher
Software running on computer.
CT5000 Offline
Controller
Automatic Operator
SXF1550
Proximity Reader
LCN
856 Push Button
Credentials
Perimeter Facility Door
* Example shown is a typical standalone access
control opening with an automatic operator.
Networked Access Control Solution:
SBB - Schlage
bright blue® controller
Web Browser/Video Client
L AN
 Connect multiple
facilities that reside
on the same LAN:
ANY COMBINATION OF UP TO 32 DEVICES
RS485
RS485
SEVMS-SBB
Network Video Recorder
DIRECT VIA
RS485
PIM400-485-SBB
SBB-RI
WIEGAND
Extend the reach of your
system with the bright blue
Network Reader Interface
(SBB-NRI). The SBB-NRI
is IP-based and connects
directly to your network
so it can be located at any
remote opening or facility
that is on the same network
as your bright blue®
controller.
L AN
ETHERNET
SBB-NRI
WIEGAND
Schlage Reader
Schlage AD-300
Hardwired Lock
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16 Devices per
PIM400-485-SBB)
Schlage Reader
SIPCAM-100
IP Mini Dome Camera
Enterprise Security Solution:
File Server: Houses SMS server
software and all system processes
Client Workstation: System available with 1, 5, 10, and 25
client licenses. Each client license enables 1 concurrent user.
Client software must be installed on workstation
L AN / W A N
Enterprise Video
Management System
(SEVMS)
Smart Reader Controller
(SSRC)
New Reader Controller
(SRCNX-R)
UP TO 1 READER OR 8 AD-300's OR 16 AD-400's
RS485
ANY COMBINATION OF UP TO 16 DEVICES
WIEGAND
RS485
RS485
DIRECT VIA
RS485
DIRECT VIA
RS485
PIM400-485-SMS
SRINX
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16
Devices per
PIM400-485-SMS)
Schlage
Reader
PIM400-485-SMS
Up to 32 analog or
IP cameras per
DVR/NVR
Schlage
Reader
Schlage
AD-300
Hardwired
Lock
AD-200 Standalone Locks
• Manage access rights, time zones and holidays
with SMS Enterprise Software
• Utilize HHD Handheld Device to configure locks and
transfer updates & audits between software and locks
Schlage
AD-300
Hardwired
Lock
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16
Devices per
PIM400-485SMS)
Schlage Enterprise Video Solutions:
• Multiple hardware and storage configurations
• SMS supports an unlimited number of NVR/DVRs
• Automatically associate digital video to access transactions
Access Control & Video Solutions
ACVS Software Comparison
PRODUCT
LEVEL
Security Management System
bright blue®
Express
Select
Premier
Enterprise
Online Devices
N/A
N/A
Unlimited
Unlimited
32
Offline Devices
100 lock max. at
1000 users
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
N/A
Users/Cardholders
50 locks max. at
2000 users
5000
Unlimited
Unlimited
5000
Concurrent System Operators
1
Up to 5
Up to 10
Unlimited
1
Time Zones
8
8
Unlimited
Unlimited
100
Holidays
16
16
Unlimited
Unlimited
100
Integrated Photo ID Badging
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Visitor Management Module
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Optional Integrated Video
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Transaction Monitoring
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Alarm Graphics
No
No
No
Yes
No
Alarm Monitoring
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
No
Credentialenabled only
Credentialenabled only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Anti-Passback
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Standard Reports
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Door Status Monitoring
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manual Overrides
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
First Person In Rule
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Elevator Control
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
PC-Based
PC-Based
Client/Server
Client/Server
Web-based
Multi-Panel Support
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
No
Automatic Back-Up
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Import and Export Capabilities
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dealer Certification Required
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
System Capacity
Software Features
Lockdown
System Information
System Software Architecture
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand 005021 08/11
bright blue® Controller
Overview
bright blue® is a web-based access control system from
Schlage. Its embedded intelligence design means it does not
require special software installation or a dedicated PC. Any
computer running a standard web browser can be used to
access, monitor and manage your system. The system’s userfriendly design means that anyone can use it, making access
control a simple part of your busy life.
This system is web-based so you can access it like any other
web page on the internet. bright blue® comes network-ready
and easily connects to your network using an Ethernet port.
After the controller is hooked up, you simply use any networkconnected computer to access and manage your system. It’s
web-based design makes installation a breeze.
Everything about Schlage’s bright blue® is easy - from
installation and training to system management, support
and maintenance. It is user-friendly and reliable. The system
provides easy-to-use configuration wizards and help tips so
that even novice computer users will be able to set up and
navigate their access control system. The configuration wizards
allow you to add personnel, set up doors, and assign personnel
access to doors based on their time schedules.
Enhance your security system with bright blue® video
integration. When used with bright blue, each card swipe
can be linked to video, thereby allowing the user to perform
investigations with accuracy.
Features and Benefits
• Support for up to 32 doors and 5000 cardholders
• Built-in web server
• Standardized reports
• System back-up
• Access anytime, anywhere, with a network connected
computer
• Anti-passback function to eliminate unauthorized entry
• Manual overrides to temporarily unlock doors
• Native communication to Schlage’s hardwired and
wireless networked electronic locks, including the
AD-Series
• Holiday and event scheduling
• Door status monitoring
• Remote access and administration
• Flashable firmware upgrades
• Video integration available
• User-selectable language: English, Spanish, Portuguese
• Includes enclosure, lock and tamper switch
• BAA compliant
SBB bright blue® Controller
Access Control and Video Systems
SBB
SIMPLE AND SECURE
All User ID’s and passwords are protected with
security encryption providing you with secure access
to monitor, control and manage your system’s personnel
data, transactions, and activities. bright blue® provides
you with three log-on access levels including User,
Operator and Administrator. Each level provides a
different set of access rights to the system. That way,
system users will only be able to access functions that
you want them to manage or view. The bright blue®
controller is also built on a Linux operating system,
which means that your system is very stable and secure
from external threats.
Specifications
Supports up to 32 devices
Database
8GB flash drive
Rating
NEMA 1 rated locking enclosure with
tamper switch
Operating System
Linux
Microprocessor
32-bit, 200 MHz NET+ARM
Encryption
SSL
Web-browsers Supported
Internet Explorer v7.0 - 9.0 and
FireFox v3.0 - 6.0
Ethernet
10/100 Base-T
Supports DHCP or Static IP addressing
SAVE MONEY WITH SCHLAGE
64MB flash memory and 64MB SRAM
bright blue® is not only simple, but saves you money
too! The web-based application eliminates the need
for a dedicated PC and software as with conventional
access control systems. Furthermore, when you utilize
Schlage’s hardwired and wireless electronic locks,
including the AD-Series, it eliminates the need for a
reader interface and other door hardware, resulting in
hundreds of dollars in savings per door.
Supports magnetic stripe, proximity and smart card technologies
Power Requirements
12VDC to 24 VDC
Power Consumption
250mA (excluding peripheral devices)
Operating Temperature
0°C to 30°C; 32°F to 85°F
Humidity
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Board Dimensions
11.5” H x 11.5” W
Enclosure Dimensions
14” H x 14” W x 3.5” D
Battery backup available with Schlage UL listed power supplies
ORDERING INFORMATION
SBB - bright blue® Controller
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003921
06/12
bright blue® Reader Interface
Overview
The SBB-RI offers a cost effective, modular approach to
access control system design. The SBB-RI is the bridge between
the reader controller and the reader, and is supported by the
Schlage bright blue® Reader Controller (SBB). The SBB-RI is
compatible with several read head technologies.
Features and Benefits
• SBB-RI connects one reader via RS485 protocol to
the SBB reader controller
• Compatible with proximity, smart card, biometrics,
magnetic stripe, barcode and Wiegand read head
technologies
• Two form C, single pole/double throw, mechanically
latching 1A relays (pre-programmed for dedicated
functionality)
• Four contact inputs
-- Door exit request
-- Door position switch
-- Push button override
-- Auxiliary input
• Metal enclosure with hinged and dual screw door
• On board connection for tamper switch
• Tamper switch, lock & key option available
• BAA complaint
SBB-RI bright blue® Reader Interface
Access Control and Video Systems
SBB-RI
Specifications
Dimensions
3-3/16" H x 3-3/16" W x 3/4" D
Enclosure
8.25" H x 7.5" W x 3.5" D
Power Requirements
12VDC to 24 VDC, can be powered
from reader controller or locally
Power Consumption
300mA (with read head)
Ambient Temperature
(without heater)
32° – 120°F or 0° – 49°C
Humidity
10% - 90% (non-condensing)
Maximum Distance to SBB
4,000 feet, RS485 data
Recommended Cable to Read Head
18 AWG/6 COND, stranded, shielded,
twisted
Recommended Cable to the
SBB Controller
18 AWG/4 COND, stranded, shielded,
twisted
NEMA 1 rated enclosure with optional lock and tamper switch
ORDERING INFORMATION
SBB-RI - bright blue® Reader Interface
OPTIONS
SLOCKRI - Enclosure Lock (comes with (2) keys, tamper
switch and cables)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003858
06/12
bright blue® Network Reader
Interface
Overview
The SBB-NRI is a cost-effective solution that can extend the
reach of your bright blue® system. This IP-based reader
interface is perfect for remote locations where wiring can be a
challenge. The SBB-NRI connects to the SBB controller board
via your network, allowing you to bring remotely located
readers online with your bright blue® access control system.
The SBB-NRI is compatible with most card readers (any device
with a Wiegand output), including the Schlage SXF Series Card
Readers.
Features and Benefits
• SBB-NRI connects to a card reader via Wiegand
protocol, and then over the network to the SBB
reader controller
• 10 Base-T Ethernet connection
• Supports DHCP or Static IP addressing
• Compatible with proximity, magnetic stripe
and smart card technologies
• Suitable for small to mid-sized organizations with
remote locations and an available IP network
• Reduces wiring and labor costs
• SBB-NRIs and SBB-RIs can be combined
on a bright blue® system
• Compatible with most card readers
(any device with a Wiegand output)
• Two form C, single pole/double throw, mechanically
latching 1A relays (pre-programmed for dedicated
functionality)
• Four contact inputs
-- Door exit request
-- Door position switch
-- Push button override
-- Auxiliary input
• BAA compliant
SBB-NRI bright blue® Network Reader Interface
Access Control and Video Systems
SBB-NRI
Specifications
Standard Ethernet network connection
Dimensions
3.187" H x 3.187" W x 1.75" D
Enclosure
7.5" H x 8.25" W x 3.5" D
Power Requirements
20VDC to 32VDC
Power Consumption
300mA (without read head)
Ambient Temperature
(without heater)
32° – 120°F or 0° – 49°C
Humidity
85% +/- 5%
Recommended Cable
to the Read Head
18 AWG/6 COND, stranded,
shielded, twisted
NEMA 1 rated enclosure with optional lock and tamper switch
Battery Backup
available with Schlage UL listed power supplies
ORDERING INFORMATION
SBB-NRI
bright blue® Network Reader Interface
SBB-NRIUL bright blue® Network Reader Interface with UL
approved Ethernet Data Suppressor
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
SLOCK
Enclosure Lock (includes (2) keys, tamper switch
and cables)
PS902
2A @ 12/24 VDC-field selectable
900-BBK
Battery Backup Kit (includes two 7A/hr batteries)
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003949
06/12
bright blue® Badging
Overview
The SPEBBLE Printer offers brilliant vibrant images printed
on demand or in volume. The SPEBBLE supports single-sided
edge-to-edge printing. Print high resolution texts, logos,
pictures, signatures and barcodes in just a few seconds. Its
compact and ergonomic design allows it to integrate on any
reception desk or office environment.
Features and Benefits
• Full color edge to edge printing
• Integrated ribbon saver for monochrome printing
• 150 cards per hour in color and 1000 cards
per hour in monochrome
• The printer allows for automatic or manual feed
• Provides single side printing
• Provides color dye sublimation and monochrome
thermal transfer printing
• Software for designing and editing badges
SPEBBLE bright blue® Badging
Access Control and Video Systems
SPEBBLE
Specifications
Resolution:
300dpi
Card Types
PVC, Composite PVC, ABS and special
varnished plastic cards
Card Formats
ISO CR-80, ISO 7810 (3.375" x 2.125")
Card Thickness
.25mm (10mil) to 1mm (40mil)
Print Area
Edge-to-edge
Input Hopper
300 cards
Exit Hopper
150 cards
Interface
USB and Ethernet TCP-IP connections
RAM
16MB
Dimensions
7.55" H x 9.25" W x 15.59" L
Weight
13 lbs
Operating Temp.
59 to 86° F
Power source
AC power source AC110/230v 50/60Hz
Compatible with Windows™ XP, Vista and 7
ORDERING INFORMATION
SPEBBLE - Standard Printer
OPTIONS
SPEBRIBBON - 250 print color ribbon
SPEBRIBBON-B - 500 print black only ribbon
SPEBCLEAN - Cleaning kit
NOTE: Badge printer is a standalone system.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005046
06/12
Offline Locks
Feature
AD-200
SMS Express
AD-250
SMS S/P/E
SMS S/P/E
5,000
Users: Unlimited
Audits: 10,000
System Capacity at Lock
*Number of Users or Audits/Locks
2,000 users/audits
1,000 users/audits
50 lock max.
100 lock max.
Holidays
16
32
32
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
8
16
16
Auto Unlocks
8
8
8
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
No
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (aptiQ™ Smart Cards)
Yes
No
3-6 digit PIN
3-6 digit PIN
3-8 digit PIN
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Office/Toggle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Privacy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Apartment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
Yes
No
Freeze Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lock Down Credential
No
No
No
Reader
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
Lock Functions
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded versions of software:
SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher.
Previous versions (SMS Express 3.5.7 and older) support 1000 Users/Audits and 100 locks,
and do not include AD-Series and CO-Series software labels.
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Locking Solutions
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Hardwired
and Wireless Locks
Feature
AD-300 & AD-400
bright blue®
SMS P/E
System Capacity at Lock
Number of User
5,000
Unlimited
Holidays
100
Unlimited
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
100
Unlimited
** Degraded Cache Mode
Yes
Yes
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes
Yes
Up to 4 digit PIN
Up to 4 digit PIN
Request to Exit
Yes
Yes
Door Position Switch
Yes
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Yes
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Yes
Yes
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Request to Enter
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes (AD-400 only)
Deadbolt Position
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Communication Status
Yes
Yes
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes AD-400 only)
Reader
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
*** Wake-up On Radio Lockdown
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes, w/RS485 connection to host
No
Privacy
No
No
Apartment
No
No
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
No
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
No
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
No
No
Freeze Credential
No
No
Lock Down Credential
Yes
No
Office/Toggle
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded v ersions of
software: SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher
* Larger systems should consider SMS Select for better database manageability.
** If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user IDs, option to expand to
1,000. Or, use facility/site codes instead of user IDs. No events are
captured in audit trail when operating in cache mode.
*** Wake-up on Radio over PIM400-485 on up to 16 doors requires
implementation of specific RSI commands. Also available on PIM400-TD2.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005076 03/12
Overview
The Security Management System from Schlage delivers a
powerful, single source solution for integrating a facility’s
access-control technologies, digital video, and alarm monitoring
systems. Four software levels are provided to meet your current
security requirements and can expand to meet your growing
business needs, while satisfying your budget constraints.
Security Management System Express: Includes One client
license. Supports Schlage AD-200, CO-200, CM, KC-2, CT-1000
and BE367 offline locks.
Security Management System Select: One or Five client
packages are available. Supports Schlage offline locks, including
AD-Series, CO-Series, CM and CL.
Security Management System Premier: One, Five, or
Ten client packages are available. Supports Schlage online and
offline locks, including AD-Series, CO-Series, CM, CL, VIP,
Wireless and Wiegand devices.
Security Management System Enterprise: One, Five,
Ten or Twenty-Five client packages are available. Single client
expansions after 25 are available. Supports Schlage online and
offline locks, including AD-Series, CO-Series, CM, CL, VIP,
Wireless and Wiegand devices.
SMS Software Levels
Access Control and Video Systems
SMS Software Levels
EXPRESS
SELECT
PREMIER
ENTERPRISE
Security Management System Software
Features & Benefits
Reports
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
AD-200 & CO-200 Offline Lock Management
Transaction Monitoring
(sync required for offline devices)
5-Client Expansion (Optional)
n
n
n
Automatic Overrides
n
n
n
History Archive
n
n
n
System Security
n
n
n
Badging
n
n
n
Multiple Clients
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
AD-250 & CO-250 Offline Lock Management
Video Retrieval Tied To Audit Events
CCTV/Universal Interface
n
Schlage Enterprise DVR (Optional)
n
n
10 - Client Expansion (Optional)
n
n
Manual Overrides
n
n
Alarm Monitoring
n
n
Audit Trail
n
n
n
n
n
n
Portrait Monitoring
Guest Pass (Optional)
n
Guest Pass (Single Seat - Standard)
n
Report Scheduling
n
Two-Man Rule
n
Alarm Graphic
n
Redundant Recovery (Optional)
n
25 Client Expansion (Optional)
n
Single Client Expansion After 25 (Optional)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003944
06/12
Overview
The Schlage Security Management System delivers a powerful,
single source solution for integrating a facility’s access-control
technologies, digital video, and alarm monitoring systems.
Four software levels are provided to meet your current security
requirements and can expand to meet your growing business
needs, while satisfying your budget constraints.
The Enterprise system is perfect for large, multi-site or global
organizations. It supports an unlimited number of cardholders
and readers and gives you unparalleled flexibility by supporting
both online and offline devices. The Enterprise system also
enables an organization to manage facility administration from
any location and provides real-time monitoring and audit trails.
Features and Benefits
Access Control Features
• Anti-passback
• Two-man rule and occupancy rule
• First card in capability
• Temporary usage badges
• Portrait monitoring
• Unlimited reports
• Report scheduling
• ODBC Compliant
• Online and offline lock integration
• Manual and automatic overrides
• Full-featured Guest Pass system
• Design and print badges
• Programmable flash for downloads and firmware
updates
• Wireless reader devices
• Unlimited holidays
• Unlimited cardholders and readers
• Unlimited number of concurrent
users available
• Unlimited time zones
(continued)
SMS Enterprise Software
Access Control and Video Systems
SMS Enterprise
Software
Access Control Features
(continued)
• Universal triggers
• Schlage AD-Series and CO-Series lock support
• Video retrieval tied to access control events (optional)
• BAA compliant
Alarm Management Features
• Color coded Alarms
• User-definable individual alarm instructions
• Pre-defined responses
• Send alarms to operator or email
• Keypad duress alarm
• Alarm annunciation
• Alarm graphics
Video Features
(See SEVMS datasheets for specifications)
• Full integration with Schlage DVR/NVR
• High resolution video motion detection with masking
capabilities
• Search on video motion detection
• Uninterrupted recording during playback and image
archiving
• Remote viewing
• Send video clips via email
• Customizable pre and post-recording upon an event
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing encrypted
files
• Scalable
• 100% date/time synchronization
• Full PTZ functionality
• Virtual camera grouping across servers
• Advanced security permissions
• Database backup and recovery
• Audio per camera available
• Accepts analog and/or IP addressable cameras
Usability Features
• Configuration wizards
• Easy-to-navigate
• Customizable views per operator
• Unlimited User-defined fields
Operating System Compatibility
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1A, SP2 or SP3
• Microsoft Windows 2003 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows 2008 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows Vista SP1 and SP2 (all versions except Home Edition)
• Microsoft Windows 7 (all versions except Home Edition)
• VM ESX 3.5 or up to VSphere (ESX 4.0) - All service pack levels.
-- An ‘Anywhere USB’ device is required if running a multi-user system
in a VM ware environment
ORDERING INFORMATION
SOFTWARE ONLY
E-SENT-SFT-1 - Enterprise software with 1 client license
E-SENT-SFT-5 - Enterprise software with 5 client licenses
E-SENT-SFT-10NSQL -Enterprise software with 10 client licenses (Microsoft SQL not included)
E-SENT-SFT-25NSQL - Enterprise software with 25 client licenses (Microsoft SQL not included)
E-SENT-SFT-EXPNSQL - 1 client expansion license; for greater than
25 licenses (Microsoft SQL not included)
SOFTWARE & SERVER
E-SENT-SVR-1 - Includes server, monitor, keyboard, mouse and
software with 1 client license
E-SENT-SVR-5 - Includes server, keyboard, mouse and software
with 5 client licenses (monitor sold separately)
*For specific requirements for larger systems, please contact
Technical Support
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003943
06/12
Overview
The Schlage Security Management System delivers a powerful,
single source solution for integrating a facility’s access-control
technologies, digital video, and alarm monitoring systems.
Features and Benefits
Access Control Features
Four software levels are provided to meet your current security
requirements and can expand to meet your growing business
needs, while satisfying your budget constraints.
The Premier system is perfect for medium to large organizations
and supports both online and offline devices. It provides
unparalleled flexibility by supporting an unlimited number of
cardholders, readers and alarm points. The Premier system also
enables an organization to manage facility administration from
any location and provides real-time monitoring and audit trails.
• Anti-passback
• First card in capability
• Temporary usage badges
• Portrait monitoring
• Unlimited reports
• ODBC Compliant
• Online and offline lock integration
• Manual and automatic overrides
• Full-featured Guest Pass system (optional)
• Design and print badges
• Programmable flash for downloads
and firmware updates
• Wireless reader devices
• Unlimited holidays
• Unlimited cardholders and readers
• Unlimited time zones
• Universal triggers
• Schlage AD-Series and CO-Series
lock support
• Video retrieval tied to access control
events (optional)
• BAA compliant
SMS Premier Software
Access Control and Video Systems
SMS Premier Software
Alarm Management Features
Operating System Compatibility
• Color coded Alarms
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1A, SP2 or SP3
• Microsoft Windows 2003 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows 2008 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows Vista SP1 and SP2 (all versions except Home Edition)
• Microsoft Windows 7 (all versions except Home Edition)
• VM ESX 3.5 or up to VSphere (ESX 4.0) - All service pack levels.
-- An ‘Anywhere USB’ device is required if running a multi-user system
in a VM ware environment
• User-definable individual alarm instructions
• Pre-defined responses
• Send alarms to operator or email
• Keypad duress alarm
• Alarm annunciation
Video Features
(See SEVMS datasheets for specifications)
• Full integration with Schlage DVR/NVR
• High resolution video motion detection with
masking capabilities
• Search on video motion detection
• Uninterrupted recording during playback and
image archiving
• Remote viewing
• Send video clips via email
• Customizable pre and post-recording upon an
event
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing
encrypted files
• Scalable
• 100% date/time synchronization
• Full PTZ functionality
• Virtual camera grouping across servers
• Advanced security permissions
• Database backup and recovery
• Audio per camera available
• Accepts analog and/or IP addressable cameras
Usability Features
• Configuration wizards
ORDERING INFORMATION
SOFTWARE ONLY
SPRE-SFT-1 - Premier software with 1 client license
SPRE-SFT-5 - Premier software with 5 client licenses
SPRE-SFT-10NSQL - Premier software with 10 client licenses
(Microsoft SQL not included)
• Easy-to-navigate
• Customizable views per operator
SOFTWARE & SERVER
• Unlimited User-defined fields
SPRE-SVR-1 - Includes server, monitor, keyboard, mouse and
software with 1 client license
SPRE-SVR-5 - Includes server, keyboard, mouse and software with
5 client licenses. Monitor sold separately.
*For specific requirements for larger systems, please contact Technical
Support
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003942
06/12
Overview
The Schlage Security Management System delivers a powerful,
single source solution for integrating a facility’s access-control
technologies, digital video, and alarm monitoring systems.
Four software levels are provided to meet your current security
requirements and can expand to meet your growing business
needs, while satisfying your budget constraints.
The Select system is ideal for small to medium sized
organizations utilizing offline locks. The Select system also
enables an organization to design and create badges as well
as associate video with offline locks.
Features and Benefits
Access Control Features
• First card in capability
• Temporary usage badges
• Unlimited reports
• ODBC and MDAC Compliant
• Schlage AD-Series and CO-Series offline lock support
• Design and print badges
• Reports
• Video retrieval tied to access control events (optional)
• BAA compliant
Video Features
• Full integration with Schlage DVR/NVR
• High resolution video motion detection with masking
capabilities
• Search on video motion detection
• Uninterrupted recording during playback
and image archiving
• Remote viewing
• Send video clips via email
• Customizable pre and post-recording
upon an event
(continued)
SMS Select Software
Access Control and Video Systems
SMS Select Software
Video Features
Operating System Compatibility
(continued)
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1A, SP2 or SP3
• Microsoft Windows 2003 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows 2008 Server SP1 and SP2 (32bit or 64bit)
• Microsoft Windows Vista SP1 and SP2 (all versions except Home Edition)
• Microsoft Windows 7 (all versions except Home Edition)
• VM ESX 3.5 or up to VSphere (ESX 4.0) - All service pack levels.
-- An ‘Anywhere USB’ device is required if running a multi-user system
in a VM ware environment
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing encrypted
files
• Scalable
• 100% date/time synchronization
• Full PTZ functionality
• Virtual camera grouping across servers
• Advanced security permissions
• Database backup and recovery
• Audio per camera available
• Web-based option
• Accepts analog and/or IP addressable cameras
Usability Features
• Configuration wizards
• Easy-to-navigate
• Customizable views per operator
• Unlimited user-defined fields
ORDERING INFORMATION
SOFTWARE ONLY
SSEL-SFT-1 - Select software with 1 license
SSEL-SFT-5 - Select software with 5 client licenses
SOFTWARE & SERVER
SSEL-SVR-1 - Includes server, monitor, keyboard, mouse and
software with 1 license
SSEL-SVR-5 - Includes server, keyboard, mouse and software with 5
client licenses (monitor sold separately)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003941
06/12
Overview
The Schlage Security Management System delivers a powerful,
single source solution for integrating a facility’s access-control
technologies, digital video, and alarm monitoring systems.
Four software levels are provided to meet your current security
requirements and can expand to meet your growing business
needs, while satisfying your budget constraints.
The Express level software is designed for facilities with basic
access control needs. It supports Schlage offline locks and is
recommended for smaller systems. New users or access points
can be entered into the system in seconds. Reporting capability
is available to show audit trails retrieved, access privileges
granted, and time functions established by either user or door.
Features and Benefits
• Effective, simple means to manage access control within
your facility
• Manages PIN Codes, iButtons, Magnetic Stripe Cards,
Proximity and Smart Card Credentials
• Normal (momentary) use access
• Toggle (maintained) use access
• One-time access
• Pass-through access
• Supports credential activation and deactivation
• Support Card and PIN for higher security
• Auto unlock schedules- allows weekly repeating for
automatic locking and unlocking of doors (Up to 16
defined per system; up to 8 assigned per lock)
• Supports magnetic stripe, proximity and smart cards
• Supported devices include CO-200, AD-200, CM, KC-2,
CT-1000, CT5000 and BE367 (Programmable Electronic
Deadbolt)
• Supports Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit) Professional
and higher
• User times zones- limits the hours and days a
user can access assigned points (Up to 8)
(continued)
SMS Express Software
Access Control and Video Systems
SMS Express Software
Features and Benefits
(continued)
• Holidays- suspends normal operations for user
defined periods per door during non-normal days
(Up to 16)
• Import utility to easily upgrade software level
• Users/Audits and Lock support*
- 2,000 Users/Audits and 50 Locks/Devices
- 1,000 Users/Audits and 100 Locks/Devices
• Supports 12 button keypad with up to 6 digit PIN
codes
• Duplicate PIN notification feature
• BAA compliant
Accessories
• HHD KIT - Handheld device to manage Schlage
offline locks (USB Cable included for managing
AD-Series and CO-Series locks)
• HHD-USB - Additional or replacement cable used to
connect HHD to AD-Series and CO-Series products
• HH-Serial - Serial Cable used in conjunction with
HHD KIT and CIP for managing legacy Schlage
offline locks
• P512112 - Computer interface module used in
conjunction with HH-Serial Cable for managing
legacy Schlage offline locks
• P101203 - Computer Interface module with ibutton
reader used in conjunction with HH-Serial Cable for
managing legacy Schlage offline locks
• P394548 - Female/female serial cable. Used to
connect computer interface module to laptop/pc
• SDB9USBCBL - six inch cable adapter allows a serial
port device to be used with a USB port device (for
use with PS12112)
• CRP2 - Proximity Credential Enrollment Reader.
Used to read proximity data for enrollment into
Schlage Security Management software database;
USB connectivity; compatible with SMS Express
4.0 and higher
• CRM2 - Magnetic Stripe Credential Enrollment Reader.
Used to read magnetic stripe data for enrollment into
Schlage Security Management software database;
USB connectivity; compatible with SMS Express 4.0
and higher
* Larger systems should consider SMS Select for
improved database managability.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Specifications
Hardware
Intel Pentium II processor (Pentium III or IV recommended), CD-Rom, Mouse or compatible pointing
device, VGA or Super VGA Monitor, Keyboard
Hard Disk Space
1 GB for software; will require additional space for
stored data
Memory
256 MB RAM minimum or the memory required for
the operating system, whichever is greater
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP and XP Professional SP1/
SP2, Windows Vista 32-bit (except Home or Starter
Edition), Windows 7 32-bit & 64-bit Professional
and higher
Reports with the built-in viewer Internet Explorer 6
or higher must be installed.
Required for
programming with
Security Management
System software
For offline locking system programming using a
Schlage approved HHD device the following is
required:
• Available USB port on the PC
• Approved HHD device with installed
communications software and interface cables
from Schlage
For offline legacy locking system programming
done directly from the PC, the following is required:
• Available USB port on the PC
• Programming interface cables
ORDERING INFORMATION
SXPR-SFT-1 - SMS Express software only
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003940
12/11
Offline Locks
Feature
AD-200
SMS Express
AD-250
SMS S/P/E
SMS S/P/E
5,000
Users: Unlimited
Audits: 10,000
System Capacity at Lock
*Number of Users or Audits/Locks
2,000 users/audits
1,000 users/audits
50 lock max.
100 lock max.
Holidays
16
32
32
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
8
16
16
Auto Unlocks
8
8
8
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
No
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (aptiQ™ Smart Cards)
Yes
No
3-6 digit PIN
3-6 digit PIN
3-8 digit PIN
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Office/Toggle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Privacy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Apartment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
Yes
No
Freeze Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lock Down Credential
No
No
No
Reader
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
Lock Functions
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded versions of software:
SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher.
Previous versions (SMS Express 3.5.7 and older) support 1000 Users/Audits and 100 locks,
and do not include AD-Series and CO-Series software labels.
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Locking Solutions
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Hardwired
and Wireless Locks
Feature
AD-300 & AD-400
bright blue®
SMS P/E
System Capacity at Lock
Number of User
5,000
Unlimited
Holidays
100
Unlimited
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
100
Unlimited
** Degraded Cache Mode
Yes
Yes
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes
Yes
Up to 4 digit PIN
Up to 4 digit PIN
Request to Exit
Yes
Yes
Door Position Switch
Yes
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Yes
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Yes
Yes
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Request to Enter
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes (AD-400 only)
Deadbolt Position
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Communication Status
Yes
Yes
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes AD-400 only)
Reader
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
*** Wake-up On Radio Lockdown
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes, w/RS485 connection to host
No
Privacy
No
No
Apartment
No
No
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
No
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
No
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
No
No
Freeze Credential
No
No
Lock Down Credential
Yes
No
Office/Toggle
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded v ersions of
software: SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher
* Larger systems should consider SMS Select for better database manageability.
** If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user IDs, option to expand to
1,000. Or, use facility/site codes instead of user IDs. No events are
captured in audit trail when operating in cache mode.
*** Wake-up on Radio over PIM400-485 on up to 16 doors requires
implementation of specific RSI commands. Also available on PIM400-TD2.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005076 03/12
Offline LocksCO-200
Feature
SMS Express
SMS S/P/E
System Capacity at Lock
2,000 Users/Audits 1,000 Users/Audits
* Number of Users or Audits/Locks
2,000
50 Lock max.
100 Lock max.
Holidays
16
32
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
8
16
Auto Unlocks
8
8
Reader
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
125 kHz Prox Card
Yes
Yes
Status Monitors
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Office/Toggle
Yes
Yes
Privacy
Yes
Yes
Credential Attributes
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Yes
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
Yes
Freeze Credential
Yes
Yes
Lock Down Credential
No
No
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded versions of software:
SMS Express v4.0 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher.
Previous versions (SMS Express 3.5.7 and older) support 1000 Users/Audits and 100 locks,
and do not include AD-Series and CO-Series software labels.
* Larger systems should consider SMS Select for better database manageability.
CO-250
SMS S/P/E
Users: Unlimited
Audits: 4,000
32
Yes
16
8
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
CO Software Compatibility Matrix
Access Control and Video Systems
CO Software Capability Matrix
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004074
11/11
Smart Reader Controller
Overview
The Schlage Smart Reader Controller (SSRC) is an
intelligent device with a modular approach. The SSRC is an
independently programmable device that effectively combines
the capabilities of a controller and reader interface into a single
board. It communicates with the Security Management System
software via TCP/IP protocol and can be connected to a variety
of different read head technologies and electronic locking
devices. The communication architecture is capable of being fully
networked thereby saving the customer wiring and expensive
installation labor costs. Includes enclosure with a tamper switch,
lock and key.
Features and Benefits
• Software selectable options allow support for:
-- A single card reader, or
-- Up to (8) AD-300 Hardwired Locks, or
-- One PIM400-485-SMS for support of up to (16)
AD-400 Wireless Locks
• Linux operating system
• 64Mb flash memory & 64Mb RAM
• Clock/data, Wiegand or serial (RS232 or RS485; jumper
selectable)
• Supports proximity, smart card, magnetic stripe,
biometrics, bar code and Wiegand technologies
• Communicates via network protocol 10 Base-T Ethernet
• Connection for on-board unsupervised tamper switch
• Includes four supervised or unsupervised input contacts
for devices such as exit request (REX), door position
switch
(DOD), etc.
• Two Form ‘C’ single pole/double throw,
mechanically latching, 1 A relays
• BAA compliant
SSRC Smart Reader Controller
Access Control and Video Systems
SSRC
Specifications
Dimensions:
3-13/16” H x 3-13/16” W x 3/4” D
Enclosure:
8-1/4” H x 7-1/2” W x 3-1/2” D
Power requirements:
20 - 32VDC; powered locally
Power consumption:
100mA (without read heads)
Ambient temperature:
0° to 49° C or 32° to 120° F
Humidity:
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Recommended cable:
Network protocol 10 Base-T Ethernet
Compatible with Schlage Security Management System software version
5.3.1 and higher. Programming templates available in v5.3.5 and higher.
Requires a UL 294 power limited power supply
UL 294 Approved with UL approved ethernet data suppressor
Battery backup available with Schlage UL listed power supplies
ORDERING INFORMATION
SSRC - Smart Reader Controller
Note: SSRC can be ordered without enclosure. Use (NB) to
specify no box.
OPTIONS
PS902 - 2A @ 12/24 VDC-field selectable
900-BBK - Battery Backup Kit (includes two 7A/hr batteries)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003939
11/11
Reader Controller
Overview
The Reader Controller Board (SRCNX-R) is a newly designed
controller with updated technology that incorporates additional
memory and input / output capabilities onto a single back
board for easy installation. The back board includes an SSRC
Smart Reader Controller and expansion capabilities for two
optional SIONX-8 input / output boards. Compatible with
Schlage Security Management System software, the SRCNX-R
supports up to (16) devices including Wiegand, AD-300 Series
hardwired locks and AD-400 Series wireless locks. Mix and
match capabilities are supported within certain guidelines.
Similar devices only per channel. The SRCNX-R also serves as an
easy replacement for an existing SRCNX if necessary. Mounting
holes and the reader channel connectors are identical to the
original SRCNX reader controller for simplified replacement.
Includes enclosure with a tamper switch, lock and key.
Photo shown with all options
Features and Benefits
• On board 10 Base-T Ethernet connection
• Two RS485 channels of 8 multi-dropped terminal strips
• On board tamper switch connector
• Linux operating system
• 64 MB flash memory and 64 MB RAM
• Supports proximity, smart card, magnetic stripe,
biometrics, barcode and Wiegand technologies
• BAA compliant
SRCNX-R Reader Controller
Access Control and Video Systems
SRCNX-R
Specifications
Dimensions:
9-3/8” H x 12-15/16” W x 1-1/2” D
Power Requirements:
300mA @ 20VDC-32VDC (SSRC only)
Power Consumption:
100mA (SSRC Main Controller only)
Ambient temperature:
0° to 70° C or –40° to 185° F
Humidity:
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Recommended data cable:
18 AWG/2 COND, stranded, shielded,
twisted (up to 4000’) to RS-485
channel devices
Recommended power cable:
18 AWG/2 COND, stranded, shielded,
twisted (up to 500’); devices beyond
500’ should be powered locally
Compatible with Schlage Security Management System software version
5.3.1 and higher. Programming templates available in v5.3.5 and higher.
Battery backup available with Schlage UL listed power supplies
ORDERING INFORMATION
SRCNX-R - Reader Controller Board – Includes one SSRC Reader
Controller mounted on a back board. Includes enclosure.
Note: SRCNX-R can be ordered without enclosure. Use
(NB) to specify no box.
OPTIONS
PS902 - 2A @ 12/24 VDC-field selectable
PS904 - 4A @ 12/24 VDC-field selectable
PS906 - 6A @ 12/24 VDC-field selectable
900-BBK - Battery Backup Kit (includes two 7A/hr batteries)
SIONX-8 - Input / Output Expansion Board
Note: Use (NB) to specify no box
SRINX - Single Reader Interface
Note: Use (NB) to specify no box
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003938
11/11
Reader Interface
Overview
The SRINX Reader Interface offers a cost effective, modular
approach to access control system design in all environments.
Schlage Reader Interfaces can be used in smaller systems as
well as large installations with thousands of readers. The
SRINX communicates directly with the Schlage Reader
Controller. Schlage SRINX Reader Interfaces are capable of
running in degraded mode, allowing for local decision making,
if communication fails between the Reader Interface and the
Reader Controller. Includes enclosure.
Features and Benefits
• SRINX connects one read head to a Schlage reader
controller via RS-485 protocol
• Supports proximity, smart card, magnetic stripe,
biometrics, bar code and Wiegand technologies
• Two Form “C”, single pole/double throw, mechanically
latching 1 A relay outputs
• Four supervised or unsupervised contact inputs
• Metal enclosure with hinged and dual screw door
• On board connection for tamper switch
• Tamper switch, lock and key option available
• BAA compliant
SRINX Reader Interface
Access Control and Video Systems
SRINX
Specifications
Dimensions:
3-13/16” H x 3-13/16” W x 3/4” D
Enclosure:
8-1/4” H x 7-1/2” W x 3-1/2” D
Power requirements:
14 - 24VDC, can be powered from
reader controller or locally
Power consumption:
120mA (without read heads)
Ambient temperature:
0° to 49° C or 32° to 120° F
Humidity:
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Maximum RS485 (data) distance between reader controller to SRINX is
4,000 feet with local power
RS-232 communication also available
Recommended cable:
18 AWG/2 COND, Stranded, Shielded,
Twisted (RS485data only)
UL 294 Approved
ORDERING INFORMATION
SRINX - Single Reader Interface
Note: SRINX can be ordered without enclosure. Use (NB) to
specify no box.
OPTIONS
SLOCK - Enclosure Lock (comes with (2) keys, tamper switch
and cables)
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5864
07/11
Input Output Board
Overview
The Schlage Input / Output Expansion Board (SIONX-8)
provides 8 contact inputs and 8 SP/DT relay outputs. The
SIONX-8 communicates directly to any of the SRCNX or SSRC
reader controller boards. The SIONX-8 supports universal
triggers, which integrates any input associated with any output
response or a multitude of output responses. The SIONX-8
integrates alarm control and/or elevator floor control. Includes
enclosure.
Features
• SIONX-8 connects to the reader controller via RS-485
protocol
• 16Kb flash memory and 1Kb RAM
• Two serial ports (RS232 or RS485)
• (8) supervised or unsupervised contact inputs
• Contacts can be defined as alarms, door status, egress,
or other environmental conditions
• (8) Form “C” single pole/double throw, mechanically
latching
1 A relay outputs
• Metal enclosure with hinged and dual screw door
• Connection for on-board tamper switch
• Tamper switch, lock and key option available
• BAA compliant
Elevator Control
• One or more SIONX-8 boards can be used to
provide individual elevator floor control. Each
SIONX-8 is capable of up to 8 floors (1 contact
per floor).
SIONX-8 Input Output Board
Access Control and Video Systems
SIONX-8
Specifications
Dimensions:
4-3/16” H x 4-3/16” W x 1/2” D
Enclosure:
8-1/4” H x 7-1/2” W x 3-1/2” D
Power requirements:
14 - 24VDC; powered locally
Ambient temperature:
0° to 49°C or 32° to 120° F
Maximum RS485 (data) distance between reader controller to SIONX-8 is
4,000 feet with local power
Recommended cable:
18AWG/2 COND Stranded, Shielded,
Twisted (RS485 data only)
UL 294 Approved
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIONX-8 Input / Output Expansion Board
SLOCKRI Enclosure Lock (comes with (2) keys, tamper switch
and cables)
Note:
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
SIONX-8 can be ordered without enclosure. Use (NB)
to specify no box
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005047
06/12
Universal Reader Interface
Overview
The SURI is designed for sharing one reader on up to three
different access control systems. The SURI can work with
multiple reader technologies (i.e. proximity, magnetic stripe,
biometric, keypad, etc). The SURI is perfect for multi-tenant
buildings with multiple access control systems utilizing
turnstiles, elevators, etc.
Features and Benefits
• Routes transactions directly to the corresponding access
control system only
• Eliminates unnecessary transactions in multiple access
control systems from a shared reader
• Works on any Wiegand format reader (i.e. proximity,
magnetic stripe, keypad, biometric, etc).
• Ideal for building owners or property managers who
have tenants with different access control systems who
share readers in common areas.
• BAA compliant
SURI Universal Reader Interface
Access Control and Video Systems
SURI
Specifications
Dimensions
3-3/16" H x 3-3/16" W x 1-3/4" D
Enclosure
8-1/4" H x 7-1/2" W x 3-1/2" D
Power Requirements
12VAC/12VDC can be powered from SRCNX
Power Consumption
100mA (without read head) @ 200 mA fully configured
Ambient Temperature
0° to 70° C or –40° to 185° F
Humidity
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Maximum Distance
500 feet wiegand data communication 18AWG 4 cond
Wiegand Output
Signal
Pulse width: 50 us./ Time between two pulses: 2.2ms
Led Control
All led control lines from SRINXs should connect to one
of seven contact points on SRINX board. If one of the
seven contacts is logically low, P1 pin 5,6,7 which is led
control output pin, will be low to set led on reader head
to green. If all seven contacts are logically high, P1 pin
5,6,7 is high and led on the reader head is red.
Relay Control
Relay 1 on SURI will be energized whenever led on
reader head is green. User can use the relay to control a
door lock.
Reader Head
This firmware is designed for a reader head that emits
Wiegand signal with one wire led control line. Led is red
when led control is logically set high and led is green
when led control is logically set to low, such as HID prox
reader, sensor swipe reader, etc.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SURI - Universal reader interface
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5072
07/11
Custom Access Control Enclosure
Overview
The Custom Enclosures are pre-wired, pre-tested enclosures
that allow for consistent installations. They make service
and maintenance easy and enable service technicians to be
immediately familiar with the equipment when at a customer’s
site. Every custom enclosure has clearly marked components,
snap on connectors, and clearly labeled landing connectors for
field wiring.
Features and Benefits
• Pre-wired and pre-tested enclosures
• Plug and use design powers all lock mechanisms,
read-heads, PIR motion detectors, local annunciators
and on-board components
• Design allows for easy replacement of all components
• Significantly reduces manpower requirements
during installation
• Decreases disruption in a client’s daily business
• Clearly marked landing strips allow for consistent
installations
• Enclosures are provided with Fire tie relays
• AC Fail LED indicator located on the outside of the
enclosure
• Each door has tamper protection
• BAA compliant
SRCNX-ENCL Custom Enclosure
Access Control and Video Systems
SRCNX-ENCL
Additional Product Information
SRCNX-ENCL
Custom Enclosure Includes: NEMA 1 rated enclosure
31” x 31” x 8” with removable sub-panel, fuses and
wiring harness; (1) 24 VDC 4A power supply for the
SRCNX-R Reader Controller with (2) 12 VDC 12A hour
gel cell batteries, (2) 24 VDC 10A power supplies for
the Reader Interfaces, locks and peripheral devices with
(4) 12 VDC 12A hour gel cell batteries. Clearly labeled
terminal blocks for landing all field wiring are included.
SRCNX Enclosure Houses: (1) SRCNX-R Reader Controller;
up to (8) SRINX Reader Interfaces - factory installed.
Note: This unit can be used in conjunction with the
SRINX enclosure (SRINX-ENCL) to expand reader
capacity from 8 to 16 SRINX Reader Interfaces (sold
separately).
Specifications
Enclosure dimensions
31" x 31" x 8"
Operating Temperature
32 to 120F
Power Input
120VAC/60Hz, 6 amp
Power Output
24VAC - Output power is power limited
External Power
Requirements
One 115vac 15 amp dedicated breaker line
Cooling fans
2 per enclosure
Switch Block
Fail-safe/fail-secure
Battery Back-up
Automatic switch over to battery back-up with
AC Fail LED indicator
Diode Block
Diode block prevents electrical back feed
SRINX-ENCL
Custom Enclosure Includes: NEMA 1 rated enclosure
31” x 31” x 8” with removable sub-panel, fuses and
wiring harness; (1) 24 VDC 10A power supply for lock
power and peripheral devices with (2) 12 VDC 12A hour
gel cell batteries. Clearly labeled terminal blocks for
landing all field wiring are included. SRINX Enclosure
Houses: up to (8) SRINX reader Interfaces in any
combination - factory installed.
Note: This unit is used in conjunction with the SRCNX-R
enclosure (SRCNX-ENCL) to expand reader capacity from
8 to 16 SRINX Reader Interfaces.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SRCNX-ENCL - Pre-wired and pre-tested Custom Enclosure
SRINX-ENCL - P
re-wired and pre-tested Custom Enclosure Expansion
OPTIONS
SRCNX-16R – 16 channel Reader Controller Board
SRINX – Reader Interface
SIONX-8 – Input/Output Expansion Board
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5069
07/11
Offline Controller
Overview
The CT5000 is an offline single opening controller designed
for applications where the security and convenience of offline
electronic access control is desired, but an integrated electronic
lock may not be practical. It is an ideal solution for narrow stile
aluminum store front applications because it can work with a
variety of readers as well as interface with peripheral devices
such automatic operators, electric strikes, and electromagnetic
locks.
The CT5000 supports up to two separate Wiegand reader inputs.
It is compatible with many types of credential technologies. The
CT5000 has three form C relay outputs, for strike, auxiliary and
alarm. It also has three inputs that include door position and
request-to-exit.
The CT5000 is compatible with many brands and types of
credential technologies including Magnetic Stripe (tracks 1, 2,
and 3), 125 kHz Proximity, and 13.56 MHz Smart Cards. It also
supports a variety of card functions including: normal, toggle,
freeze, pass through, construction, lockdown and Card + PIN
applications.
The CT5000 offline controller has the unique ability to be
programmed locally via keypad or via the Schlage Handheld
Programming Device. The CT5000 is compatible with Schlage
SMS Express, Premier or Enterprise access control software.
The CT5000 compliments your facility’s portfolio of CO-Series
and AD-Series devices along with all of your other networked
readers.
If networked functionality is required in the future, the
CT5000 can be upgraded. With the addition of a networked
communication board and upgraded firmware, the CT5000
becomes a wireless reader interface (WRI400). The WRI400
communicates via 900MHz wireless signals to an AD-Series
PIM400 which connects to the networked access control system.
The WRI400 eliminates the need to run additional wires to the
door, saving you time and money on installation.
Features and Benefits
• Supports up to 5000 users and 5000 audits
• UL 294, Canada UL, FCC Part 15, Canada RSS-210, RoHs
• Includes 15 foot USB remote cable connector and
decorative wall plate with USB input
• Supports up to two wiegand reader inputs
• Programmed using Schlage Handheld Device (HHD)
via USB connection or compatible keypad
• Requires 2 Amp power supply, such as the Schlage
PS902 (sold separately)
• Compatible with Schlage SMS Express, Select, Premier
or Enterprise access control software
• Request-to-exit (remote release)
• LED visual indicators (including low battery and state
of the relay)
CT5000 Offline Controller
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CT5000
CT5000
Offline Controllers
Front Door Application
Narrow Stile Application
Panic Device Application
The CT5000 can be used
for front door applications
with an automatic
operator, electric strike
and card reader
For narrow stile
applications the CT5000
can be used with an
electric strike and card
reader
The CT5000 and a card
reader along with the
Von Duprin 914 Power Supply
can control two EL exit devices for
double door applications
PS902
Power
Supply
PS902
Power
Supply
PS902
Power
Supply
CT5000
CT5000
CT5000
PS914
Operator
EPT
Pushbutton
Electric
Strike
Electric
Strike
Card
Reader
EPT
EL Exit Device
Card
Reader
EL Exit Device
Card
Reader
Note: PS902 and Von Duprin PS914 are sold separately.
CT5000 Offline Controller Specifications
Users
Up to 5000
Audits
Up to 5000
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC (sold separately, must be UL 294 Class 2 listed power supply)
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
DC Power Input
Connector Cable Specifications
Relay Output Tolerances
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (305 m)
Credential Readers
(x2)
Data Signals: 22AWG, 6 Conductor (Alpha 1296C or equivalent) up to 500 feet (152 meters)
Reader Tamper Signals: 18AWG, Twisted Pair Shielded (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 500
feet (152 meters)
Strike/ Aux Relay
Outputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Strike Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Auxiliary Output
Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Alarm Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Operating Temperature
-31ºF (-35ºC) to 151ºF (66ºC)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
UL 294, Canada UL, FCC Part 15, Canada RSS-210, RoHs
Dimensions
10.43” x 7.28” x 3.79”
26.49 cm x 18.49 cm x 9.63 cm
Programming Method
Manually programmed via compatible keypad or computer programmed via SUS Software on
the Schlage Handheld Programming Device (HHD)
Optional Accessories
125 foot USB remote cable connector, PS902, PS904, or Von Duprin PS914 (sold separately)
Credential Compatibility (software and reader dependent)
Magnetic Stripe Card
Field configurable track 1, 2, or 3
125 kHz Proximity Card
Schlage, XceedID® (34X, 35X, 35C, 37X bit formats), HID®,
GE/CASI ProxLite™ and AWID® 26 bit format
13.56 MHz Smart Card
aptiQ™ smart cards featuring MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
HID iCLASS® CSN only
26 bit format

The following readers are UL 294
listed for use with the CT5000:
• Essex Electronics model KTP-162
• Mercury Security models MR-5 and MR-20,
XceedID models XF-1050, XF-1100, XF-1500,
XF-1550 and XF-2100
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. GE, CASI and ProxLite are
trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are
trademarks of HID Corporation. AWID is a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. Essex Electronics is a registered
trademark of Essex Electronics, Inc. Mercury Security is a registered trademark of Mercury Security, Corp. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004016 03/12
Single Sided Badge Printer
Overview
The SPRC101 is user friendly, offering such features as
automatic cleaning ribbon cassette, quick change head and
a rotating LCD display. The SPRC101 Printer offers brilliant
images printed on CR80 cards with a thickness of 30 mils. The
SPRC101 with its high quality design and reliability, makes this
one of the most versatile single sided printers.
Features and Benefits
• Full color, single-sided, edge to edge printing
• USB 2.0 output
• Industry leading 24 bit continuous printing tone
• 150 cards per hour
• Single sided printing only
• ISO9001, ISO14001 Certifications
• Solution for Personal Identity Verification
FIPS 201-1 directive
SPRC101 Single Sided Badge Printer
Access Control and Video Systems
SPRC101
Specifications
Printing System
300dpi, 24-bit continuous tone printing,
16.7million colors
Printing Method
Thermal transfer dye-sublimation
Print Media
PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish
Media Size
CR-80: 3.375" x 2.125"
Media Thickness
30mil
Print Area
Single Sided Edge-to-Edge
Input Hopper
100 cards
Exit Hopper
30 cards
Image Memory
16MB with parallel processing, four memory
modes
Display
LCD 16 Character 2-line display shows printer
status and diagnostic prompts
Dimensions
7" H x 9" W x 13" D
Weight
14lbs. / 6.5kg
Operating Temp
35° to 85° F
Power Source
AC power source AC100/240v 50/60Hz
auto-switching
Agency Listing
UL/CE/FCC
Drivers
Windows® compatible
ORDERING INFORMATION
SPRC101 - Standard Single Sided Printer
OPTIONS
SYMCKOPRC - Color Cartridge Ribbon (250 prints)
SBKPRC - Black Cartridge Ribbon (250 prints)
SCLEAN55 - Cleaning Kit
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003918
06/12
Dual Sided Badge Printer
Overview
The SPR5350 Printer offers brilliant images printed on PVC
cards with a thickness range from 20 to 50 mils. These high
quality printers offer many add-on modules to make them one
of the most versatile printers on the market. The add-on modules include magnetic stripe encoding, in-line over-lamination
with full 1.0mil patch and thinfilm / foil edge to edge. Prints on
both sides of a card in full color or black and white.
Features and Benefits
• Full color edge to edge printing
• Industry leading 24 bit continuous printing tone
• 100+ cards per hour
• Dual sided printing
• Dual sided lamination with alternating patch options
• Variable UV printing
• ISO9001 and ISO14001 Certifications
• High quality barcode printing
• High resolution graphics
• Holographic lamination available
• Encoder Options
• Laminator Options
SPR5300 Dual Sided Badge Printer
Access Control and Video Systems
SPR5300
Specifications
Printing System
300dpi, 24-bit continuous tone printing, 16.7million colors
Printing Method
Thermal transfer dye-sublimation
Print Media
PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish
Media Size
CR-80: 3.375" x 2.125" / 85.6 x 54mm
CR-79: 3.303" x 2.051" / 83.9 x 52.1mm
Media Thickness
020" (20mil) to .050" (50mil) / .508mm to 1.72mm
Print Area
Edge-to-Edge
Input Hopper
100 cards
Exit Hopper
100 cards
Image Memory
SPR5310: 8MB / SPR5350: 16MB with parallel processing, four memory modes
System Memory
2.25MB
Display
LCD 16 Character 2-line display shows printer status and diagnostic prompts
Ribbon Types
SYMCKO-2 250 prints, SYMCKOK-2 210 prints, SYMCFK (Ultra Violet) 250 prints
Print Speed
SYMCO-2: 104 cards / hour, SYMCKOK-2: 66 cards / hour
Interface
USB 2.0, Parallel, or Micro SCSI II
Dimensions
16.57" H x 10.66" W x 13.03" D / 421 x 271 x 331mm
Weight
26.6lbs. / 13kg
Operating Temp
65 to 85° F / 18 to 27° C
Power Source
AC power source AC100/240v 50/60Hz auto-switching
Agency Listing
UL: UL1950: UL1950-1993: CE Class B: FCC A & B
Drivers
Windows® compatible
* Print speed indicates approximate multiple print job print speed and is measured from the time a card
feeds into the printer to the time it ejects from the printer. Print speeds do not include encoding time or the
time needed for the PC to process the image. Process time is dependant on the size of the file, the CPU,
the amount of PC memory, the interface (SCSI, USB, Parallel), and the amount of resources at the time of
the print job.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SPR5350 - High Speed Dual Side Printer
Options
SPR5302A - In-line Laminator
SPR5361 - Magnetic Stripe Encoder
ACCESSORIES
SYMCKO-2 - 5 Panel Color Ribbon
SYMCKOK-2 - 6 Panel Color Ribbon (extra black panel)
SNCLEAR - Laminate Overlay
SCLEAN53 - Cleaning Kit
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003917
06/12
License Scanner
Overview
The SID450 Driver’s License/Business Card Scanner is easy to
use and provides the user with an image of the ID card and
the relevant text information in the appropriate database fields.
Its compact footprint is perfect for any reception desk or office
environment. The scanning process allows the user to chain-feed
the items, while the image processing is done automatically in
the background, resulting in a superb scan time of 3 seconds
per card. When used in the SMS Guest Pass visitor management
system, drivers licenses can be scanned into the database
allowing for quick processing of visitors to a facility.
Features and Benefits
• Reduces human error by automating the archiving
process
• USB Port – no additional power supply needed
• 2-3 seconds scan time per side
• Capable of scanning photographs, business cards, ID
cards, plastic credit cards with embossed letters
SID450 License Scanner
Access Control and Video Systems
SID450
Specifications
Image Sensor Type
Linear color CMOS
Optical Resolution
600dpi x1200 dpi
Interface
USB 2.0
Dimensions
LxWxH: 7.5” x 2” x 1.7”
Weight
8.4 oz
Power Consumption
0.2W on standby, 2.0W during scan
Scanning Area
LxW: 4.13" x 10”
System Requirements
Windows 7, Vista, XP, 2000
Cable Length
60 inches, detachable
ORDERING INFORMATION
SID450 - ScanShell Driver’s License/Business Card Scanner
and software
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
001468
06/12
Live Video Camera
Overview
The SVCCD-USB ValCam Live Video Camera offers brilliant
images that can be printed on PVC cards or adhesive labels.
The SVCCD-USB with its high quality resolution and reliability,
is one of the most versatile cameras on the market. The camera
comes with a high intensity Photo Flash and a zoom lens. The
picture is live in the software. It is not necessary to import files
or download pictures from the camera. Package comes with a
tripod.
Features and Benefits
• Real time subject setup and scene adjustments
• High resolution for high quality pictures
• Integrated Hi intensity Photo Flash synchronized with
the Schlage Security Management System software
control
• Complete USB interface hardware
• Auto focus lens
• Rapid Image Download compared to still image cameras
• Freeze Frame Perfection
• Cool white LED’s replace offensive hot lights
& last 100x longer
• Camera Supplied with Tripod
• TWAIN and Windows 7 compatible
SVCCD-USB Live Video Camera
Access Control and Video Systems
SVCCD-USB
Specifications
Interface
USB 2.0 Compliant
Supplied Hardware
USB cable
Ccd Chip
High resolution single chip CCD array (796x494)
Power Source
Supplied with power brick
ORDERING INFORMATION
SVCCD-USB - Live Viewing Camera, Integrated Flash, Zoom Lens,
and Tripod
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5104
07/11
Thermal Transfer Printer
Overview
The S3842 Zebra Thermal Transfer Printer offers high resolution
images printed on labels. The S3842 will print crisp texts, logos,
pictures, signatures and barcodes in just a few seconds. Its
dual wall construction and compact design will withstand rough
handling in your busy environment. It’s the perfect solution for
Guest Pass visitor management software.
Features and Benefits
• Provides direct thermal transfer printing - black only
• Prints widths up to 4.09 inches
• Prints two-dimensional bar codes
• One 4” labels per second
• The printer allows for automatic roll feed
S3842 Thermal Transfer Printer
Access Control and Video Systems
S3842
Specifications
Resolution
300dpi
Label Types
Thermal Transfer Adhesive Badge and
Hole-punched card
Print Area
4.09" wide and up to 11" long
Interface
USB 2.0, Parallel or Serial
Dimensions
6.8” H x 7.8” W x 9.4” L
Weight
3.7 lbs
Operating Temp.
40 to 105°
Power Source
AC power source AC110/240v 50/60Hz
ORDERING INFORMATION
S3842 - Direct Thermal Transfer Printer
OPTIONS
S800540-250 - White Adhesive Labels
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5114
07/11
Video Management System
Overview
Available with 16 or 32 camera inputs, Schlage Enterprise Video
Management System (SEVMS) state-of-the-art video storage
servers are network ready and can be remotely viewed from any
workstation with the appropriate password protected access
level.
These units provide the stability and longevity of a solid state
system drive by utilizing a Windows XP Embedded OS and are
capable of digitally recording high resolution MPEG4 or JPEG
color video (streaming and recorded).
Depending on the model selected, the SEVMS will accept
IP addressable and/or analog cameras. User-friendly software
allows for on screen PTZ control, advanced search, playback and
save capabilities, video motion detection by camera,
individual camera settings, email by event and more. The SEVMS
provides searchable indexed storage for instant access to stored
video on a variety of criteria: day, time, camera, alarm etc.
• Fully integrates with Schlage Security Management System
software packages and captures associated transactions
and events
• Remote video management software included
(no licensing required)
• Storage capability can be sized to fit any application
• Compatible with existing v6,7 & 8 SEVMS systems and v8
& 9 Maintenance Monitor/Video System Security (VSS)
Features and Benefits
• Two built-in network cards that support
10/100/1000 BaseT
• Scheduling 24/7 and Holiday profiles
• H.264, MPEG4, JPEG, AVI, and encrypted VFR recording
for high quality playback
• Audio recording support for Axis IP cameras using
MPEG-4 and H.264 compression
• High resolution Video Motion Detection with masking
capabilities
• Alarms and Search on Video Motion Detection
• Solid State System Drive for Stability and Longevity
• Maintenance clients can monitor the health of SEVMS
units on network
• User-friendly video security applications
• Virtual camera grouping across servers
• Advanced search, playback and save capabilities
• Multiple Video Remote (up to 32 cameras can be
displayed per monitor)
• View 4 cameras simultaneously during playback
• Full PTZ functionality (presets, patrols, etc.)
• Sequencing capabilities
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing encrypted
files
• Advanced security permissions
• Customizable pre and post recording
upon an event
• Scalable configurations
(continued)
SEVMS Video Management System
Access Control and Video Systems
SEVMS
Features and Benefits
(continued)
• RAID5 Array & Hot Swappable configurations available
(4U Case only)
• Independent Camera Audio - Audio per camera channel
(Analog cameras only)
• Multiplex video analog output
• Independent alarms per channel
• Storage Calculator – Estimation Tool
• Database Back up and Recovery
• BAA compliant
Factory Installed Options
SEVMS-TB-1Storage Expansion Includes
(1) additional 1TB SATA hard drive
SEVMS-TB-2Storage Expansion Includes
(2) additional 1TB SATA hard drives
SEVMS-AUD16-ch Analog Audio Option (hybrid
units only) Provides (16) individual
audio channels.
SEVMS-MIC Microphone Provides a microphone for
one-way audio.
SEVMS-IO16-ch Input/Output Module (hybrid
units only) Provides (16) input and (16)
relay output channels
SEVMS-KY1616-ch IP Camera Key Expansion Provides
(16) channel IP camera expansion.
(Factory installation not required)
SEVMS-CKT 16-ch Analog Camera Key Expansion
Includes 16-ch Analog Capture Card and
Camera Key Expansion (4U case only).
SEVMS-RAIDRAID5 Configuration with Hot Swap
RAID Controller Card and (2) 750GB
Hard Drives (4U case only)
SEVMS-UPGUpgrade from v.7.0 to v.9.0 (requires
capture card)
SEVMS-XPFFull Windows XP option in lieu of
Windows XP Embedded (compatible
with Windows Domain systems)
Accessories:
SCMKMMonitor, Keyboard & Mouse – 22” Flat
Screen Monitor, 104-key Keyboard and
Mouse
SMKMBKMonitor/Keyboard/Mouse Unit – Rackmount Monitor, Keyboard & Mouse Unit
SMKMKVMBKMonitor/Keyboard/Mouse Unit with
8 Port KVM Switch – Rack-mount
Monitor, Keyboard & Mouse Unit with
built-in 8 Port KVM Switch.
SEVMSCBLMonitor/Keyboard/Mouse Cable (12
foot Connects one SEVMS unit to a rack
mount Monitor, Keyboard & Mouse.
SEVMSSW44 Port KVM Switch – Connects a monitor
up to a total of (4) SEVMS units.
SEVMSSW88 Port KVM Switch – Connects a monitor
up to a total of (8) SEVMS units.
SEVMSSW1616 Port KVM Switch – Connects a monitor
up to a total of (16) SEVMS units.
SEVMSCNV485Data Converter for PTZ Control – Data
converter provides RS-485 control for
Pan, Tilt & Zoom functions through the
SEVMS unit.
SEVMSCNV422Data Converter for PTZ Control – Data
converter provides RS-422 control for
Pan, Tilt & Zoom functions through the
SEVMS unit.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Specifications
Operating system
Windows XP Embedded SP3
System Drive
4GB Solid State
CPU
2.66GHz Intel Core 2 Quad Processor (Q9400)
RAM
2GB DDR2 RAM
Integrated VGA Video Card
Video connectors
BNC Video Inputs / IP Network Connector
(depending on model)
Input Voltage
120VAC or 240VAC
Operating temperature
50°F to 75°F
Video Management Client Software CD
2U Rack Mount Dimensions
17" W x 17.5" D x 3.5" H
4U Rack Mount Dimensions
17.5" W x 20.25" D x 7" H
ORDERING INFORMATION
2U RACK MOUNT
SEVMS-16H2 - 16 Channel Hybrid DVR/NVR
(1) 16-ch analog capture card,
(1) 1TB SATA hard drive storage capacity
SEVMS-16N2 - 16 Channel NVR (1) 1TB
SATA hard drive storage capacity
SEVMS-32N2 - 32 Channel NVR (2) 1TB
SATA hard drive storage capacity
4U RACK MOUNT
SEVMS-16H4 - 16 Channel Hybrid DVR/NVR
(1) 16-ch analog capture card,
(2) 1TB SATA hard drive storage capacity
SEVMS-32H4 - 32 Channel Hybrid DVR/NVR
(2) 16-ch analog capture cards, (2) 1TB
SATA hard drive storage capacity
SEVMS-16N4 - 16 Channel NVR (2)1TB SATA hard drive storage
capacity
SEVMS-32N4 - 32 Channel NVR (2) 1TB SATA hard drive storage
capacity
MAINTENANCE
SEVMS-MTAEnterprise Video Management System Maintenance
One year factory maintenance for existing 4 channel
units
SEVMS-MTBEnterprise Video Management System Maintenance
One year factory maintenance for the new and
existing 16 & 32 channel units.
* Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse sold separately (refer to accessories).
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003933 11/11
Software Solution
Overview
Our Schlage Enterprise Video Management System is now
available in a software-only package. Perfect for those customers who want to supply their own remote storage, our NVR
software solution provides up to 32 IP camera channels with an
easy to use interface. Cameras can be remotely viewed from
any workstation with the appropriate password protected access level.
The Schlage NVR software is compatible with Microsoft
Windows XP Professional SP2 or Windows Server 2003 and is
capable of digitally recording high resolution MPEG4 or Motion
JPEG color video.
User-friendly software allows for on screen PTZ control,
advanced search, playback and save capabilities, video motion
detection by camera, individual camera settings, email by event
and more.
The NVR software provides searchable indexed storage for
instant access to stored video on a variety of criteria: day, time,
camera, alarm etc.
• Fully integrates with Schlage Security Management System
and bright blue Intelligent Access Management system
software packages and captures associated transactions and
events
• Can function as a stand-alone video management system
• Compatible with existing Schlage Enterprise Video
Management System versions 6 through 9, and Maintenance
Monitor/Video System Security (VSS) versions 8 & 9
Features and Benefits
• Scheduling 24/7 and Holiday profiles
• H.264, MPEG4, JPEG, AVI and encrypted VFR recording
for high quality playback
• Audio recording support for Axis IP cameras using
MPEG4 and H.264 compression
• High resolution Video Motion Detection with masking
capabilities
• Alarms and Search on Video Motion Detection
• Maintenance clients can monitor the health of SEVMS
units on network
• User-friendly video security applications
• Virtual camera grouping across servers
• Advanced search, playback and save capabilities
• Multiple Video Remote (up to 32 cameras
can be displayed per monitor)
• View 4 cameras simultaneously during playback
• Full PTZ functionality (presets, patrols, etc.)
• Sequencing capabilities
(continued on back)
SNVRSFT NVR Software Solution
Access Control and Video Systems
SNVRSFT NVR
Features and Benefits
(continued)
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing encrypted
files
• Advanced security permissions
• Customizable pre and post recording upon an event
• Independent alarms per channel
• Storage Calculator – Estimation Tool
• Database Backup and Recovery
• BAA compliant
Operating System Compatibility
• Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2 or Windows Server 2003
• See NVR Software Specification for storage and hardware requirements
ORDERING INFORMATION
SNVRSFT16 -Schlage Enterprise Video Management System
NVR software for use with up to 16 IP cameras
SNVRSFT32 - Schlage Enterprise Video Management System
NVR software for use with up to 32 IP cameras
OPTIONS
SVE-16 - 16-channel Analog to IP Encoder
Encoder supports (16) analog cameras and converts
analog video to high performance digital video.
SEVMS-MTB - Enterprise Video Management System Maintenance.
One year factory maintenance for 16 & 32 channel software.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5867
07/11
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse
Overview
The Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse combination is a perfect
space saver and can be rack-mounted only taking up 1U
(1.75”). It is elegantly packaged in a protective laptop design.
Included is a high resolution 15” TFT panel, a full 83-key
keyboard and a Glidepoint touchpad for cursor control. It can
be used with any KVM switch or server, or can be ordered with
a built in 8 port KVM switch and cables.
Features and Benefits
• Convenient, slim design can be closed and will slide
into the rack to save space
• Offers protection to the flat monitor by closing like a
laptop
• Selectable resolutions up to 1024x768
• Flat Panel Display / TFT active matrix
• 83-key keyboard
• Glidepoint touchpad for cursor control
SMKMBK Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse
Access Control and Video Systems
SMKMBK
Specifications
Interface
1 x VGA - 15 pin HD D-Sub (HD-15) 1 x mouse 6 pin mini-DIN (PS/2 style) 1 x keyboard - 6 pin
mini-DIN (PS/2 style)
Rack height
1U, 1.75"
Diagonal size
14.1"
Color
Black
Power source
AC power source AC120/230v 50/60Hz
ORDERING INFORMATION
SMKMBK - 15” Flat Monitor, Keyboard and Touchpad Cursor Control
SEVMSCBL - 12’ cable used to connect one SEVMS unit to a rack
mount monitor, keyboard and mouse.
SMKMKVMBK - 15” Flat Monitor, Keyboard and Touchpad Cursor
Control with 8 Port KVM
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5099
07/11
bright blue® Video
Overview
Add video recording capabilities to your bright blue® Intelligent
Access Management System and increase the security and ease
with which you run your facility. Integrated video allows you to
quickly search for video by cardholder name, ID number,
transaction type and more.
The SEVMS-SBB comes standard with 4 IP camera channels
and is compact and network ready. Options for analog and
additional IP channels are available. Video can be viewed
remotely from any workstation with the appropriate passwordprotected access level.
This unit provides the stability and longevity of a solid state
system drive by utilizing a Windows XP Embedded OS and is
capable of digitally recording high resolution MPEG4 or Motion
JPEG color video (streaming and recording).
User-friendly software allows for on screen PTZ control,
advanced search, playback and save capabilities, video motion
detection by camera, individual camera settings, email by event
and more.
Enjoy enhanced security and greater peace of mind with
integrated video.
• Fully integrates to Schlage bright blue Intelligent Access Management system and Schlage Security Management software packages
• Remote multi-user video management software included (no licensing required)
Features and Benefits
• Built-in network card with 10/100/1000 BaseT support
• Solid State system drive for stability and longevity
• H.264, MPEG4, JPEG, AVI and encrypted VFR recording
for high quality playback
• Supports IP and analog cameras
• Audio recording support for Axis IP cameras using
MPEG4 and H.264 compression
• High resolution video motion detection with masking
capabilities
• Alarms and search on video motion detection
• User-friendly video security applications
• Advanced search, playback and save capabilities
• View 4 cameras simultaneously during playback
• Full PTZ functionality (presets, patrols, etc.)
• Sequencing capabilities
• Proprietary viewer software for viewing encrypted files
• Customizable pre and post recording upon an event
• Scheduling 24/7 and Holiday Profiles
• BAA compliant
SEVMS-SBB bright blue® Video
Access Control and Video Systems
SEVMS-SBB
Specifications
Operating system
Windows XP Embedded SP3
System Drive
2GB Solid State 500GB SATA Hard Drive
CPU
1.6GHz Dual Core Intel Atom Processor
RAM
2GB DDR2 RAM Integrated VGA Video Card
Video connectors
IP Network Connector/BNC Video Inputs (depending on model)
Input Voltage
120VAC or 240VAC
Operating temperature 50F to 75F
Dimensions
2.63”H x 12.3”W x 8”D
ORDERING INFORMATION
SEVMS-SBB
4 Channel NVR.
Will support up to (4) IP cameras; includes
(1) 500GB SATA hard drive, Wall Mount Brackets
and Video Management Client Software CD
OPTIONS*
SEVMS-ANX
Analog Capture Card
Add a capture card for analog cameras
(or use as a hybrid; 4 channels max).
SEVMS-IPX IP Camera Expansion
Add support for an additional 4 IP cameras
(total of 8 IP channels).
SVE-16
16-ch Analog to IP Encoder
Encoder supports (16) analog cameras and converts
analog video to high performance digital video.
SEVMSCNV485
Data Converter for PTZ Control
Data converter provides RS-485 control for Pan, Tilt &
Zoom functions through the SEVMS unit.
SEVMSCNV422
Data Converter for PTZ Control
Data converter provides RS-422 control for Pan, Tilt &
Zoom functions through the SEVMS unit.
•Monitor not included
*Options must be specified at time of order.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5727
07/11
Indoor Mini Dome IP Camera
Overview
Schlage IP color dome video cameras deliver quality MJPEG
and MPEG-4 video compression and stream live video via
digital packets across an IP network. View and manage cameras
using Schlage Enterprise Video Management System (SEVMS)
state-of-the-art video servers. Video can be remotely viewed
from any workstation with the appropriate password protected
access level. Schlage offers video surveillance solutions to fit
any budget.
Features and Benefits
• H.264, MJPEG and MPEG-4 video compression (Dual
Stream)
• Resolution D1, CIF, QCIF
• Compression FPS: at 25/30 [email protected]
• 10/100 Base-T Network
• 12VDC Power
• Polycarbonate dome cover
SIPCAM100 Indoor Mini Dome IP Camera
Access Control and Video Systems
SIPCAM100
FUNCTION
Network
10 / 100 Base-T
Specifications
Camera Module
Protocol
TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, RTSP, RTCP, RTP/UDP, RTP/TCP,
Image Sensor
1/4" VGA CMOS
USB 2.0
SNTP, mDNS, UPnP, SMTP, SOCK, IGMP, DHCP,
Effective Pixels
640 x 480
Scanning System
Progressive Scan
Horizontal Resolution
550 TVL
Minimum Illumination
3 Lux (Color), 0.1 Lux (DSS On)
Lens
3.6 mm F2.0, Board Type
Day & Night
S/W
SD Memory
FTP, DDNS, SSL v2/v3, IEEE 802.1X, SSH
Electrical Power Source
12V DC (DC Jack)
Power Consumption (Approx)
360 mA @ +12V
Video
Compression Format
H.264, MPEG-4, MJPEG
Number of Streams
Dual Stream, Configurable
Resolution
D1, CIF, QCIF
Compression FPS
25/30 [email protected]
Deinterlacing
Support (DSP)
Motion Detection
Support (DSP)
Burnt-in Text (Digital)
Support (DSP)
Environmental
Operating Temperature
0º C to 50º C (32ºF to 122ºF)
Operating Humidity
Up to 85% RH (Non-condensing)
Scanning System
Progressive Scan
Mechanical
Material
Polycarbonate
Color
Black
Dimension
124mm W x 124mm H x 101.5mm D
Weight (Approx)
280 g
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIPCAM100 - Indoor Mini Dome IP Camera
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5955
07/11
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog covers networked
AD-Series adaptable electronic locks and other devices and accessories
that can be easily integrated into an access control system.
Overview
only), Von Duprin 22/22F (Rim & SVR only) as well
The AD-Series was built from the ground up to
as Falcon 25 (Rim only).
provide more options, more functionality and more
The AD-Series is ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/
compatibility than any other electronic locking
BHMA Grade 1 certified and is UL 294 Listed.
solution on the market today. The AD-Series meets
today’s security needs while also easily adapting
to future needs as they emerge. The AD-Series
is designed on an open architecture platform
to provide users with enhanced flexibility and
scalability, resulting in an investment that’s every
bit as secure as your facility.
Benefits
The modular design of the AD-Series creates an
easy and affordable way to expand a security
system and integrate emerging technologies over
time and when budgets permit. Customers can
easily upgrade readers or networking options –
all without having to remove the lock from the
Features
door. And the wireless technology gives you the
The AD-Series simplifies installation by combining
option to install access control on doors that have
the electrified lock, reader, door position switch,
traditionally been difficult to wire while providing
request-to-exit, and other status monitors together.
real-time monitoring and centralized lockdown
Panel interface options such as RS-485, Wiegand
capabilities. The AD-Series was designed to be
and Clock & Data ensure seamless, real-time
the right choice for today, and ready for whatever
communication with the access control system. The
the future holds. With the AD-Series you can
AD-Series is available with seven different credential
be assured that your investment is every bit as
reader options. For added convenience, security
protected as your facility.
personnel can configure failure modes, card formats
and other features in the field. The AD-Series is
compatible with most popular models of standard,
SFIC and FSIC cylinders. It is also compatible with
popular exit devices with low current REX switches
including Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP (Rim,
Mortise, and SVR. CVC and CVR on Metal doors
Networked Locking
Networked Locking
Networked Locking
Lock Options:
AD-Series networked locks have several options to choose from including:
• Class: AD-300 Hardwired, AD-400 Wireless, AD-301 FIPS 201-1 Compliant*, AD-401 FIPS 201-1
Compliant.* Note: Choice of class may limit other available options.
• Chassis: Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise Deadbolt, Exit Trim
• Function**: Classroom/Storeroom, Office, Privacy, Apartment
• Readers**: Keypad, magnetic stripe, and multi-technology (proximity 125 kHz and smart card
13.56 MHz). All card readers are available with + PIN option for added security.
• Lever Style: Sparta, Rhodes, Athens, Tubular (Tactile warning available)
• Finishes: 626 Satin Chrome, 605 Bright Brass, 606 Satin Brass, 612 Satin Bronze, 619 Satin Nickel,
625 Bright Chrome, 643e Aged Bronze, 626AM Satin Chrome with Antimicrobial
**Check with Access Control provider to verify support of reader/credential formats and lock functions.
Keyway/Cylinders:
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
Full Size
FSIC
SFIC
key-in-lever 6 pin
key-in-lever 7 pin
6 & 7 pin
6 & 7 pin
Schlage
Falcon
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
Corbin Russwin®
Yale® (includes Medeco 31 *0100 FSIC)
Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options
= less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
= less cylinder only
Exit Trim:
Compatibility
Devices
AD-300/AD-301
AD-400/AD-401
Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP Rim/SVR/CVR /CVC /Mortise
X
X
Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
X
X
Falcon 25 Rim
X
X
‡
‡
‡
Metal Doors Only
Note: AD-300/301 and AD-400/401 exit trim is exclusively compatible with Von Duprin 98/99, 98/99XP (Rim, Mortise,
and SVR. CVC and CVR on Metal doors only) and 22/22F (Rim and SVR) and Falcon 25 (Rim) exit devices made by Ingersoll
Rand. The proper low current request to exit switch (RX-LC or AE) is required.
Part Numbers for Request to Exit Switch: Von Duprin: 050281 | Falcon: 650359
*AD-Series FIPS 201-1 Compliant Solution:
The AD-Series is an ideal solution for applications which require approval by the U.S. Federal
Government under HSPD-12 for FIPS 201-1 compliance. In order to meet requirements, both the
AD-301 Hardwired lock as well as the AD-401 Wireless lock must be sold as a complete unit with
the FMK Multi-Technology + Keypad Reader.
The Schlage AD-Series Wireless System allows
(heartbeat) from the PIM to the Access Control
users to extend the reach of access control to
System occurs on a periodic basis and is field
areas where running wires is difficult, expensive
configurable; the factory default is set at 10
or virtually impossible. Installations on interior
minutes. The AD-Series Wireless System utilizes
doors, remote doors, historic buildings, 24/7
patent-pending Wake-Up On Radio™ technology
facilities, elevators and parking gates are now
to deliver real-time activation at a remote
made possible by eliminating the need to run wires
wireless lock while maintaining up to a 2 year
directly to the access point. Options are available
battery life. This feature, which is configurable
to accommodate Wiegand, Clock & Data as well as
from 10 seconds to as fast as 1 second, enables
RS-485 connections to the access control system.
centralized emergency lockdown and unlock
The AD-Series Wireless System communicates via
commands in applications where both speed and
900 MHz frequency to a Panel Interface Module
battery life are critical.
(PIM) which is then hardwired back to the access
In addition to the AD-Series Locks, a variety of
control panel. Each PIM can support up to 16
wireless devices are available to extend the reach
wireless devices within a 200' range in most
of access control to applications which may be
facilities and up to 1000' with clear line of site.
difficult to wire. These include wireless remote
The 900 MHz band enables longer transmission
antennas (ANT400), wireless portable readers
ranges; wavelengths travel a greater distance and
(WPR400/401), wireless reader interfaces
better penetrate typical building construction –
(WRI400), wireless repeaters (REPTR400),
allowing for simplified system design. And since
wireless gate control kits (GCK400) and wireless
900 MHz operates on a different frequency versus
elevator control kits (ECK400).
WiFi, it won’t burden existing IT infrastructure.
Secure and reliable wireless communication
Networked Locking
Extend the reach of access control with proven
900 MHz wireless technology
Networked Locking
AD-300 Networked Hardwired Solution:
System Configuration
Directly communicates
via RS-485
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP)
AD-300
Wiegand or
Clock & Data
AD-300
UP TO 2 LOCKS
RS-485
PANEL INTERFACE
BOARD (PIB300-2D)
••
Direct connection from lock to ACP via RS-485 with specific integrated access control
software providers.
••
PIB300-2D required for Wiegand or Clock and Data connection; supports up to 2 AD-300
devices.
••
Utilize Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD) if supervised inputs are required in Wiegand systems.
••
Verify requirements for Reader Interface or Gateway with your OEM Access Control Provider.
AD-301 Networked Hardwired FIPS 201-1 Compliant Solution:
System Configuration
Directly communicates
via RS-485
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP)
AD-301
Wiegand
RS-485
AD-301
UP TO 2 LOCKS
PANEL INTERFACE
BOARD (PIB300-2D)
••
Must be purchased as a complete lock with FMK reader.
••
Direct connection from lock to ACP via RS-485 with specific integrated access control
software providers.
••
PIB300-2D required for Wiegand connection; supports up to 2 AD-301 devices.
••
Utilize Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD) if supervised inputs are required in Wiegand systems.
••
Verify requirements for Reader Interface or Gateway with your OEM Access Control Provider.
Hardwired
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
Hardwired
Hardwired
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
AD-300
AD-301
AD-300
AD-301
System Info - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Requirements
Communication to/from Controller
Direct - RS-485
Wiegand or Clock & Data
Panel Interface Module
N/A
N/A
PIB300-2D
Number of Locks Per Panel
Interface Module
N/A
N/A
Up to 2
Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD)
N/A
N/A
Yes, if supervised inputs are required
Reader Interface/Gateway
As required by OEM Access Control System
Device Capacity
Number of Users
As supported by OEM Access Control System
Number of Audits
Degraded Cache Mode in Lock**
Yes**
Reader Options - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Credential Format Compatibility
Keypad Only
Magnetic Stripe Card
FIPS 201-1 Multi-Technology 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
Multi-Technology 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
PIV & PIV-I Compatible†
Card + PIN
Yes, as supported by OEM
Access Control System
No
Yes, as supported by OEM
Access Control System
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes, as supported by
OEM Access Control
System
No
Yes, as supported by
OEM Access Control
System
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Status Monitors - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Request to Exit
Door Position Switch
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Interior Tamper Guard
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Request to Enter
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Battery Status
N/A
Battery Voltage Level
Communication Status
Remote Lockdown (from Host)
Yes
Remote Unlock (from Host)
Deadbolt Position
Interior Push Button
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Status Monitors - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Cylindrical
Yes
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Yes - See Exit Trim Compatibility Data Sheet for specifics
Functions - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Classroom/Storeroom (70)
Privacy (40)
Office (50)
Apartment (60)
Yes - Classroom/Storeroom is not available with Mortise Deadbolt Chassis
Yes - Classroom/Storeroom is not available with
Mortise Deadbolt Chassis. Privacy, Office and Apartment as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Accessories - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
HHD - Handheld Programming
Device
Yes
*If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user ID’s, option to expand to 1,000. Or, use facility/site codes
instead of user ID’s. No events are captured in audit trail when operating in cache mode.
†75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats. Check with access control provider
for specific support.
Networked Locking
Hardwired
Networked Locking
AD-400 Networked Wireless Solution:
System Configuration
RS-485
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-485)
AD-400
(UP TO 16 LOCKS)
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-TD2)
AD-400
(UP TO 2 LOCKS)
Wiegand or
Clock & Data
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL
(ACP)
••
PIM400-TD2 required for Wiegand or Clock and Data connections; supports up
to 2 AD Series devices.
••
PIM400-485, if supported by OEM provider, supports up to 16 AD-400 devices.
••
Utilize Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD) if supervised inputs are required in
Wiegand systems.
••
Verify requirements for Reader Interface or Gateway with your OEM Access
Control Provider.
AD-401 Networked Wireless FIPS201-1 Compliant Solution:
System Configuration
RS-485
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-485)
AD-401
(UP TO 16 LOCKS)
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-TD2)
AD-401
(UP TO 2 LOCKS)
Wiegand
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL
(ACP)
••
Must be purchased as a complete lock with FMK reader.
••
PIM400-485 required for RS-485 connection with integrated access control software
providers; supports up to 16 AD-401 devices.
••
PIM400-TD2 required for Wiegand connection; supports up to 2 AD-401 devices.
••
Utilize Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD) if supervised inputs are required in Wiegand systems.
••
Verify requirements for Reader Interface or Gateway with your OEM Access Control Provider.
Hardwired
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
Hardwired
Hardwired
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
AD-400
AD-401
AD-400
AD-401
System Info - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Requirements
Communication to/from Controller
Panel Interface Module
Number of Locks Per Panel
Interface Module
Direct - RS-485
Wiegand or Clock & Data
PIM400-485*
PIM400-TD2
Up to 16
Up to 2
Relay/Dry Contact Board (RLBD)
No
Reader Interface/Gateway
Yes, if supervised inputs are required
As required by OEM Access Control System
Device Capacity
Number of Users
As supported by OEM Access Control System
Number of Audits
Degraded Cache Mode in Lock**
Yes**
Reader Options - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Credential Format Compatibility
Keypad Only
Magnetic Stripe Card
FIPS 201-1 Multi-Technology 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
Multi-Technology 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
PIV & PIV-I Compatible†
Card + PIN
Yes, as supported by OEM
Access Control System
No
Yes, as supported by OEM
Access Control System
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes, as supported by
OEM Access Control
System
No
Yes, as supported by
OEM Access Control
System
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Status Monitors - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Request to Exit
Door Position Switch
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Interior Tamper Guard
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Request to Enter
Battery Status
Battery Voltage Level
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Communication Status
No
Yes
Remote Lockdown (from Host)
Remote Unlock (from Host)
Deadbolt Position
Yes, requires configuration at PIM via HHD
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Interior Push Button
Status Monitors - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Cylindrical
Yes
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Yes - See Exit Trim Compatibility Data Sheet for specifics
Functions - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
Classroom/Storeroom (70)
Privacy (40)
Office (50)
Apartment (60)
Yes - Classroom/Storeroom is not available with Mortise Deadbolt Chassis
Yes - Classroom/Storeroom is not available with
Mortise Deadbolt Chassis. Privacy, Office and Apartment as supported by OEM Access Control System
No
Accessories - Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider for Specific Support
HHD - Handheld Programming Device
Wireles Portable Reader (WPR400/401)
Wireless Reader Interface (WRI400)
Wireless Repeater (REPTR400)
Wireless Antenna (ANT400)
Yes, as supported by OEM Access Control System
Wireless Signal Test Kit (TK400)
Wireless Gate Kit (GCK400)
Wireless Elevator Kit (ECK400)
*PIM400-485 sold exclusively through OEM providers.
**If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user ID’s, option to expand to 1,000. Or, use facility/site codes instead of user ID’s. No events are captured in
audit trail when operating in cache mode.
†75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats. Check with access control provider for specific support.
Networked Locking
Hardwired
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005022 06/12
Networked Wireless
Electronic Lock
Overview
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
Factory orderable options include choices of credential readers,
chassis type, network configurations, locking functions, power
options, lever styles and finishes. It also offers a wide selection
of features that can be configured in the field to customize
your openings.
To simplify installation, the AD-Series combines all the hardware
components required at the door for a complete access control
system into one integrated design that includes the electrified
lock, credential reader, request-to-exit and -enter sensors, door
position switch, tamper guard and more.
The AD-400 wireless networked lock gives you many of the key
benefits of a hardwired access control system — without the
wires. This allows you to secure doors that were traditionally
difficult to run wires to in the past—and increase the security
throughout your facility.
The AD-400 has a number of features built in that are configurable
in the field and a long list of items that can be monitored by access
control software. Please consult your access control software
partner for details on the integration of specific features.
Features and Benefits
• Open Architecture platform
• Panel interface options ensure seamless communication
with your system
• Non-invasive installations for historic buildings and
sensitive areas
• Secure encrypted data transmission
• Unique communication protocols that won’t interfere
with other wireless networks
• Patent-pending wireless feature that enables efficient
centralized lockdown in less than 10 seconds while still
optimizing battery life up to 2 years
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
• Wireless accessories available for remote, gate, elevator
and portable (mustering) applications
• AD-Series with multi-technology readers are NFC
compatible
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1,
UL 294, UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS
AD-400 Wireless
Networked Locking Solutions
AD-400
Reliable Communications
Secure and reliable wireless communication with the
Panel Interface Module (PIM) is accomplished using
900 MHz frequency. 900 MHz band enables longer
transmission ranges because signal propagation with
longer wavelengths travels a greater distance and better
penetrates typical building construction – allowing for
simplified system design.
System Configuration
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Wake-Up On Radio
This feature enables implementation of wireless locks
in applications where centralized lockdown or unlock is
required. ‘Wake Up on Radio’ utilizes patent-pending
technology to enable real-time activation at a remote
battery-powered wireless lock. The technology is
configurable from 10 to 1 second increments. When
Wake-Up On Radio is used in critical applications
Dynamic Channel Switching should also be enabled.
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL
(ACP)
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400)
AD-400
(UP TO 16 LOCKS)
Dimensions
Panel Interface Module (PIM400)
The PIM400 (sold seperately) is required for communication
between the AD-400 wireless lock and the access control
panel, and can support up to 16 locks depending on your
access control system.
AD-400 Electronic Lock Specifications
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence, 10 channels
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Transmission/Encryption
AES-128 bit Key
Credential Verification Time
< 1 second*
Wake-up on Radio
Responds to lock/unlock command from host in less than
10 seconds in battery powered applications (per field configuration)
Communication Range
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions (normal building construction), up to
1000 ft clear line of site
RF Interference Avoidance
Configurable Dynamic Channel Switching
Data Rate
RF: 40 kbps
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
RS-485, Wiegand, or Clock & Data via PIM400 to host
Power Supply
4AA, 8AA, 12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4AA
Operating Temperature/Exterior
Functions

Classroom/Storeroom

Office**

Privacy**

Apartment**
Note: BHMA/ANSI functions
such as these can be implemented
by the Software when Door Position,
Deadbolt Position and/or Interior
Push button are monitored. Consult
Software provider for specific
capabilities. Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not available
with Mortise Deadbolt option.
Available Status
Signals

Lock/Unlock Status†
-31º to 151ºF (-35° to 66°C)

Request-to-Exit
Operating Temperature/Interior
32º to 120ºF (0° to 49°C) (battery)

Door Position
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing

Mechanical Key Override**
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C, FCC
Part 15, ADA, RoHS

Deadbolt Position**

Interior Push Button**

Interior Cover Tamper Guard**

Battery Status

Communication Status**

Request-to-Enter**
(8AA option recommended for smart card and multi-technology options)
Certifications
Panel Interface Module (PIM400), Handheld Device (HHD),
Remote antennas for PIM400 to extend range, Dry Contact Relay
Board (RLBD) may be required for supervised inputs (Wiegand
systems)
Accessories
* Lock requires less than 100 msec, response time does not include latency time of ACP.
** Consult your access control software provider for specific scope of support. Interior pushbutton,
mechanical key override and deadbolt position are only available when linked via PIM400-485.
† Software indicates lock/unlock status based on sequence of events, but cannot
validate mechanical clutch position unless monitored on RS-485** connection.
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
ANSI Standard
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000,
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Door Thickness
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard,
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard,
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option*
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and
ANSI strike box available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
optional strikes lip lengths available
Cylinder & Keys
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
*Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
Multi-Technology Reader Specification

AD-Series
Exit Trim
AD-300 and AD-400
exit trim is exclusively
compatible with Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP
(Rim, Mortise, and SVR.
CVC and CVR on Metal
doors only), Von Duprin
22/22F (Rim and SVR)
and Falcon 25 (Rim) exit
devices made by Ingersoll Rand. The proper
low current request to
exit switch (RX-LC or AE)
is required.
Part Numbers for
Request to Exit Switch:
•Von Duprin: 050281
•Falcon: 650359
Benefits of AD-Series
Multi-Technology Readers:
Frequency
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card
Standards
Standards ISO Standard 15693 and ISO 14443
Maximum Read Range
up to 1.25” on 125 kHz proximity, up to 0.75” on 13.56 MHz smart card
125 kHz compatibility
Schlage Proximity, XceedID™ Proximity, HID® Proximity, GE/CASI
ProxLite®, AWID® Proximity, LenelProx® 13.56 MHz compatibility
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector, XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector,
aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA; PIV and
PIV-I**†
13.56 MHz compatibility
(serial number only)
DESFire® CSN, HID iClass® CSN, Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN,
MIFARE®, MIFARE DESFire™ EV1, ST Microelectronics® CSN, Texas
Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number, Phillips I-Code® CSN 125 kHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
125 kHz Clamshell (SXF7410), 125 kHz ISO Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz
ISO Card w/Magnetic Stripe (SXF7510MS)
13.56 MHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
13.56 MHz MIFARE Clamshell (SXF9420), 13.56 MHz MIFARE ISO
Printable (SXF9520, SXF9551, SXF9558), 13.56 MHz MIFARE Key Tag
(SXF9651), 13.56 MHz MIFARE PVC Patch (SXF9751), aptiQ™ Smart
Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 (SXF9000 Series)
Certifications/Standards
FCC, RSS210, UL 294, Listed, ISO Standard 15693, and ISO Standard
14443
• Now available with choice of Insertion or Swipe style readers
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• Reader can be cleaned without
removing lock from door
• Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix
backlit keypad
Style/Layout
Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix backlit keypad
Keypad
Notes: • Reads multiple brand of both
proximity (125 kHz) and smart
(13.56 MHz) technologies with
single device
• AD-Series multi-technology
readers are NFC compatible
• Allows end user to migrate to
more secure credentials over time
and as budgets permit
Additional Readers
Magnetic Stripe
• Backlit keypad
• 12 button, 3x4 matrix
** FIPS 201-1 Compliant Option Available: The AD-Series can be used in applications which require approval by the
U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12 for FIPS 201-1 Compliance. Specific components are required, please
see the AD-401 data sheet or AD-301 data sheet for complete details.
† 75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology • Magnetic Stripe
• Proximity
• Proximity
(Insertion)
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Insertion)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors; BAA options available
Series
Class
Chassis
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
Battery
Backset
& Latch
Strike
Door
Thickness
AD-400-CY-70 -MG - SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 4B -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
6 Lever
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVC/CVR
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
4 Function
70 50
40
60
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
Lock function capabilities are determined by users
access control system
MS
MSK MT
MTK
DT
4B
8B
Available with knurled surface
7 Finish
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
8 Lever Cylinder Type
5 Reader
KP MG MGK 11 Battery
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
Keypad
Magnetic Stripe (Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe (Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad (Swipe)
Multi-Technology
(125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
Multi-Technology + Keypad
(125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
Dummy Trim
PD Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
Everest
RH
LH
Right Handed
Left Handed
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
13 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
14 Door Thickness
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
10 Handing
12 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for other available strikes
9 Keyway Type
C123
4AA
8AA
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4”
See price book for detail
Field reversible
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Inside PicoTag is a trademark
of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire
EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
STMicroelectronics is a trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. Infineon and my-d are trademarks of Infineon Technologies. AWID is a
trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004446 06/12
FIPS 201-1 Compliant Networked
Wireless Multi-Technology &
Keypad Reader
Overview
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
The AD-401 is an ideal solution for applications which require
approval by the U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12 for
FIPS 201 Compliance. The AD-401 electronic integrated lock
with FMK multi-technology reader + keypad is FIPS 201-1
compliant for use in U.S. Federal Agency Buildings using smart
card technology. The AD-401 lock with an FMK reader allows
both a Wiegand and RS-485 solution.
Factory orderable options include choices of chassis type,
network configurations, locking functions, power options, lever
styles and finishes. It also offers a selection of features that can
be configured in the field to customize your openings.
To simplify installation, the AD-Series combines all the hardware
components required at the door for a complete access control
system into one integrated design that includes the electrified
lock, credential reader, request-to-exit and -enter sensors, door
position switch, tamper guard and more.
The AD-401 wireless networked lock gives you many of the key
benefits of a hardwired access control system — without the
wires. This allows you to secure doors that were traditionally
difficult to run wires to in the past—and increase the security
throughout your facility.
The AD-401 has a number of features built in that are configurable
in the field and a long list of items that can be monitored by access
control software. Please consult your access control software
partner for details on the integration of specific features.
Features and Benefits
• Open Architecture platform
• Panel interface options ensure seamless communication
with your system:
-- AD-401 with integrated RS-485 software providers
will require the use of a PIM400-485 Panel Interface
Module which can support up to 16 AD-401 devices
-- AD-401 in Wiegand systems will require the use of
a PIM400-TD2 Panel Interface Module which can
support up to 2 AD-401 devices and may require the
optional dry-contact relay board (RLBD)
• Non-invasive installations for historic buildings and
sensitive areas
• Secure encrypted data transmission
• Unique communication protocols that won’t interfere
with other wireless networks
• Patent-pending wireless feature that enables efficient
centralized lockdown in less than 10 seconds while still
optimizing battery life up to 2 years
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
• Wireless accessories available for remote, gate,
elevator and portable (mustering) applications
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1,
UL 294, UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS,
FIPS 201-1
AD-401 FIPS 201-1 Compliant Wireless
Networked Locking Solutions
AD-401
Reliable Communications
System Configuration
Secure and reliable wireless communication with the
Panel Interface Module (PIM) is accomplished using
900 MHz frequency. 900 MHz band enables longer
transmission ranges because signal propagation with
longer wavelengths travels a greater distance and better
penetrates typical building construction – allowing for
simplified system design.
RS-485
AD-401
(UP TO 16 LOCKS)
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-TD2)
AD-401
(UP TO 2 LOCKS)
Wiegand
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Wake-Up On Radio
PANEL INTERFACE
MODULE (PIM400-485)
This feature enables implementation of wireless locks
in applications where centralized lockdown or unlock is
required. ‘Wake Up on Radio’ utilizes patent-pending
technology to enable real-time activation at a remote
battery-powered wireless lock. The technology is
configurable from 10 to 1 second increments. When
Wake-Up On Radio is used in critical applications
Dynamic Channel Switching should also be enabled.
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL
(ACP)
Dimensions
Panel Interface Module (PIM400)
The PIM400 (sold seperately) is required for communication
between the AD-401 wireless lock and the access control
panel, and can support up to 16 locks depending on your
access control system.
AD-401 Electronic Lock Specifications
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence, 10 channels
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Transmission/Encryption
AES-128 bit Key
Credential Verification Time
< 1 second*
Wake-up on Radio
Responds to lock/unlock command from host in less than
10 seconds in battery powered applications (per field configuration)
Communication Range
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions (normal building construction), up to
1000 ft clear line of site
RF Interference Avoidance
Configurable Dynamic Channel Switching
Data Rate
RF: 40 kbps
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
RS-485, Wiegand, or Clock & Data via PIM400 to host
Power Supply
4AA, 8AA, 12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Available Status
Signals
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4AA

Lock/Unlock Status†
Operating Temperature/Exterior
-31º to 151ºF (-35° to 66°C)

Request-to-Exit
Door Position
(8AA option recommended for smart card and multi-technology options)

Classroom/Storeroom

Office**

Privacy**

Apartment**
Note: BHMA/ANSI functions
such as these can be implemented
by the Software when Door Position,
Deadbolt Position and/or Interior
Push button are monitored. Consult
Software provider for specific
capabilities. Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not available
with Mortise Deadbolt option.
Operating Temperature/Interior
32º to 120ºF (0° to 49°C) (battery)

Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing

Mechanical Key Override**
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C, FCC
Part 15, ADA, RoHS, FIPS 201-1

Deadbolt Position**

Interior Push Button*

Interior Cover Tamper Guard*

Battery Status

Communication Status*

Request-to-Enter*
Accessories
Functions
Modulation
Panel Interface Module (PIM400), Handheld Device (HHD),
Remote antennas for PIM400 to extend range, Dry Contact Relay
Board (RLBD) may be required for supervised inputs (Wiegand
systems)
* Lock requires less than 100 msec, response time does not include latency time of ACP.
** Consult your access control software provider for specific scope of support. Interior pushbutton,
mechanical key override and deadbolt position are only available when linked via PIM400-485.
† Software indicates lock/unlock status based on sequence of events, but cannot validate mechanical clutch position unless monitored on RS-485** connection.
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000,
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
ANSI Standard
Door Thickness
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard,
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard,
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option*
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and
ANSI strike box available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
optional strikes lip lengths available
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
Cylinder & Keys
*Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
FMK Multi-Technology Reader Specification
Frequency
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card
Standards
Standards ISO Standard 15693 and ISO 14443
Maximum Read Range
up to 1.25” on 125 kHz proximity, up to 0.75” on 13.56 MHz smart card
125 kHz compatibility
Schlage Proximity, XceedID™ Proximity, HID® Proximity, GE/CASI ProxLite®, AWID® Proximity,
LenelProx® 13.56 MHz compatibility
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector, XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector, aptiQ™ Smart Cards using
MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA; PIV and PIV-I**†
13.56 MHz compatibility
(serial number only)
DESFire® CSN, HID iClass® CSN, Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN, MIFARE®, MIFARE
DESFire™ EV1, ST Microelectronics® CSN, Texas Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number, Phillips
I-Code® CSN 125 kHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
125 kHz Clamshell (SXF7410), 125 kHz ISO Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz ISO Card w/Magnetic
Stripe (SXF7510MS)
13.56 MHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
13.56 MHz MIFARE Clamshell (SXF9420), 13.56 MHz MIFARE ISO Printable (SXF9520,
SXF9551, SXF9558), 13.56 MHz MIFARE Key Tag (SXF9651), 13.56 MHz MIFARE PVC Patch
(SXF9751), aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 (SXF9000 Series)
Certifications/Standards
FCC, RSS210, UL 294, Listed, ISO Standard 15693, and ISO Standard 14443, FIPS 201-1
Style/Layout
12 button, 3x4 matrix backlit keypad
Notes: ** The AD-Series FIPS 201-1 Compliant Option can be used in applications which require approval by the U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12
for FIPS 201-1 Compliance.
† 75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats
AD-Series FMK Reader Module
• FIPS 201-1 Compliant Multi-Technology
• FMK reader required for FIPS 201-1 Compliant
multi-technology & keypad reader supporting both
proximity and smart cards
+ KEYPAD
AD-Series
Exit Trim
AD-301 and AD-401
exit trim is exclusively
compatible with Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP
(Rim, Mortise, and SVR.
CVC and CVR on metal
doors only), Von Duprin
22/22F (Rim and SVR)
and Falcon 25 (Rim) exit
devices made by Ingersoll Rand. The proper
low current request to
exit switch (RX-LC or AE)
is required.
Part Numbers for
Request to Exit Switch:
•Von Duprin: 050281
•Falcon: 650359
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors; BAA options available
Series
Class
Chassis
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
Battery
Backset
& Latch
Strike
Door
Thickness
AD-401-CY-70 -FMK- SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 4B -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
6 Lever
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVC/CVR
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
4 Function
70 50
40
60
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
Lock function capabilities are determined by users
access control system
4B
8B
Available with knurled surface
7 Finish
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
8 Lever Cylinder Type
5 Reader
FMK
11 Battery
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
FIPS 201-1 Multi-Technology
+ Keypad (125 kHz and
13.56 MHz
PD Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
Everest
RH
LH
Right Handed
Left Handed
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
13 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
14 Door Thickness
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
10 Handing
12 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for other available strikes
9 Keyway Type
C123
4AA
8AA
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4”
See price book for detail
Field reversible
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Inside PicoTag is a trademark
of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire
EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
STMicroelectronics is a trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. Infineon and my-d are trademarks of Infineon Technologies. AWID is a
trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004870 06/12
Networked Hardwired
Electronic Lock
Overview
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
Factory orderable options include choices of credential readers,
chassis type, network configurations, locking functions, lever
styles and finishes. It also offers a wide selection of features
that can be configured in the field to customize your openings.
To simplify installation, the AD-Series combines all the hardware
components required at the door for a complete access control
system into one integrated design that includes the electrified
lock, credential reader, request-to-exit and -enter sensors, door
position switch, tamper switch and more.
The AD-300 has a number of features built in that are
configurable in the field and a long list of items that can be
monitored by access control software. Please consult your
access control software partner for details on the integration
of specific features.
Features and Benefits
• Open Architecture platform
• Panel interface options ensure seamless communication
with your system
• Real-time communication between access control
system and lock
• Field configurable Fail Safe/Fail Secure and other
capabilities per code
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
• A wide selection of credential readers and networking
options to choose from
• AD-Series with multi-technology readers are NFC
compatible
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294,
UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS
AD-300 Hardwired
Networked Locking Solutions
AD-300
Functions
AD-300 Electronic Lock Specifications
Classroom/Storeroom
Office*
 Privacy*
 Apartment*


Credential Verification Time
< 1 second
Data Rate
RS-485 : 9.6 kbps
Visual/Audible
Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
Wiegand or Clock & Data via PIB300, or RS-485 directly
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Note: BHMA/ANSI functions such
as these can be implemented by the
Software when Door Position, Deadbolt
Position and/or Interior Push button are
monitored. Consult Software provider
for specific capabilities. Classroom/
Storeroom and Office function not
available with Mortise Deadbolt option.
Cable Specifications for Power 18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent)
Cable Distance for Power
AD-300 to Power Supply: up to 1000 ft (303 m)
Available Status Signals
Cable Specifications for Data
24AWG, 2 or 4 Conductor Shielded (Belden 9841, 9842 or equivalent)

Lock/Unlock Status†
Cabling Distance for Data
AD-300 to PIB300 or ACP, RS-485: up to 4000 ft (1219 m)

Request-to-Exit
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)

Door Position
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing

Mechanical Key Override*
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C,
FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS

Deadbolt Position*

Interior Cover Tamper Guard*
Panel Interface Board (PIB300), Handheld Device (HHD), Dry
Contact Relay Board (RLBD) may be required for supervised inputs
(Wiegand systems)

Communication Status*

Interior Push Button*

Request-to-Enter*
Accessories
† Software indicates lock/unlock status based on sequence of events, but cannot
validate mechanical clutch positions unless monitored on RS-485* connection
System Configuration
Panel Interface Board (PIB300-2D)
Directly communicates
via RS-485
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP)
AD-300
Wiegand or
Clock & Data
RS-485
PANEL INTERFACE
BOARD (PIB300-2D)
Dimensions
* Consult your access control software
provider for specific scope of support.
Interior pushbutton, mechanical key
override and deadbolt position are only
available when linked via PIM400-485.
AD-300
If the system requires Wiegand or Clock & Data protocol
(rather than a direct RS-485 connection), the AD-Series
open architecture platform connects up to two AD-300
locks to the Panel Interface Board (PIB300 - sold separately,
if required) that seamlessly connects to an access control
panel or reader interface board. All monitoring is captured
at the remote monitoring station.
PIB300-2D Specifications
PIB300 to Lock, RS-485: up to 4000’
Communication Range PIB300 to ACP, Wiegand or Clock
& Data: up to 500’
Visual/Audible
13 LEDs for Status Indicators
System Interface
Wiegand or Clock & Data
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Max Current
Requirements
Up to 250 mA
Operating
Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions (HWD)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0”
(18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.57 kg)
Cable Specifications
(PIB300 to ACP)
22AWG, 8 Conductor Shielded
(Alpha 1298C or equivalent)
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294,
FCC Part 15; RoHS
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
AD-Series
Exit Trim
AD-300 and AD-400
exit trim is exclusively
ANSI Standard
compatible with Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP
Door Thickness
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
(Rim, Mortise, and SVR.
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
CVC and CVR on metal
doors only), Von Duprin
1/2˝ throw security latch standard,
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard,
Latch Bolt
3/4” throw optional
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option* 22/22F (Rim and SVR)
and Falcon 25 (Rim) exit
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
devices made by Ingersoll Rand. The proper
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
low current request to
Strike
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and 1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
ANSI strike box available
optional strikes lip lengths available
exit switch (RX-LC or AE)
is required.
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Cylinder & Keys
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
Part Numbers for
Request to Exit Switch:
**Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
•Von Duprin: 050281
•Falcon: 650359
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security

Multi-Technology Reader Specification
Benefits of AD-Series
Multi-Technology Readers:
Frequency
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card
Standards
Standards ISO Standard 15693 and ISO 14443
Maximum Read Range
up to 1.25” on 125 kHz proximity, up to 0.75” on 13.56 MHz smart card
125 kHz compatibility
Schlage Proximity, XceedID™ Proximity, HID® Proximity, GE/CASI
ProxLite®, AWID® Proximity, LenelProx® 13.56 MHz compatibility
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector, XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector,
aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA; PIV and
PIV-I**†
13.56 MHz compatibility
(serial number only)
DESFire® CSN, HID iClass® CSN, Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN,
MIFARE®, MIFARE DESFire™ EV1, ST Microelectronics® CSN, Texas
Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number, Phillips I-Code® CSN 125 kHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
125 kHz Clamshell (SXF7410), 125 kHz ISO Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz
ISO Card w/Magnetic Stripe (SXF7510MS)
13.56 MHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
13.56 MHz MIFARE Clamshell (SXF9420), 13.56 MHz MIFARE ISO
Printable (SXF9520, SXF9551, SXF9558), 13.56 MHz MIFARE Key Tag
(SXF9651), 13.56 MHz MIFARE PVC Patch (SXF9751), aptiQ™ Smart
Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 (SXF9000 Series)
Certifications/Standards
FCC, RSS210, UL 294, Listed, ISO Standard 15693, and ISO Standard
14443
• Now available with choice of Insertion or Swipe style readers
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• Reader can be cleaned without
removing lock from door
• Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix
backlit keypad
Style/Layout
Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix backlit keypad
Keypad
Notes: • Reads multiple brands of both
proximity (125 kHz) and smart
(13.56 MHz) technologies with
single device
• AD-Series multi-technology
readers are NFC compatible
• Allows end user to migrate to
more secure credentials over time
and as budgets permit
Additional Readers
Magnetic Stripe
• Backlit keypad
• 12 button, 3x4 matrix
** FIPS 201-1 Compliant Option Available: The AD-Series can be used in applications which require approval by the
U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12 for FIPS 201-1 Compliance. Specific components are required, please
see the AD-401 data sheet or AD-301 data sheet for complete details.
† 75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology • Magnetic Stripe
• Proximity
• Proximity
(Insertion)
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Insertion)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors; BAA Options Available
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Door
Thickness
Chassis
2
Strike
Class
1
Backset
& Latch
Series
AD-300-CY-70 -MG - SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
12
13
11
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
6 Lever
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
4 Function
70 50
40
60
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
Lock function capabilities are determined by users
access control system
MS
MSK MT
MTK
DT
RH
LH
Available with knurled surface
7 Finish
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Keypad
Magnetic Stripe (Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe (Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad (Swipe)
Multi-Technology
(125 kHz and 13.56 MHz)
Multi-Technology + Keypad
(125 kHz and 13.56 MHz)
Dummy Trim
PD Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
9 Keyway Type
C123
11 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
12 Strike
Cylindrical
10-0251-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-0721-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
Lever styles
Right Handed
Left Handed
Field reversible
8 Lever Cylinder Type
5 Reader
KP MG MGK 10 Handing
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
13 Door Thickness
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4
See price book for detail.
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Inside PicoTag is a trademark
of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire
EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
STMicroelectronics is a trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. Infineon and my-d are trademarks of Infineon Technologies. AWID is
a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004448
06/12
FIPS 201-1 Compliant Networked
Hardwired Multi-Technology &
Keypad Reader
Overview
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
The AD-301 is an ideal solution for applications which require
approval by the U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12 for
FIPS 201-1 Compliance. The AD-301 electronic integrated lock
with FMK multi-technology reader + keypad is FIPS 201-1
compliant for use in U.S. Federal Agency Buildings using smart
card technology. The AD-301 lock with an FMK reader allows
both a Wiegand and RS-485 solution.
Factory orderable options include choices of chassis type,
network configurations, locking functions, lever styles and
finishes. It also offers a wide selection of features that can be
configured in the field to customize your openings.
To simplify installation, the AD-Series combines all the hardware
components required at the door for a complete access control
system into one integrated design that includes the electrified
lock, credential reader, request-to-exit and -enter sensors, door
position switch, tamper switch and more.
The AD-301 has a number of features built in that are
configurable in the field and a long list of items that can be
monitored by access control software. Please consult your
access control software partner for details on the integration
of specific features.
Features and Benefits
• Open Architecture platform
• Panel interface options ensure seamless communication
with your system:
-- AD-301 locks can wire directly into the RS-485
partners access control panel.
-- AD-301 in Wiegand solutions will require the use
of a PIB300-2D Panel Interface Board which can
support up to 2 AD-301 devices and may require
the optional dry-contact relay board (RLBD).
• Real-time communication between access control
system and lock
• Field configurable Fail Safe/Fail Secure and other
capabilities per code
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1,
UL 294, UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS,
FIPS 201-1
AD-301 FIPS 201-1 Compliant Hardwired
Networked Locking Solutions
AD-301
Functions
AD-301 Electronic Lock Specifications
Classroom/Storeroom
Office*
 Privacy*
 Apartment*


Credential Verification Time
< 1 second
Data Rate
RS-485 : 9.6 kbps
Visual/Audible
Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
Wiegand or Clock & Data via PIB300, or RS-485 directly
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Note: BHMA/ANSI functions such
as these can be implemented by the
Software when Door Position, Deadbolt
Position and/or Interior Push button are
monitored. Consult Software provider
for specific capabilities. Classroom/
Storeroom and Office function not
available with Mortise Deadbolt option.
Cable Specifications for Power 18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent)
Cable Distance for Power
AD-301 to Power Supply: up to 1000 ft (303 m)
Available Status Signals
Cable Specifications for Data
24AWG, 2 or 4 Conductor Shielded (Belden 9841, 9842 or equivalent)

Lock/Unlock Status†
Cabling Distance for Data
AD-301 to PIB300 or ACP, RS-485: up to 4000 ft (1219 m)

Request-to-Exit
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)

Door Position
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing

Mechanical Key Override*
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C,
FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS, FIPS 201-1

Deadbolt Position*

Interior Cover Tamper Guard*
Panel Interface Board (PIB300), Handheld Device (HHD), Dry
Contact Relay Board (RLBD) may be required for supervised inputs
(Wiegand systems)

Communication Status*

Interior Push Button*

Request-to-Enter*
Accessories
† Software indicates lock/unlock status based on sequence of events, but cannot
validate mechanical clutch positions unless monitored on RS-485* connection
System Configuration
Panel Interface Board (PIB300-2D)
Directly communicates
via RS-485
ACCESS CONTROL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP)
AD-301
Wiegand or
Clock & Data
RS-485
PANEL INTERFACE
BOARD (PIB300-2D)
Dimensions
* Consult your access control software
provider for specific scope of support.
Interior pushbutton, mechanical key
override and deadbolt position are only
available when connected via RS-485.
AD-301
If the system requires Wiegand or Clock & Data protocol
(rather than a direct RS-485 connection), the AD-Series
open architecture platform connects up to two AD-301
locks to the Panel Interface Board (PIB300 - sold separately,
if required) that seamlessly connects to an access control
panel or reader interface board. All monitoring is captured
at the remote monitoring station.
PIB300-2D Specifications
PIB300 to Lock, RS485: up to 4000’
Communication Range PIB300 to ACP, Wiegand or Clock
& Data: up to 500’
Visual/Audible
13 LEDs for Status Indicators
System Interface
Wiegand or Clock & Data
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Max Current
Requirements
Up to 250 mA
Operating
Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions (HWD)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0”
(18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.57 kg)
Cable Specifications
(PIB300 to ACP)
22AWG, 8 Conductor Shielded
(Alpha 1298C or equivalent)
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294,
FCC Part 15; RoHS, FIPS 201-1
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
AD-Series
Exit Trim
AD-301 and AD-401
exit trim is exclusively
ANSI Standard
compatible with Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP
Door Thickness
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
(Rim, Mortise, and SVR.
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
CVC and CVR on metal
doors only), Von Duprin
1/2˝ throw security latch standard,
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard,
Latch Bolt
3/4” throw optional
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option* 22/22F (Rim and SVR)
and Falcon 25 (Rim) exit
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
devices made by Ingersoll Rand. The proper
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
low current request to
Strike
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and 1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
ANSI strike box available
optional strikes lip lengths available
exit switch (RX-LC or AE)
is required.
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Cylinder & Keys
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
Part Numbers for
Request to Exit Switch:
*Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
•Von Duprin: 050281
•Falcon: 650359
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
FMK Multi-Technology Reader Specification
Frequency
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card
Standards
Standards ISO Standard 15693 and ISO 14443
Maximum Read Range
up to 1.25” on 125 kHz proximity, up to 0.75” on 13.56 MHz smart card
125 kHz compatibility
Schlage Proximity, XceedID™ Proximity, HID® Proximity, GE/CASI ProxLite®, AWID® Proximity,
LenelProx® 13.56 MHz compatibility
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector, XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector, aptiQ™ Smart Cards
using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA; PIV and PIV-I**†
13.56 MHz compatibility
(serial number only)
DESFire® CSN, HID iClass® CSN, Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN, MIFARE®, MIFARE
DESFire™ EV1, ST Microelectronics® CSN, Texas Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number, Phillips
I-Code® CSN 125 kHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
125 kHz Clamshell (SXF7410), 125 kHz ISO Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz ISO Card w/Magnetic
Stripe (SXF7510MS)
13.56 MHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
13.56 MHz MIFARE Clamshell (SXF9420), 13.56 MHz MIFARE ISO Printable (SXF9520,
SXF9551, SXF9558), 13.56 MHz MIFARE Key Tag (SXF9651), 13.56 MHz MIFARE PVC Patch
(SXF9751), aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 (SXF9000 Series)
Certifications/Standards
FCC, RSS210, UL 294, Listed, ISO Standard 15693, and ISO Standard 14443, FIPS 201-1
Style/Layout
12 button, 3x4 matrix backlit keypad
Notes: ** The AD-Series FIPS 201-1 Compliant Option can be used in applications which require approval by the U.S. Federal Government under
HSPD-12 for FIPS 201-1.
† 75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats
AD-Series FMK Reader Module
• FIPS 201-1 Compliant Multi-Technology
• FMK reader required for FIPS 201-1 Compliant
multi-technology & keypad reader supporting
both proximity and smart cards
+ KEYPAD
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors; BAA Options Available
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Door
Thickness
Chassis
2
Strike
Class
1
Backset
& Latch
Series
AD-301-CY-70 -FMK- SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
12
13
11
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
6 Lever
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
4 Function
70 50
40
60
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
Lock function capabilities are determined by users
access control system
RH
LH
Available with knurled surface
7 Finish
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
Multi-Technology + Keypad
(125 kHz and 13.56 MHz)
PD Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
9 Keyway Type
C123
Right Handed
Left Handed
Field reversible
8 Lever Cylinder Type
5 Reader
FMK
10 Handing
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
11 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
12 Strike
Cylindrical
10-0251-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-0721-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
13 Door Thickness
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4
See price book for detail.
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Inside PicoTag is a trademark
of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire
EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
STMicroelectronics is a trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. Infineon and my-d are trademarks of Infineon Technologies. AWID is
a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004869
06/12
Exit Trim Compatibility
Overview
The AD-Series Electronic Lock is available in 993 Exit Trim for
use on openings that require exit devices for either retrofit or
new construction applications. Offline and networked solutions
are available.
Features and Benefits
The 993 Exit Trim was designed to suite with AD-Series
cylindrical and mortise locksets to ensure that the facility
remains aesthetically consistent.
The AD-Series 993 Exit Trim utilizes universal hardware to simplify
installation of offline trim to a variety of exit devices, including
Rim style from Von Duprin, Falcon, Sargent®, Precision™ Corbin
Russwin®, Dorma®, and Yale®.
Available Exit Trim Styles:
• 993R – Rim, Concealed Vertical Cable or Concealed Vertical Rod
(CVC* and CVR for metal doors only)
• 993S – Surface Vertical Rod
• 993M – Mortise
Compatibility
Devices
AD-200/250
AD-300/301
AD-400/401
Von Duprin 98/99 and
98/99XP Rim/SVR/CVR*/
CVC*/Mortise
X
X
X
Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
X
X
X
Falcon 25 Rim
X
X
X
Sargent® 80 Rim
X
Precision™ 21 Rim (2100
converts to 21 with
Precision’s BP21 kit)
X
Yale® 7000 Rim
X
Corbin Russwin® 5000 Rim
X
Dorma® 9300 Rim
X
The proper low current request to exit switch (RX-LC) is required for AD-300/301
and AD-400/401.
Part Numbers for Request to Exit Switch:
• Von Duprin: 050281
• Falcon: 650359
• Multiple Credential Reader Options
• Offline and Networked Communication Options
• A wide variety of finishes and lever styles
• Power options that include hardwired (12 VDC or 24
VDC) or batteries (4AA or 8AA)
• Compatible with most Standard, FSIC or SFIC keyways
from major brands of master key systems including
Schlage, Sargent®, Corbin®, Medeco® and Yale®
AD-Series Exit Trim
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
AD-Series
DIMENSIONS
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
• Multi-Technology (125 kHz proximity
and 13.56 MHz smart card)
• FIPS 201-1 Compliant Multi-Technology
(125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card)
sold complete with AD-301 and AD-401 only
• Magnetic Stripe
• Keypad Only
• All credential readers available + Keypad
*
unlike other AD-Series chassis styles,
upgrading reader modules on the 993 Exit
Trim requires the exterior escutcheon to be
removed from the door
Available Communication Options
Profile View
Exterior View
• AD-400: Networked Wireless Locks
• AD-401: Networked Wireless Locks FIPS 201-1 compliant
• AD-300: Networked Hardwired Locks
• AD-301: Networked Hardwired Locks FIPS 201-1 compliant
• AD-250: Offline, access rights stored
on the magnetic stripe credential
• AD-200: Offline, access rights stored
on the lock
AD-Series - 993 Exit Trim
Interior View
Side View
Side View
Interior View
Side View
Side View
AD-200/250/300*/301*
- all styles
AD-200/250/300*/
301* - RIM/CVR/CVC
or Mortise
AD-200/250/300*/
301* SVR
AD-400/401
all styles
AD-400/401
RIM/CVR/CVC
or Mortise
AD-400/401
SVR
* AD-300/301 includes LED indicator
Note: (2) #7 fasteners with decorative washers located 11.88” below bottom edge of lock
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, Von Duprin and Falcon are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc,
its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company.
Precision is a trademark of Stanley Black & Decker. Yale is a trademark of Tale Security, Inc. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin
Russwin, Inc. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand
004382
06/12
Offline Locks
Feature
AD-200
SMS Express
AD-250
SMS S/P/E
SMS S/P/E
5,000
Users: Unlimited
Audits: 10,000
System Capacity at Lock
*Number of Users or Audits/Locks
2,000 users/audits
1,000 users/audits
50 lock max.
100 lock max.
Holidays
16
32
32
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
8
16
16
Auto Unlocks
8
8
8
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
No
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (aptiQ™ Smart Cards)
Yes
No
3-6 digit PIN
3-6 digit PIN
3-8 digit PIN
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Office/Toggle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Privacy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Apartment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
Yes
No
Freeze Credential
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lock Down Credential
No
No
No
Reader
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
Lock Functions
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded versions of software:
SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher.
Previous versions (SMS Express 3.5.7 and older) support 1000 Users/Audits and 100 locks,
and do not include AD-Series and CO-Series software labels.
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Locking Solutions
AD Software Compatibility Matrix
Networked Hardwired
and Wireless Locks
Feature
AD-300 & AD-400
bright blue®
SMS P/E
System Capacity at Lock
Number of User
5,000
Unlimited
Holidays
100
Unlimited
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
100
Unlimited
** Degraded Cache Mode
Yes
Yes
Keypad Only
Yes
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes
Yes
Up to 4 digit PIN
Up to 4 digit PIN
Request to Exit
Yes
Yes
Door Position Switch
Yes
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Yes
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Yes
Yes
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Request to Enter
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes (AD-400 only)
Deadbolt Position
Yes
Yes
Battery Status
Yes
Yes
Communication Status
Yes
Yes
Yes (AD-400 only)
Yes AD-400 only)
Reader
Card + PIN
Status Monitor
*** Wake-up On Radio Lockdown
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Yes
Yes, w/RS485 connection to host
No
Privacy
No
No
Apartment
No
No
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
No
Pass Thru Credential
Yes
No
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
No
No
Freeze Credential
No
No
Lock Down Credential
Yes
No
Office/Toggle
Credential Attributes
NOTE: Shaded boxes indicate features that are only available in the upgraded v ersions of
software: SMS Express v4.0, bright blue® v2.1 and SMS v5.3.5 or higher
* Larger systems should consider SMS Select for better database manageability.
** If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user IDs, option to expand to
1,000. Or, use facility/site codes instead of user IDs. No events are
captured in audit trail when operating in cache mode.
*** Wake-up on Radio over PIM400-485 on up to 16 doors requires
implementation of specific RSI commands. Also available on PIM400-TD2.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005076 03/12
Panel Interface Module
For RS-485 Communication
Overview
The PIM400-485 seamlessly integrates to select access control
panels via RS-485, eliminating the need for reader interface
modules. Each PIM400-485 supports up to 16 wireless access
devices such as AD-400/401 locks.
Reliability
Reliable communications result from several technological
advances and incorporated features. 900 MHz spread spectrum
technology enables high transmission power in a license-free
band. Error detection algorithm maintains data integrity on each
transmission and redundant transmissions ensure communication
success. Periodic “heartbeat” signals provide supervision and
assure reliable RF communications are maintained. Lastly,
Dynamic Channel Switching (DCS) can be enabled to overcome
harsh RF environments by automatically changing channels to
avoid potential interference.
Security
Used extensively by government and military organizations,
spread spectrum technology provides significant security
advantages over conventional transmission methods. Wireless
access devices utilize spread spectrum transmissions, which
are encrypted with AES 128-bit keys, to yield a system that is
virtually uncompromisable. In addition, scalability is virtually
unlimited as each AD-Series wireless access module has nearly
a million addresses to choose from during the linking process.
Centralized Lock/Unlock Command in 10 Seconds or Less
Patent-pending Wake-up On Radio (WOR) feature drives
communication from the PIM400 to any or all linked wireless
devices in 10 seconds or less. This innovative feature works
efficiently in parallel with periodic “heartbeat” to maintain up
to 2 year battery life on wireless devices such as the AD-400/401
locks. Response rate can be field configured down to 1 second
with consideration of battery life. When Wake-up On Radio is
used in critical applications Dynamic Channel Switching should
also be enabled.
Features and Benefits
• 900 MHz Spread Spectrum RF technology
for long range, reliable communications
• Automatic linking to remote wireless access points with
10 channel frequencies to select from enables easy
commissioning
• AES-128 bit Encrypted Spread Spectrum transmissions
• 5 visual indicators to quickly pinpoint and display status
• Flash memory for easy firmware upgrades
• Certifications
-- NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6
-- UL 294
-- FCC Part 15
-- RoHS
PIM400-485 Panel Interface Module
Networked Locking Solutions
PIM400-485
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Reliable Communications
900 MHz band enables longer transmission ranges. In
general, signal propagation with longer wavelengths travel
a greater distance and penetrate through, and around
objects better than signals with shorter wavelengths.
Online Communications (Heartbeat)
Regular communications between the AD-Series wireless a
ccess module and PIM400 monitor transmission presence
and integrity. Online communications enable the PIM400
to download information or instructions such as unlock and
relock.
PIM400-485 Specifications
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence,
10 channels
RF Interference Avoidance
Optional Dynamic Channel Switching
Transmission/Encryption
AES-128 bit Key (optional)
Credential Verification Time
< 1 second*
Up to 200 ft (61 m) with obstructions
Up to 1000 ft (305 m) clear line of site
Up to 2000 ft (609 m) line of site with high
gain antenna on PIM400
Auto Addressing (Linking)
One of the final steps in the installation process is called
“linking”. Linking ties a specific wireless access module to a
selected PIM400 and assigns a unique address. There are over
65,000 unique addresses available per channel, providing
nearly a million combinations for virtually unlimited scalability.
Communication Range
Visual/Audible
Communications
5 LEDs for Status Indicators
Assured Communications
A Packet-Error-Rate-Test (PERT) is performed during linking
at reduced power levels to ensure reliable communication
during operation.
System Interface
RS-485
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Dimensions (HWD)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0” (18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.56 kg)
Encoded Transmissions
Each RF transmission is encrypted with AES-128 bit keys to
provide virtually uncompromisable security.
Tamper
The PIM400 cover is monitored by a tamper switch.
Visual Indications
• Power on
• Microprocessor running
• Linking status
• PIM receiving RF data
• PIM transmitting RF data
• PIM receiving RS-485 data
• PIM transmitting RS-485 data
• PIM firmware version
• PIM tamper status
Access Point Status Available Through RS-485 Connection
• Card and Keypad Data
• Door position
• Loss of RF communication
• Request-to-Exit
• Request-to-Enter
• Low battery
• PIM tamper
• Mechanical Key override
• Deadbolt position
• Interior Cover tamper guard
• Lock/Unlock status
• Interior push button
Configurable Items from PIM400-485
• Wake up On Radio (WOR)
• Heartbeat frequency
• Relock parameters
• Card data format conversion
• Extended unlock
• Fail Safe/Fail Secure/Fail As-Is
• Door held pre-alarm
• Cache memory parameters
• Dynamic channel switching (DCS)
• Reader Configuration
• Keypad Configuration
• Inside pushbutton configuration
• User interface configuration
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Up to 4000 ft (1219 m) line of site with high
gain antennas on PIM400 and WRI400
DC Power Input: 18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden
8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (305 m)
Cable Specifications
PIM400-485 to ACP: 24AWG, 2 or 4 Conductor
Shielded (Belden 9842, 9841 or equivalent) up
to 4000 ft (1219 m)
Data Rate
RF: 40 kbps; RS-485: 9.6 kbps
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC Part 15;
Canada RSS 210, RoHS
*Dependant on latency time of access control panel.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PIM400-485 – Panel Interface Module with outdoor enclosure standard.
Supports up to 16 access points via RS-485 with select brands of access
control panels.
Optional Accessories
• ANT400-REM-I/O – Omni-directional remote indoor/ outdoor
antenna module. Requires available Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5) for
outdoor installations
• ANT400-REM-I/O+6DB – Directional, flat panel, remote indoor/
outdoor antenna with 6db of gain. Requires available Grounding Kit
(MGB+MCA5) for outdoor installations
• MGB+MCA5 – Grounding Kit for outdoor installations
• ANT400-REM-Ceiling – Omni-directional ceiling mount indoor
remote antenna
• ANT400-REM-Hall – Bi-directional indoor hall application remote
antenna
• HHD KIT – Handheld Device with SUS installed and HH-USB cable
• 593PI-12DC – 12 VDC power supply
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004447 06/12
Panel Interface Module
Wiegand or Clock & Data
Communication
Overview
The PIM400-TD2 seamlessly integrates to virtually any access
control panel and their reader interface modules via Wiegand or
Clock & Data protocols. Each PIM400-TD2 supports up to two
wireless access devices such as AD-400/401 series locks.
Reliability
Reliable communications result from several technological
advances and incorporated features. 900 MHz spread spectrum
technology enables high transmission power in a license-free
band. Error detection algorithm maintains data integrity on
each transmission and redundant transmissions ensure
communication success. Periodic “heartbeat” signals provide
supervision and assure reliable RF communications are
maintained. Lastly, Dynamic Channel Switching (DCS) can be
enabled to overcome harsh RF environments by automatically
changing channels to avoid potential interference.
Security
Used extensively by government and military organizations,
spread spectrum technology provides significant security
advantages over conventional transmission methods. Wireless
access devices utilize spread spectrum transmissions, which
are encrypted with AES-128 bit keys, to yield a system that is
virtually uncompromisable. In addition, scalability is virtually
unlimited as each AD-Series wireless access module has nearly
a million addresses to choose from during the linking process.
Centralized Lock/Unlock Command in 10 Seconds or Less
Patent-pending Wake-up On Radio (WOR) feature drives
communication from the PIM400 to any or all linked wireless
devices in 10 seconds or less. This innovative feature works
efficiently in parallel with periodic “heartbeat” to maintain up
to 2 year battery life on wireless devices such as the AD-400/401
locks. Response rate can be field configured down to 1 second
with consideration of battery life. When Wake-up On Radio is
used in critical applications Dynamic Channel Switching should
also be enabled.
Features and Benefits
• 900 MHz spread spectrum RF technology for long
range, reliable communications
• Supports up to two AD-Series wireless devices
• Automatic linking to remote wireless access points with
10 channel frequencies to select from enables easy
commissioning
• AES-128 bit encrypted spread spectrum transmissions
• 13 visual indicators to quickly verify operation and
troubleshoot
• Flash memory for easy software upgrades
• Certifications:
-- NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC Part 15;
RoHS
PIM400-TD2 Panel Interface Module
Networked Locking Solutions
PIM400-TD2
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Reliable Communications
PIM400-TD2 Specifications
900 MHz band enables longer transmission ranges. In general,
signal propagation with longer wavelengths travel a greater distance
and penetrate through, and around objects better than signals with
shorter wavelengths.
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence,
10 channels
RF Interference Avoidance
Optional Dynamic Channel Switching
Transmission/Encryption
AES-128 bit Key (optional)
Credential Verification Time
< 1 second*
Online Communications (Heartbeat)
Regular communications between the AD-Series wireless access
module and PIM400 monitor transmission presence and integrity.
Online communications enable the PIM400 to download information
or instructions such as unlock and relock.
Auto Addressing (Linking)
One of the final steps in the installation process is called “linking”.
Linking ties a specific wireless access module to a selected PIM400
and assigns a unique address. There are over 65,000 unique addresses
available per channel, providing nearly a million combinations for
virtually unlimited scalability.
Up to 200 ft (61 m) with obstructions
Up to 1000 ft (305 m) clear line of site
Communication Range
Up to 4000 ft (1219 m) line of site with high
gain antennas on PIM400 and WRI400
Assured Communications
A Packet-Error-Rate-Test (PERT) is performed during linking at reduced
power levels to ensure reliable communication during operation.
Encoded Transmissions
Each RF transmission is encrypted with AES-128 bit keys to provide
virtually uncompromisable security.
Up to 2000 ft (609 m) line of site with high
gain antenna on PIM400
Visual/Audible
Communications
13 LEDs for Status Indicators
System Interface
Wiegand (data1/data0) or Magnetic Stripe
(Clock & Data)
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC
The PIM400 cover is monitored by a tamper switch.
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
Visual LED Indications
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Dimensions (HWD)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0”
(18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.56 kg)
Tamper
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power on
Microprocessor running
Linking status to WAPM
PIM transmitting RF data
PIM receiving RF data
PIM receiving data
PIM transmitting data
Door Position
PIM tamper status
PIM firmware version
Wiegand and Clock & Data Status 1 & 2
Door Status 1 & 2
Trouble 1 & 2
Standard Open Collector Contacts
•
•
•
•
•
Configurable for Normally Open or Normally Closed
Door Position
Request-to-Exit
Request-to-Enter
Trouble
DC Power Input: 18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden
8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (303 m)
Cable Specifications
PIM400-TD2 to ACP: 22AWG, 8 Conductor
Shielded (Alpha 1298C or equivalent) up to 500
ft (152 m)
Data Rate
RF: 40 kbps
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC Part 15; RoHS
*Dependant on latency time of access control panel.
Optional Relay Board (RLBD) to achieve Dry Contact
•
•
•
•
•
Configurable for Normally Open or Normally Closed
Door Position
Request-to-Exit
Request-to- Enter
Trouble
Access Point Status Available Through PIM400-TD2
•
•
•
•
•
Wiegand or Magnetic Stripe Card Data
Door Position
Request-to-Exit
Request-to-Enter (optional)
Trouble
- loss of RF communication
- low battery
- PIM tamper
- reader tamper
Configurable Items from PIM400-TD2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wake up On Radio (WOR)
Heartbeat frequency
Relock parameters
Card data format conversion
Extended unlock
Fail Safe/Fail Secure/Fail As-Is
Door held pre-alarm
Cache memory parameters
Dynamic channel switching (DCS)
Reader Configuration
Keypad Configuration
User interface configuration
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
PIM400-TD2 – Panel Interface Module with outdoor enclosure standard.
Supports up to two access points via Wiegand or Clock & Data with virtually
any access control panel.
Optional Accessories
• ANT400-REM-I/O – Omni-directional remote indoor/ outdoor antenna
module. Requires available Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5) for outdoor
installations
• ANT400-REM-I/O+6DB – Directional, flat panel, remote indoor/outdoor
antenna with 6db of gain. Requires available Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5)
for outdoor installations
• MGB+MCA5 – Grounding Kit for outdoor installations
• ANT400-REM-Ceiling – Omni-directional ceiling mount indoor remote
antenna
• ANT400-REM-Hall – Bi-directional indoor hall application remote antenna
• HHD KIT – Handheld Device with SUS installed and HH-USB cable
• 593PI-12DC – 12 VDC power supply
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004441
06/12
AD-Series Wireless Test Kit
Overview
The Schlage AD-Series TK400 wireless test kit can help you
evaluate system design on new AD-400 wireless networked
systems prior to installation. The TK400 can also be used to
diagnose communication strength on existing AD-400 wireless
applications. AD-400 locks and devices including the Wireless
Reader Interface (WRI400), Wireless Portable Reader (WPR400)
and Wireless Status Monitor (WSM400) communicate via 900
MHz frequency to the Panel Interface Module (PIM400); the
PIM400 is required for communication between the AD-400
devices and the access control panel.
The TK400 wireless test kit contains a wireless portable signal
tester (WPR400-DT), a panel interface module (PIM400-TD2),
a PIM400 power supply, rechargeable batteries, charger and
a convenient carrying case. The WPR400-DT operates on
rechargeable batteries making it economical and easy to use
on job sites.
The wireless portable signal tester (WPR400-DT) is used to
communicate to the PIM400 as an access control module.
LED lights provide intuitive feedback about the quality of the
signal.
The communication range of the AD-400 to the PIM400 is up
to 200 ft with normal building construction and up to 1000
ft with clear line of site. The TK400 can be used to determine
the proper location of each panel interface module to optimize
system design. When installed properly, an AD-400 wireless
solution is an extremely reliable and cost effective alternative to
a hard-wired networked system.
Features and Benefits
• Allows you to test the range of 900 MHz signals
between AD-400 devices and PIM400 to ensure proper
location prior to installation of complete system.
• Can be used to test existing installations for signal
strength
• LED light feedback for signal strength communication;
green for strong connection, red for weak connection
• Kit Comes Complete with:
-- Wireless Portable Signal Tester (WPR400-DT)
-- Panel Interface Module (PIM400-TD2)
-- Power Supply for PIM400-TD2
-- Rechargeable Batteries
-- Battery Charger
-- Carrying Case
• WPR400-DT Certifications: FCC Part 15,
Canada RSS 210, RoHS
• PIM400-TD2 Certifications: NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6;
UL 294, FCC Part 15, Canada RSS 210. RoHS
TK400 Wireless Test Kit
Networked Locking Solutions
TK400
Wireless Portable Signal Tester
PIM400-TD2
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum,
direct sequence, 10 channels
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum,
direct sequence, 10 channels
Communication
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions
(normal building); up to
1000 ft clear line of site
Communication
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions (normal
building); up to 1000 ft clear line of site
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature
0°C (32°F) to 49°C (120°F)
Humidity
0% to 100% condensing
Humidity
0% to 100% condensing
Power Supply
Battery Type
Removable, NiMH
12 VDC or 24VDC (12 VDC power supply
included)
Battery Recharge Time
4-6 hours
Dimensions (HWD)
Dimensions (HWD)
2.375” x 5.0” x 6.25”
(6.03 cm x 12.7 cm 15.88 cm)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0”
(18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.56 kg)
Weight
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Certifications
Certifications
• FCC Part 15
• Canada RSS 210
• RoHS
• NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6
• UL 294
• FCC Part 15
• Canada RSS 210
• RoHS
Visual LED Indications
• Wireless Signal Quality
• Low Battery
• Battery Charge Complete
Visual LED Indications
• Power On
• Linking Status to AD-400 Devices
• PIM Transmitting/Receiving RF Data
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004094
02/12
AD-Series Wireless
Portable Reader
Overview
The Schlage AD-Series Wireless Portable Reader (WPR400)
was designed to extend a facility’s access control to remote
locations, at a moment’s notice.
The WPR400 is a portable device that utilizes the same
credential reader module as an AD-Series electronic lock. The
WPR400 can be held by hand or placed in a convenient
temporary location to allow for credential verification. Whether
it is at a temporary check point or bus load registration, the
WPR400 will provide simple, intuitive feedback to the user if
the credential being presented is valid or invalid via real time
connectivity to the access control system.
The WPR400, as well as other AD-400 locks and devices,
communicate via 900 MHz frequency to the Panel Interface
Module (PIM400); the PIM400 is required for communication
between the AD-400 devices and the access control panel .
The WPR400 was designed to be intuitive to use and easy
to set-up, which is critical in situations where there is a need
for remote credential verification. At power-on and within
range, the WPR400 is ready to accept its first credential within
moments of powering up and reconnecting to the previously
paired PIM400. After the credential has been authenticated by
the access control system, the WPR400 provides intuitive LED
light feedback.
The WPR400 also has the ability to be configured to Cache
Mode. When enabled, the WPR400 keeps a local database of
valid access grants. Upon moving the WPR400 to an offline
location away from the PIM400, credentials can be verified for
the last 1,000 valid users.
Finally, the WPR400 can be manually configured to operate
as a wireless portable tester. In Wireless Test Mode, the device
can be used to evaluate the location of PIM400s and AD-400
devices within a specific environment, or the existing reader
module can remain installed on the WPR400.
Features and Benefits
• Fully compatible with Schlage AD-Series Credential
Reader Modules & Panel Interface Modules
• Reader options include multi-technology (reads both
13.56 MHz smart card and 125 kHz proximity, magnetic
stripe and keypad
• WPR401 with FIPS 201-1 compliant multi-technology
reader is available and must be ordered as a complete
unit
• Card reader options available with keypad for
multi-factor authentication
• Rechargeable battery and charger (included)
• Cache Mode option for offline applications
• Field configurable to work as a Wireless Portable
Signal Tester
• Configured with Schlage Hand Held Device (HHD)
• LED indicators communicate valid (green) and
invalid (red) credential status
• Communicates to access control system via PIM400
• FCC Part 15, Canada RSS 210, RoHS
WPR400 Wireless Portable Reader
Networked Locking Solutions
WPR400
Reliability
Included with WPR400
• AD-Series Credential Reader Module
Specified at Ordering
• WPR400/TK400 Battery Charger
Secure and reliable wireless communication with the
Panel Interface Module (PIM400) is accomplished using
900 MHz frequency. 900 MHz band enables longer
transmission ranges because signal propagation with
longer wavelengths travels a greater distance and better
penetrates typical building construction – allowing for
simplified system design.
Modes of Operation
• Reader Mode (default)
• Wireless Test Mode (field configurable)
Panel Interface Module (PIM400)
The PIM400 (sold separately) is required for communication
between the WPR400/401 and the access control panel,
and can support up to 16 AD-400 devices depending on
your access control system.
Wireless Portable Reader Specifications
Modulation / Encryption
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence, 10 channels, AES-128 bit Key
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Credential Verification Time*
< 1 second*
Communication Range
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions (normal building); up to 1000 ft clear line of site
RF Interference Avoidance
Configurable Dynamic Channel Switching
Data Rate
40 kbps
Operating Temperature
0ºC (32ºF) to 49ºC (120ºF)
Humidity
0% to 100% condensing
Battery Type
Rechargeable, Removable, NiMH
Battery Life (fully charged)
100,000 card reads or PIN codes
Battery Recharge Time
4-6 hours
Dimensions – (HWD, less reader)
3.375” x 5.0” x 6.25” (8.57 cm x 12.7 cm 15.88 cm)
Weight – (less reader)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Certifications
FCC Part 15, Canada RSS 210, RoHS
Additional Accessories
Panel Interface Module (PIM400), Handheld Device (HHD)
*WPR requires less than 100 msec, response time does not include latency time of ACP.
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Smart Card
+ KEYPAD
FIPS 201-1
Compliant MultiTechnology
• Proximity
• Smart Card
Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Smart Card
Magnetic Stripe
Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
Keypad
+ KEYPAD
Dummy Trim Reader Module also available. Please see AD-Series Data
sheets for more details on credential reader modules.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004096
06/12
Wireless Reader Interface
Overview
The WRI400 is a networked access point controller designed
to provide wireless connectivity to traditional electronic access
control components including credential readers, door position
and request to exit switches.
The WRI400 wireless reader interface provides local termination
points for your wall or mullion mounted reader, door position
switch, request to exit (RX) and reader tamper. The WRI400
communicates data via 900 MHz back to either a PIM400-485
or PIM400-TD2 which are hardwired to the Access Control
Panel (ACP) where all access and specific reporting decisions
are made and recorded.
The WRI400 is designed to be compatible with most of the
popular Wiegand or Clock and Data format readers that exist
in the market today. Utilizing the two Form C relays on board
expands the capability at the door to control electronic locking
hardware as well as other devices such as automatic operators.
The WRI400 allows you to extend the reach of your access
control system to openings that are hard to reach with network
wiring. Ideal applications include remote doors, historic
buildings, gates and elevators. Since the WRI400 is built on an
open architecture platform it is designed for seamless integration
with most access control systems.
Features and Benefits
Visual LED Indications
• WRI400 cover is monitored by a tamper switch
Encryption
• Each RF transmission is encrypted with
AES-128 bit keys
Reader Interfaces Support
• Wiegand (data1/data0) up to 255bits
• Magnetic Stripe (clock & data) up to 255bits
Form C Relay Outputs
• Strike Relay
• Auxiliary Output Relay
Signal Inputs
• Request-to-Enter
• Request-to-Exit
• Door Position Switch
• Reader Tamper 1
• Reader Tamper 2
Certification:
• NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC
Part 15; Canada RSS 210, RoHS
WRI400 Wireless Reader Interface
Networked Locking Solutions
WRI400
WRI400 Specifications
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence, 10 channels
RF Interference Avoidance
Optional Dynamic Channel Switching
Transmission/encryption
AES-128 bit Key
Data rate
RF: 40 kbps
Credential Verification time
< 1 second*
Communication range
Up to 200 ft (61 m) with obstructions; Up to 1000 ft (305 m) clear line of site (See
ANT400-REM data sheet for increasing distance)
Power Supply Requirements
12 VDC or 24 VDC; 500 mA maximum current
DC Power Input
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (305 m)
Data Signals: 22AWG, 6 Conductor (Alpha 1296C or equivalent) up to 500 feet (152
meters)
Credential Readers (x2)
Connector Cable
Specifications
Relay Output
Tolerances
Reader Tamper Signals: 18AWG, Twisted Pair Shielded (Beldon 8760 or equivalent) up to
up to 500 feet (152 meters)
Strike/Aux Relay Outputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Request-to-Enter & -Exit Inputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Strike Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps at 24 VDC or 6 Amps at
120 VAC or 3 Amps at 240 VAC
Auxiliary Output Relay
Form C Relay; 2 Amps at 24 VDC or 0.5 Amps at 120 VAC
Operating Temperature
-31ºF (-35ºC) to 151ºF (66ºC)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Dimensions (HWD)
10.43" x 7.28" x 3.79" (26.49 cm x 18.49 cm x 9.63 cm)
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC Part 15; Canada RSS 210, RoHS
Remote Door Application
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
For hard to reach openings, the WRI400 can extend your
access control system saving you time and money by reducing
wiring to the door from the panel.
Reliable Communications
900 MHz band enables longer transmission ranges. In general, signal
propagation with longer wavelengths travel a greater distance and
penetrate through, and around objects better than signals with
shorter wavelengths.
PS902
Power
Supply
PS914
Power
Supply
WRI400
Up to
200 ft at
900 MHz
PIM400-TD2
or
PIM400-485
To Access
Control
Panel
Online Communications (Heartbeat)
Regular communications between the WRI400 and PIM400 monitor
transmission presence and integrity. Online communications enable
the WRI400 to download information or instructions such as unlock
and relock.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
DPS
DPS
EPT
EPT
EL RX Exit Device
EL RX Exit Device
Card
Reader
• ANT400-REM-I/O – Omni-directional remote indoor/ outdoor antenna
module. Requires available Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5) for outdoor
installations
• ANT400-REM-I/O+6DB – Directional, flat panel, remote indoor/outdoor
antenna with 6db of gain. Requires available Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5)
for outdoor installations
• MGB+MCA5 – Grounding Kit for outdoor installations
• ANT400-REM-Ceiling – Omni-directional ceiling mount indoor remote
antenna
• ANT400-REM-Hall – Bi-directional indoor hall application
remote antenna
• HHD KIT – Handheld Device with SUS installed and HH-USB cable
• 593PI-12DC – 12 VDC power supply
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 004014 02/12
Wireless Gate Control Kits
and Elevator Control Kits
Overview
The gate control kit (GCK400) and the elevator control kit
(ECK400) complement and expand the AD-Series platform by
bringing wireless access control to applications that are difficult
to reach with a traditional wired approach.
The GCK400 and the ECK400 are kits comprised of the wireless
reader interface (WRI400), the panel interface module
(PIM400-TD2) a remote antenna (ANT-REM I/O) and a power
supply (593PI-12DC). The GCK400 kit also includes an antenna
grounding kit (MGB+MCA5).
The wireless reader interface (WRI400) is compatible with most
popular Wiegand or Clock & Data format credential readers on
the market today. The WRI400 communicates via 900MHz to
the PIM400-TD2 within a range of up to 1000 feet with a clear
line of site. The PIM400-TD2 is hardwired to the access control
panel where decisions are validated and recorded.
The GCK400 kit eliminates the need for trenching in gate
applications, driving a significant reduction of installation time
and cost. The gate kit is ideal for parking lots, airports, military
bases and garages. Roadways, parking lots and landscape are
left intact since the need to run wires underground is eliminated.
The ECK400 eliminates the need for traveling cables to elevators
applications simplifying installation. Access control can be
applied to elevators at a much faster rate, reducing downtime
and disruption within the facility.
Features and Benefits
• Real time access control
• Reduced installation time
• Eliminates trenching to gates
• Eliminates traveling cables in elevators
• 2 reader inputs
• Supports all Wiegand (data1/data0) and magnetic
stripe (clock/data) reader technologies
Wireless Gate & Elevator Control Kits
Networked Locking Solutions
GCK400 & ECK400
GCK400 Contents
PIM400 - TD2 Specification
Qty
Description
Frequescy Range
902 - 928 MHz
1
ANT400-REM-I/O
Transmission / Encryption
AES - 128 Bit (optional)
1
WRI400
Up to 200ft (61m) with obstructions
1
PIM400-TD2
Up to 1000ft (305m) clear line of site
1
593PI-12
1
MGB-MCA5
Communication Range
Up to 2000ft (609m) line of site with high
gain antenna on PIM400
Up to 4000ft (1219m) line of site with high
gain antennas on PIM400 and WRI400
Dimensions (HWD)
ECK400 Contents
Qty
Description
1
ANT400-REM-I/O
1
WRI400
1
1
7.1" X 7.1" X 3.0"
(18.0 cm X 18.0 cm X 7.6 cm)
WRI400 Specification
Frequency Range
902 - 928 MHz
PIM400-TD2
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct
sequence, 10 channels
593Pl-12
RF Interference Avoidance
Optional Dynamic Channel Switching
Data Rate
RF: 40 kbps
Power Supply Requirements
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Dimensions (HWD)
10.43" X 7.28" X 3.79"
(26.49cm X 18.49cm X 9.63cm)
Operating Temperatures
- 31°F (-35°C) to 151°F (66°C)
Strike Output Relay
Form C Relay: 6 Amps at 24 VDC or
6 Amps at 120 VAC or 3 Amps at 240 VAC
Auxillary Output Relay
Form C Relay: 2 Amps at 24 VDC or
0.5 Amps at 120 VAC
Dimensions (Overall):
8.7in x 6.94in x 4.5in
(220mm x 176mm x 140mm)
Weight
4.2 oz. (120 grams)
ORDERING INFORMATION
GCK400
Wireless Gate Control Kit
ECK400
Wireless Elevator Control Kit
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
ANT400 Hall - Bi-directional indoor antenna ceiling mount
ANT400 –REM – I/O + 6 DB - Directional, flat panel remote
indoor/outdoor antenna with 6 DB gain.
MGB + MCA5 - Antenna Grounding Kit for Outdoor Applications
ANT400 – REM-I/O - Omni directional, Flat Panel, Remote
Indoor/Outdoor Antenna with Adjustable Mount
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved
distributors
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004013
03/12
AD-Series Remote Antennas
for Wireless System
Overview
The Schlage ANT400-REM optional remote antennas are
designed for use with the AD-400 Series devices. They increase
installation flexibility of wireless products, extend the range of
wireless communication in certain directions and expand the
range of applications of AD-Series solution.
A remote antenna is used to improve signal communication
strength for wireless communications through an obstruction.
A typical application would be when a remote device down a
hallway requires a few extra feet of signal strength to reach the
PIM400 which is sometimes located around a corner or behind
a wire mesh or thick brick construction material.
When increased wireless communication range is required, the
ANT400-REM-I/O+6dB model can up to double the range in
the line of sight that it is aimed. This “gain antenna” increases
the signal strength by focusing the energy a single direction
instead of broadcasting in all directions.
AD-Series Remote Antennas are important components to
environments with limited installation flexibility. The connected
PIM400 can be up to 15ft away from the remote antenna
via the included coaxial cable. The outdoor rated antennas
create new applications that allow a PIM400 to communicate to
external remote access points such as gates or remote buildings
without the need to trench cables.
Note: Images not to scale
Features and Benefits
• Use with PIM400, WRI400 and WSM400
• Increase installation flexibility
• Optimize installation location
• Extend communication range with
high-gain antenna
• Directional, bi-directional or omni-directional
• Indoor and Outdoor options
Included In:
• ECK400 Wireless Elevator Kit
• GCK400 Wireless Gate Control Kit
ANT-400 Remote Antennas for Wireless
Networked Locking Solutions
ANT400-REM
Remote Antenna Models
Model
ANT400-REM-I/O
ANT400-REM-I/O+6dB
ANT400-REM-CEILING
ANT400-REM-HALL
Description
Type
Omni-directional, unity gain
Communication
Range Extension
15ft due to cable length
Intended Use: An omni-directional flat-panel antenna for
use with indoor or outdoor applications. To be mounted
vertically on a wall or post.
Location
Indoor/Outdoor
Included: antenna, 15ft coax cable, coax whip, articulated
wall/post mounting bracket.
Dimensions (HxWxD):
9.1” x 8.4” x 1.2”
Weight:
0.5kg
Temperature Range:
-40º C to +65ºC(-40ºF to +150ºF)
Type
Directional, high gain
Range Extension
Up to x2 the original range without
antenna (single direction), plus 15ft
due to cable length
Location
Indoor/Outdoor
Dimensions (HxWxD):
9.1” x 8.4” x 1.2”
Weight:
0.5kg
Temperature Range:
-40º C to +65ºC(-40ºF to +150ºF)
Type
Omni-directional, unity gain
Communication
Range Extension
15ft due to cable length
Location
Indoor
Intended Use: An omni-directional antenna for use with
indoor applications. To be mounted horizontally on ceiling.
Dimensions (HxWxD):
3.5”(height) x 8.1”(diameter)
Included: antenna, 15ft coax cable, and coax whip.
Weight:
0.22kg
Temperature Range:
-40º C to +65ºC(-40ºF to +150ºF)
Type
Bi-directional, unity gain
Communication
Range Extension
15ft due to cable length
Location
Indoor
Intended Use: An bi-directional antenna for use with
indoor applications. To be mounted on wall or ceiling.
Dimensions (HxWxD):
7.2” x 3.9” x 4.9”
Included: antenna, 15ft coax cable, and coax whip.
Weight:
0.24kg
Temperature Range:
-10º C to + 65ºC (14º F to + 150º F)
ACCESSORIES
Requires Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5) for outdoor
installations.
Intended Use: A high gain, directional flat-panel antenna
for use with indoor or outdoor applications. To be mounted
vertically on a wall or post.
Included: antenna, 15ft coax cable, coax whip, articulated
wall/post mounting bracket.
Requires Grounding Kit (MGB+MCA5) for outdoor
installations.
CERTIFICATION
MGB+MCA5 Grounding Kit
• The National Electrical Code (NEC) requires that any
outdoor antenna be properly grounded.
• The Schlage remote antenna grounding kit is compatible
with all models of remote antenna.
• FCC Part 15
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84
approved distributors
ANT400-REM-IO
ANT400-REM-IO+6db
ANT400-REM-CEILING
ANT400-REM-HALL
Note: These are the only remote antennas that have been approved by FCC for use with
Ingersoll Rand AD-Series 900MHz Communication Modules. Any other antenna with an
Ingersoll Rand AD-Series 900MHz Communication Modules would be in violation of FCC
regulation.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004095
03/12
AD-Series Dry Contact
Relay Board
Overview
The Schlage AD-Series Relay Board (RLBD) supports the open
architecture of AD-Series by building a bridge between Schlage
technology and third party access control systems that use
mechanical, relay-based communication.
The RLBD relay board is used to extend the existing access
point status signals on PIM400-TD2 (for AD-400 applications)
or PIB300-2D (for AD-300 applications) devices for each access
point controlled by the Interface Module.
The optional RLBD relay board removes the need for custom
wired relays which can be cumbersome to source, complicated
to install, and difficult to troubleshoot. The use of this board
over custom wired solutions increases system reliability and
reduces installation labor.
The RLBD is not required for integration with Schlage bright
blue® or other access control systems that use signal based
communication such as RS485 & Wiegand.
Note: The RLBD does not use mechanical relays which may
have different electrical tolerances. Please consider RLBD
electrical specifications when implementing this device with
another system.
Features and Benefits
• Use with PIM400-TD2 or PIB300-2D
• Red LED light indicates power status
• Longer cycle lifetime than traditional mechanical-based
relay solutions
Access Point Status Signals
• Request-to-Enter
• Request-to-Exit
• Door Position/Status
• Tamper Switch
RLBD Dry Contact Relay Board
Networked Locking Solutions
RLBD
RLBD Specifications
Voltage Maximum (contact-to-contact)
28V
Input Current Maximum
400mA
“Open” State Resistance
5 mega-ohms
“Closed” State Resistance
2 ohms
Dimensions (HWD)
2.1” x 3.5” x 1.0” (5.33 cm x 8.89cm x 2.54 cm)
Weight
0.125 lb (56.7 g)
Operating Temperature
-31ºF to 151ºF (-35ºC to 66ºC)
Operating Humidity
0-100% condensing
Installation of RLBD in a PIM400-TD2
RLBD Installed in PIM400-TD2
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5963
07/11
Wireless Repeater Kit
Overview
The Schlage REPTR400 Wireless Repeater Kit is a simple, all
in one package solution for access control applications that
require an extended wireless range. The Schlage REPTR400
includes an AD-Series Panel Interface Module (PIM400-TD2)
and an AD-Series Wireless Reader Interface (WRI400). The
PIM400-TD2 interfaces with most access control systems. The
WRI400 gathers signals from around the door components and
wirelessly transmits them back to the PIM400-TD2.
The REPTR400 extends the wireless range by receiving
information on one radio frequency (RF) channel and
retransmits it on another RF channel. Each REPTR400 can
extend the wireless range of your access control system by
up to 200 feet indoors or up to 1000 feet, line of site.
Use of the REPTR400 allows you to extend the reach of your
access control system to remote locations without running
wires, thus saving you time and money on installation.
For example, the REPTR400 can be used for gate applications.
The PIM400 is located inside of a building up to 500 feet from
the access control panel. A remote antenna (sold separately) can
be wired into the PIM400 and installed on the exterior of the
building. The REPTR400 can be installed at the gate up to 1000
feet away with a clear line of site, connecting the card reader
and locking hardware to the WRI400. This solution eliminates
the need for considerable trenching and the installation of an
access control panel at the gate location, while giving the access
control system real-time information at the remote gate.
Features and Benefits
• Convenient kit includes the WRI400 & PIM400-TD2
• Extends the reach of your access control system to
remote locations without running wires
WRI400
• 2 form C relay outputs –strike & auxiliary
• Each RF transmission is encrypted with AES-128 bit
keys
• Reader Interfaces Support– Wiegand (data1/data0) up
to 255bits & Magnetic Stripe (clock & data) up to
255bits
• UL 294 certified
PIM400-TD2
• 900 MHz spread spectrum RF technology for
long range, reliable communications
• Supports up to two AD-Series wireless devices
• Automatic linking to remote wireless access
points with 10 channel frequencies to select
from enables easy commissioning
• AES-128 bit encrypted spread spectrum
transmissions
• UL 294 certified
REPTR400 Wireless Repeater
Networked Locking Solutions
REPTR400
PIM400-TD2 Specifications
REPTR400
Access
Control
Panel
Wireless up to 200’
(normal building construction),
up to 1000’ line of sight
Hardwired
PIM400
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct
sequence,
10 channels
Communication
Up to 200 ft w/ obstructions (normal
building); up to 1000 ft clear line of site
Operating Temperature
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24VDC (12 VDC power supply
included)
Dimensions (HWD)
7.1” x 7.1” x 3.0”
(18.0 cm x 18.0 cm x 7.6 cm)
Weight
1.25 lb (.56 kg)
Certifications
• NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6
• UL 294
• FCC Part 15
• Canada RSS 210
• RoHS
WRI400
Hardwired
12V
Power
supply
PIM400-TD2
Power
supply
Wireless up to
200’ (normal building
construction), up
to 1000’ line
of sight
WRI400
Ceiling Line
DPS
Card
Reader
Finish Floor
Note: There are many other applications that use different wireless access
points; this is one example of how a REPTR400 can be used.
WRI400 Specifications
Frequency Range
902-928 MHz
Modulation
900 MHz spread spectrum, direct sequence, 10 channels
RF Interference Avoidance
Optional Dynamic Channel Switching
Transmission/encryption
AES-128 bit Key (optional)
Data rate
RF: 40 kbps
Credential Verification time
< 1 second*
Communication range
Up to 200 ft (61 m) with obstructions
Up to 1000 ft (305 m) clear line of site (See ANT400-REM data sheet for increasing distance)
Power Supply Requirements
12 VDC or 24 VDC; 500 mA maximum current
DC Power Input
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (305 m)
Data Signals: 22AWG, 6 Conductor (Alpha 1296C or equivalent) up to 500 feet (152 meters)
Connector Cable
Specifications
Relay Output
Tolerances
Credential Readers (x2)
Reader Tamper Signals: 18AWG, Twisted Pair Shielded (Beldon 8760 or equivalent) up to up
to 500 feet (152 meters)
Strike/Aux Relay Outputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Request-to-Enter & -Exit Inputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Strike Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps at 24 VDC or 6 Amps at
120 VAC or 3 Amps at 240 VAC
Auxiliary Output Relay
Form C Relay; 2 Amps at 24 VDC or 0.5 Amps at 120 VAC
Operating Temperature
-31ºF (-35ºC) to 151ºF (66ºC)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Dimensions (HWD)
10.43" x 7.28" x 3.79" (26.49 cm x 18.49 cm x 9.63 cm)
Certifications
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6; UL 294, FCC Part 15; Canada RSS 210, RoHS
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004015
03/12
on the Handheld Device (HHD)
Overview
Schlage Utility Software (SUS) is designed specifically for use
on the Handheld Device (HHD) as the link between your access
control management software and Schlage electronic offline
and networked locks and accessories.
This solution consolidates and simplifies programming and
managing your access control system. The SUS and HHD is
used to initialize, configure and test product operation, and
also provides an easy way to manage people, audits, locks and
other network panel interface devices for simple access control.
The intuitive screen layout for the SUS provides easy
navigation during use.
For offline products the SUS is utilized to transfer access control
data, such as authorized user lists, via the HHD to the locks.
The SUS is also utilized to download audit trail information from
offline devices to the HHD and then transfer that data to the
access control management software.
In addition the SUS can configure other networked electronic
devices (including PIM and PIB) and update firmware revision
updates to the devices as desired.
The HHD connects with Schlage AD-Series electronic locks and
accessories via a USB interface and utilizes Active Synch or Win
Mobile Device Manager to communicate with your PC via the
USB port. The HHD is also able to connect to the SPED, KC2,
CM, CL, CT500, CT1000, CL Controller and WA-Series PIMs via
a serial cable connection.
Features and Benefits
• Handheld Device with Schlage Utility
Software installed
• Touch Screen operation
• Initialize Lock and Accessories with SUS
• Configure and Test Devices
SUS on the Handheld Device
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
Schlage Utility Software (SUS)
FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Schlage Utility Software
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Offline Devices
-- Manage up to 100 unique door files
HHD Compatible Devices and Required Cable and Adaptors
Devices
Cable and Adaptors
AD-Series and CO-Series Locks PIM400,
WRI400, ECK400, GCK400, WPR400,
TK400 and CT5000 controller
HH-USB (included in HHD-Kit)
BE367, KC-2, CM, CL, CT500, CT1000,
CL-Controller
HH-Serial + CIP
WA-Series PIM
HH-Serial + PIMWA-CV
-- Retrieve Audit trails from up to 100 devices
• Networked Devices
-- Communication Settings
-- Validate Status Monitor
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
-- Firmware Upgrades
HHD Specifications
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen with Backlit Keypad
• 32-bit processor
• Operating System: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM / 256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 V, 1,230mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions (HWD): 5.3” X 2.9” X 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface, 2 drops per 6 sides
How-To-Videos
• Specially formatted How-To-Videos for the HHD are
available
• They can be downloaded from www.schlage.com/
support
• If additional storage is needed, a standard mini SD
memory card can be used
• Videos should be saved on the SD card or in a new
folder on the device rather than in the shared sync
folder or root directory
ORDERING INFORMATION
HHD KIT – Handheld Device with SUS installed and HH-USB cable
HH-USB – USB Cable
HH-SERIAL – Serial Cable used to connect HHD to CIP
PIMWA-CV – Converter used to connect HH-SERIAL to
WA-Series PIM
P512112 – CIP, utilized with HH-SERIAL to connect to CM, CL
and KC-2 locks
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004443
03/12
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog covers standalone
locks, controllers and accessories including the AD-Series, CO-Series and
CT5000.
Overview
Two different classifications are offered in the AD-
Standalone access control solutions provide
Series for standalone applications. The AD-200 is
added security, convenience and efficiency
a computer managed system where user access
for openings that do not require real-time
rights are stored in the lock. Modifications to user
monitoring. They allow you to reduce rekeying
access privileges as well as audits are transferred
costs by issuing electronic credentials which can
between the access control software and the lock
easily be added or deleted at any time. Audit
with the handheld programming device (HHD).
trails tell you who requested access and when.
The AD-250 is a computer managed system where
You can also save time and money by setting
user access rights are stored on magnetic stripe
automatic lock and unlock schedules for specific
cards. The AD-250 is often used in campus-like
time zones and holidays.
environments with a large number of users and
Schlage AD-Series and CO-Series are the first
offline openings.
electronic locks to achieve UL 294 certification
The AD-Series offers keypad, magnetic stripe,
which is the standard for safety of access
and multi-technology readers (reads both
control units. Both models feature a robust
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart). All
integrated design which incorporates many of
AD-Series card readers are all available with dual
the components typically found around the
authentication for added security (card + PIN).
door including the lockset, credential reader
and door position switch. They also offer a
choice of chassis, credential reader, lever and
finish options to meet the needs of a variety of
applications and facilities.
The AD-Series:
Features
The AD-Series is a flexible, adaptable and scalable
solution that provides you with an extended
breadth of options as well as a migration path
to future technologies. It is ideal for applications
with more advanced security needs.
Benefits
The AD-Series can be customized to meet the
specific needs of each opening in a facility with
a wide variety of factory orderable and field
configurable options. The innovative modular
design of the AD-Series allows you to upgrade
from standalone to networked if your needs
change in the future. The AD-Series also allows
you to upgrade credential readers, for example,
from magnetic stripe to multi-technology.
Standalone Locking
Standalone Locking
Standalone Locking
Options*
The AD-Series has several options to choose from including:
Class: AD-200, AD-250 (For AD-300 and AD-400 Networked Options, see the Networked Locking
Introduction pages of this catalog)
Chassis: Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise Deadbolt, Exit Trim
Function*: Classroom/Storeroom, Office, Privacy, and Apartment
Readers*: Keypad, magnetic stripe and multi-technology readers (reads both 125 kHz proximity and
13.56 MHz smart). All card readers are available with + PIN option for added security.
Lever Style: Sparta, Rhodes, Athens, Tubular (Tactile warning available)
Finishes: 626 Satin Chrome, 605 Bright Brass, 606 Satin Brass, 612 Satin Bronze, 619 Satin Nickel,
625 Bright Chrome, 643e Aged Bronze, 626AM Satin Chrome with Antimicrobial
*Some options are dependent upon choice class and chassis; see price book for complete details
The CO-Series:
The CO-250 is often used in campus-like
Features
environments with a large number of users and
The CO-Series is a reliable, compatible and
offline openings.
proven solution backed by extensive testing and
The CO-Series offers keypad, magnetic stripe and
certification and the strong mechanical heritage
proximity readers (125 kHz); CO-Series readers
of Schlage. It is ideal for applications that desire a
are all available with dual authentication for
cost effective solution for basic security needs.
added security (card + PIN). The CO-Series is an
Three different classifications are offered in
excellent choice if the needs of the facility are
the CO-Series for standalone applications. The
not expected to change in the future.
CO-100 is a manually programmed keypad only
Benefits
lock which allows up to 500 unique PIN codes
The CO-Series provides the added security and
for user access. The CO-200 can be manually
convenience of electronic access control without
programmed or computer managed in which
the cost or complexity of a networked system. By
case user access rights are stored in the lock.
providing electronic credentials you can minimize
Modifications to user access privileges as well
the number of mechanical keys issued which
as audits are transferred between the access
protects the integrity of key systems. Choose
control software to the lock with a handheld
from basic PIN code access for a small number
programming device (HHD). The CO-250 is a
of users or a card based system to serve a larger
computer managed system where user access
population of users.
rights are stored on magnetic stripe cards.
Class: CO-100, CO-200, CO-250
Chassis: Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise Deadbolt, Exit Trim
Function*: Classroom/Storeroom, Office, and Privacy
Readers*: Keypad, magnetic stripe, proximity (125 kHz); all card readers are available with + PIN option
for added security*.
Lever Style: Sparta, Rhodes, Athens, Tubular (Tactile warning available)
Finishes: 626 Satin Chrome, 605 Bright Brass, 606 Satin Brass, 612 Satin Bronze, 619 Satin Nickel,
625 Bright Chrome, 643e Aged Bronze, 626AM Satin Chrome with Antimicrobial
AD-Series & CO-Series Compatibility
Keyway/Cylinders:
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
Full Size
FSIC
FSIC
key-in-lever 6 pin
key-in-lever 7 pin
6 & 7 pin
6 & 7 pin
Schlage
Falcon
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
Corbin Russwin®
Yale® (includes Medeco 31 *0100 FSIC)
Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options
= less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
= less cylinder only
Exit Trim:
Compatibility
AD-Series
(AD-200 & AD-250)
and CO-Series
Devices
Von Duprin 98/99 and 98/99XP Rim/SVR/CVR†/CVC†)/Mortise
X
Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
X
Falcon 25 Rim
X
Sargent 80 Rim
X
Precision® 21 Rim (2100 converts to 21 with Precision’s BP21 kit)
X
Yale 7000 Rim
X
Corbin Russwin 5000 Rim
X
Dorma® 9300 Rim
X
Options may be limited by your choice of class.
*
†
Metal door only
Standalone Locking
Options*
The CO-Series has several options to choose from including:
Standalone Locking
CO-100
System Info
n/a
Communication to/from Controller
Device Capacity
Number of Users
Number of Audits
n/a
500
n/a
Reader Options
n/a
Keypad Only
Magnetic Stripe Card
125 kHz Proximity Card
Multi-Technology - 125 kHz proximity and
13.56 MHz smart
PIV & PIV-I Card Compatible
Card + PIN
Status Monitors
Request to Exit
Door Position Switch
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Request to Enter
Battery Status
Battery Voltage Level
Communication Status
Remote Lockdown (from host)
Remote Unlock (from host)
Deadbolt Position
Interior Push Button
Chassis Options
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim
Functions
Classroom/Storeroom (70)
Privacy (40)
Office (50)
Apartment (60)
Accessories
HHD - Handheld Programming Device
Yes
No
CO-200
CO-250
AD-200
AD-250
Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider
for Specific Requirements
Standalone: HHD is the link to the Access Control Software
2000*
2000*
Unlimited*
5000*
Unlimited*
4000*
5000*
10000*
Consult with OEM Access Control System Provider
for Credential Format Compatibility
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes*†
Yes
No
Yes**
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
n/a
No
n/a
No
Yes
Yes
Consult with OEM Access Control Provider for Specific Support
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Consult with OEM Access Control Provider for Specific Support
Yes
*Depending on your access control software
**Built in status signals available to enable migration to networked, not monitored in standalone application
†
75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats. Check with access control provider for specific support
• The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Programming Device (HHD) provides an easy way
to retrieve audits and transfer information between your access control software and electronic locks.
• The combo proximity keyfobs with iButton® option is available which allows you to manage proximity
and iButton® technologies in the same facility.
• Decorative plates are available for retrofit applications where the new lock does not completely cover
the existing door prep
The CT5000 Offline Controller:
Features
The CT5000 offline single opening controller is
also available for standalone applications. The
CT5000 can support up to two separate Wiegand
readers as well as interface with peripheral devices
such as automatic operators, electric strikes, and
electromagnetic locks.
Benefits
The CT5000 offline single opening controller is
an ideal solution for narrow stile store front and
exit door applications. The CT5000 can operate in
the same system as the AD-Series and CO-Series
electronic locks. If networked functionality is
required in the future, the CT5000 can be easily
upgraded to a networked WRI400 wireless reader
interface.
Standalone Locking
Accessories:
A variety of accessories are available for use with AD-Series and CO-Series standalone locks including:
Standalone Locking
System Diagrams
Manually Programmable Keypad Only
Computer Programmable User Rights on the
CO-100
Magnetic Stripe Credential
CO-250 / AD-250
SMS Select
(Management Software)
HHD
(Handheld programming device)
CO-100
Offline Electronic Lock
The CO-Series is the ideal solution for
customers seeking the added security and
convenience of electronic access control
without the cost or complexity of a fully
networked system.
The CO-100 is an offline lock that is
manually programmable. User rights for the
CO-100 are stored on the lock. Unique PIN
codes can be assigned to each user. This
minimizes the number of mechanical keys
issued which protects the integrity of your
key system. PIN codes can be easily added
or deleted at anytime right at the door.
The CO-100 from Schlage offers you
many choices. Cylindrical, mortise, and exit
trim chassis options are available as well
as a wide variety of finishes and levers
to suite with your existing hardware.
Mechanical key override is standard and
compatible with multiple cylinder types.
The CO-Series is also compatible with many
popular brands of exit devices.
The CO-Series has been tested the highest
standards in the industry to ensure quality
and reliability you have come to expect
from Schlage. The CO-Series is ANSI/BHMA
A156.25 Grade 1 certified and UL 294 listed.
CO-100
Offline Electronic Lock
The CO-Series is the ideal solution for
customers seeking the added security and
convenience of electronic access control
Images shown are not to scale.
without the cost or complexity of a fully
networked system.
Features
• Manually
Programmable
The CO-100
is an offline lock that is
programmable.
User
rights for the
• Up tomanually
500 unique
3-6 digit PIN
codes
CO-100
stored on the lock. Unique PIN
stored
on theare
lock
codes canA156.25
be assigned
• ANSI/BHMA
Gradeto1each user. This
minimizes
number
certified
and ULthe
294
listed of mechanical keys
issued which protects the integrity of your
• Classroom/Storeroom function and
key
system.available
PIN codes can be easily added
Office
function
or deleted at anytime right at the door.
• Chassis options include cylindrical,
mortise,
exit trim
The and
CO-100
from Schlage offers you
many choices.
Cylindrical,
mortise, and exit
• Compatible
with most
major brands
trim
chassisand
options
are available as well
of key
systems
exit devices
as atoggle,
wide variety
of finishes and levers
• Normal,
pass through,
to suitecredential
with yourattributes
existing hardware.
and freeze
available
Mechanical key override is standard and
compatible with multiple cylinder types.
The CO-Series is also compatible with many
popular brands of exit devices.
The CO-Series has been tested the highest
standards in the industry to ensure quality
and reliability you have come to expect
from Schlage. The CO-Series is ANSI/BHMA
A156.25 Grade 1 certified and UL 294 listed.
Images shown are not to scale.
Features
• Manually Programmable
• Up to 500 unique 3-6 digit PIN codes
stored on the lock
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25 Grade 1
certified and UL 294 listed
• Classroom/Storeroom function and
Office function available
• Chassis options include cylindrical,
mortise, and exit trim
• Compatible with most major brands
of key systems and exit devices
• Normal, toggle, pass through,
and freeze credential attributes
available
CL-ENCODER2
(Encoder)
CO250
Lock
Magnetic Stripe Card
(Stores user rights)
Computer Programmable User Rights on the Lock
CO-200 / AD-200 / CT5000
Handheld Programming Device
Used to configure locks and
transfer audits from locks to
the software.
PS902
Power Supply
Interior Facility Doors
AD-200, CO-200: Integrated offline locks
store time zones access rights and audits.
CT5000 Offline
Controller
Automatic Operator
SXF1550
Proximity Reader
LCN
856 Push Button
Credentials
SMS Express 4.0 or higher
Software running on computer.
Perimeter Facility Door
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005023 06/12
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
AD-200 Standalone
AD-200
Standalone Electronic Lock
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
Factory orderable options include choices of credential readers,
chassis type, locking functions, power options, lever styles and
finishes. It also offers a wide selection of features that can be
configured in the field to customize your openings.
The AD-200 is a simple, economical solution if no access
control system currently exists in facility, or for openings that
don’t require the control of a networked solution. The AD-200
is easily upgradable to a networked lock if requirements change
in the future.
On all AD-Series standalone/offline locks, Schlage has built
in many of the incremental features needed in a networked
system such as request-to-exit and -enter sensors, interior
cover tamper guard, as well as the door position switch. This
way, if the customer chooses to network this opening in the
future, all the components will be there to make the transition
an easy one.
Features and Benefits
• Security that’s more intelligent and convenient than
traditional mechanical locking devices
• Audit trail reports that allow you to track usage and
events
• Update users and access rights at the lock using the
keypad or handheld device
• The ability to upgrade to a networked solution without
removing the lock from the door
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
and exit devices
• Now available with Magnetic Swipe Reader
• AD-Series with multi-technology readers are NFC
compatible
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL
294,UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS
Functions
AD-200 Electronic Lock Specifications

Classroom/Storeroom
Users
Up to 5,000

Office
Audits
Up to 5,000

Privacy
Credential Verification Time
≤ 1 second*

Apartment
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
Handheld Device
Power Supply
4AA, 8AA, 12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Note: Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not available
with Mortise Deadbolt option.
To ensure safety, all functions
always allow for free egress.
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4AA (8AA option available for extended battery life, and recommended for
Operating Temperature - Exterior
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature - Interior
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) (battery)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C, FCC Part 15,
ADA, RoHS
Accessories
Handheld Device (HHD)
smart card and multi-technology options)
Standard Status
Signals
 Lock/Unlock Status
 Mechanical Key Override
 Battery Status
* Verification time is dependent on size of user base
Dimensions
Schlage Utility Software on Handheld Device
The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Device (HHD) provides an easy way
to manage people, audits and locks for simple access control management.
Schlage Utility Software
HHD
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen/Keypad Backlit
• 32-bit processor
• OS: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM/256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 v,
1,230 mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions: 5.3” x 2.9” x 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs. (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface,
2 drops per 6 sides
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
HHD is also compatible with CM, CL, VIP, WA and KC2 Series locks in a serial cable connection.
The HHD connects
with AD-Series and
CO-Series locks and
accessories via the
USB interface
AD-Series
Exit Trim
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
ANSI Standard
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series
4000, Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Door Thickness
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard 1”
throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option*
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝
lip to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths
and ANSI strike box available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x 1-3/16”
lip to center with dust box standard, optional
strikes lip lengths available
Cylinder & Keys
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
The AD-Series Exit Trim
(installed with a universal
mounting plate) is compatible
with the following exit devices:
Von Duprin 98/99 &
98/99XP*
Rim, Surface Vertical Rod,
Mortise. Concealed Vertical
Cable and Consealed Vertical
Rod on metal doors only.
Von Duprin 22/22F*
Rim, Surface Vertical Rod
Falcon 25* - Rim
Sargent® 80 Series - Rim
Precision™ 21 Rim
2100 converts to 21 with
Precision's BP21 kit
Corbin Russwin® 5000
Series - Rim
Yale® 7000 - Rim
Dorma® 9300 - Rim
*Request-to-Exit Switch
*Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
optional for future network
migration.

Multi-Technology Reader Specification
Frequency
125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card
Standards
Standards ISO Standard 15693 and ISO 14443
Maximum Read Range
up to 1.25” on 125 kHz proximity, up to 0.75” on 13.56 MHz smart card
125 kHz compatibility
Schlage Proximity, XceedID™ Proximity, HID® Proximity, GE/CASI ProxLite®,
AWID® Proximity, LenelProx®
13.56 MHz compatibility
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector, XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector, aptiQ™
Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA; PIV and PIV-I**†
13.56 MHz compatibility
(serial number only)
DESFire® CSN, HID iClass® CSN, Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN, MIFARE®,
MIFARE DESFire™ EV1, ST Microelectronics® CSN, Texas Instruments TagIt® Serial Number, Phillips I-Code® CSN 125 kHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
125 kHz Clamshell (SXF7410), 125 kHz ISO Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz ISO
Card w/Magnetic Stripe (SXF7510MS)
13.56 MHz Compatible
Schlage Credentials
13.56 MHz MIFARE Clamshell (SXF9420), 13.56 MHz MIFARE ISO Printable
(SXF9520, SXF9551, SXF9558), 13.56 MHz MIFARE Key Tag (SXF9651),
13.56 MHz MIFARE PVC Patch (SXF9751), aptiQ™ Smart Cards using
MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 (SXF9000 Series)
Certifications/Standards
FCC, UL 294, Listed, ISO Standard 15693, and ISO Standard 14443
Style/Layout
Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix backlit keypad
Benefits of AD-Series
Multi-Technology Readers:
• Reads both proximity (125 kHz)
and smart (13.56 MHz) technologies with single device
• AD-Series multi-technology
readers are NFC compatible
• Allows end user to migrate to
more secure credentials over time
and as budgets permit
Additional Readers
Magnetic Stripe
• Now available with choice of Insertion or Swipe style readers
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• Reader can be cleaned without
removing lock from door
• Option for 12 button, 3x4 matrix
backlit keypad
Keypad
• Backlit keypad
• 12 button, 3x4 matrix
† 75 bit output format default. Configurable to other output formats. Check with access control provider for specific support.
* Smart card functionality dependant on access control software.
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology • Magnetic Stripe
• Proximity
• Proximity
(Insertion)
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Insertion)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors, BAA options available
Series
Class
Chassis
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
Battery
Backset
& Latch
Strike
Door
Thickness
AD-200-CY-70 -MG - SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 4B -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
6 Lever
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
4 Function
70 50
40
60
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
5 Reader
KP MG MGK MS
MSK MT
MTK
DT
Keypad
Magnetic Stripe (Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe (Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Swipe)
Multi-Technology
Multi-Technology + Keypad
Dummy Trim Reader Cover
11 Battery
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
4B
8B
Available with knurled surface
7 Finish
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
8 Lever Cylinder Type
PD Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
9 Keyway Type
C123
12 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
13 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
14 Door Thickness
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
10 Handing
RH
LH
4AA
8AA
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4”
See price book for detail
Right Handed
Left Handed
Field reversible
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Inside PicoTag is a trademark
of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire
EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
STMicroelectronics is a trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. Infineon and my-d are trademarks of Infineon Technologies. AWID is
a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin
is a trademark of Corbin Russwin, Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black
& Decker. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004442
06/12
Standalone Electronic Lock
AD-Series electronic locks from Schlage are designed to be
modular and provide more options to choose from, more
functionality in the lock and more compatibility with existing
systems. Its patent-pending modular design allows the lock
to be customized to fit the needs of an application now, and
can change to meet future needs without removing it from the
door.
Factory orderable options include choices of magnetic stripe
credential readers, chassis type, locking functions, power
options, lever styles and finishes. It also offers a wide selection
of features that can be configured in the field to customize
your openings.
The AD-250 is a unique solution in which the credential, not
the lock, carries access rights on a magnetic stripe card. This
allows dynamic rights management on the card without
reprogramming each lock in the facility. And the lock still
maintains an audit trail of events at the door. This makes it a
smart and economical solution for campus-like environments
with a large number of users and offline openings.
On all AD-Series standalone/offline locks, Schlage has built
in many of the incremental features needed in a networked
system such as request-to-exit and -enter sensors, interior
cover tamper guard, as well as the door position switch. This
way, if the customer chooses to network this opening in the
future, all the components will be there to make the transition
an easy one.
Features and Benefits
• Security that’s more intelligent and convenient than
traditional mechanical locking devices
• Audit trail reports that allow you to track usage
• Update users and access rights using credentials instead
of having to visit each lock
• The ability to upgrade to a networked solution without
removing the lock from the door
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise with deadbolt
and exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of master key systems
and exit devices
• Now available with Magnetic Swipe Reader
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294,
UL10C, FCC Part 15, ADA, RoHS
AD-250 Standalone
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
AD-250
Functions
AD-250 Electronic Lock Specifications
Users
Unlimited, dependant on software
Audits
Up to 10,000
Credential Verification Time
≤ 1 second
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators (field configurable)
System Interface
Handheld Device
Power Supply
4AA, 8AA, 12 VDC or 24 VDC
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 26 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4AA (8AA option available for extended battery life)
Operating Temperature - Exterior
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature - Interior
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) (battery)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL10 C, FCC Part 15,
ADA, RoHS
Accessories
Handheld Device (HHD), Magnetic Stripe Credential Encoder (CL-Encoder 2)
Dimensions

Classroom/Storeroom

Office

Privacy

Apartment
Note: Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not available
with Mortise Deadbolt option.
To ensure safety, all functions
always allow for free egress.
Standard Status
Signals

Lock/Unlock Status

Mechanical Key Override

Battery Status
AD-Series Exit Trim
The AD-Series Exit Trim (installed with a
universal mounting plate) is compatible
with the following exit devices:
Von Duprin 98/99 & 98/99XP*
Rim, Surface Vertical Rod, Mortise.
Concealed Vertical Cable and Concealed
Vertical Rod on metal doors only.
Von Duprin 22/22F*
Rim, Surface Vertical Rod
Falcon 25* - Rim
Sargent® 80 Series - Rim
Precision™ 21 Rim
2100 converts to 21 with Precision's
BP21 kit
Corbin Russwin® 5000
Series - Rim
Yale® 7000 - Rim
Dorma® 9300 - Rim
* Request-to-Exit Switch optional for
future network migration.
Schlage Utility Software on Handheld Device
The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Device (HHD) provides an easy way
to manage people, audits and locks for simple access control management.
Schlage Utility Software
HHD
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen/Keypad Backlit
• 32-bit processor
• OS: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM/256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 v,
1,230 mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions: 5.3” x 2.9” x 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs. (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface,
2 drops per 6 sides
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
HHD is also compatible with CM, CL, VIP, WA and KC2 Series locks via a serial cable connection.
The HHD connects
with AD-Series and
CO-Series locks and
accessories via the
USB interface
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
ANSI Standard
Door Thickness
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000,
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option*
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and
ANSI strike box available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
optional strikes lip lengths available
Cylinder & Keys
Schlage 6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys standard
Additional options available including Standard, SFIC, FSIC and competitor brands
*Classroom/Storeroom and Office options not available with deadbolt.
Reader
Specifications
and Modules
Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
Magnetic Stripe
(Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe
(Insertion)
+ KEYPAD
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• Reader can be cleaned without
removing lock from door
• 12 button, 3x4 matrix
backlit keypad
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• Reader can be cleaned without
removing lock from door
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors, BAA options available
Series
Class
Chassis
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
Battery
Backset
& Latch
Strike
Door
Thickness
AD-250-CY-70 -MG - SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH - 4B -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
7 Finish
11 Battery
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT 626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
4B
8B
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Non-Functioning Dummy
Trim for Exit
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
4 Function
8 Lever Cylinder Type
70 50
40
60
PD Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
9 Keyway Type
5 Reader
MG MGK MS
MSK DT
Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
Magnetic Stripe (Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Insertion)
Magnetic Stripe (Swipe)
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
(Swipe)
Dummy Trim
C123
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
10 Handing
RH
LH
Right Handed
Left Handed
12 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
13 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
14 Door Thickness
Field reversible
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4
6 Lever
SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
4AA
8AA
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
See price book for detail.
Available with knurled surface
Lever styles
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Athens
Rhodes
Tubular
Warm tone finishes
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, Von Duprin and Falcon are trademarks of
Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Sargent is a trademark of
Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin, Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security,
Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004436
06/12
Exit Trim Compatibility
Overview
The AD-Series Electronic Lock is available in 993 Exit Trim for
use on openings that require exit devices for either retrofit or
new construction applications. Offline and networked solutions
are available.
Features and Benefits
The 993 Exit Trim was designed to suite with AD-Series
cylindrical and mortise locksets to ensure that the facility
remains aesthetically consistent.
The AD-Series 993 Exit Trim utilizes universal hardware to simplify
installation of offline trim to a variety of exit devices, including
Rim style from Von Duprin, Falcon, Sargent®, Precision™ Corbin
Russwin®, Dorma®, and Yale®.
Available Exit Trim Styles:
• 993R – Rim, Concealed Vertical Cable or Concealed Vertical Rod
(CVC* and CVR for metal doors only)
• 993S – Surface Vertical Rod
• 993M – Mortise
Compatibility
Devices
AD-200/250
AD-300/301
AD-400/401
Von Duprin 98/99 and
98/99XP Rim/SVR/CVR*/
CVC*/Mortise
X
X
X
Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
X
X
X
Falcon 25 Rim
X
X
X
Sargent® 80 Rim
X
Precision™ 21 Rim (2100
converts to 21 with
Precision’s BP21 kit)
X
Yale® 7000 Rim
X
Corbin Russwin® 5000 Rim
X
Dorma® 9300 Rim
X
The proper low current request to exit switch (RX-LC) is required for AD-300/301
and AD-400/401.
Part Numbers for Request to Exit Switch:
• Von Duprin: 050281
• Falcon: 650359
• Multiple Credential Reader Options
• Offline and Networked Communication Options
• A wide variety of finishes and lever styles
• Power options that include hardwired (12 VDC or 24
VDC) or batteries (4AA or 8AA)
• Compatible with most Standard, FSIC or SFIC keyways
from major brands of master key systems including
Schlage, Sargent®, Corbin®, Medeco® and Yale®
AD-Series Exit Trim
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
AD-Series
DIMENSIONS
Available AD-Series Reader Modules
• Multi-Technology (125 kHz proximity
and 13.56 MHz smart card)
• FIPS 201-1 Compliant Multi-Technology
(125 kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card)
sold complete with AD-301 and AD-401 only
• Magnetic Stripe
• Keypad Only
• All credential readers available + Keypad
*
unlike other AD-Series chassis styles,
upgrading reader modules on the 993 Exit
Trim requires the exterior escutcheon to be
removed from the door
Available Communication Options
Profile View
Exterior View
• AD-400: Networked Wireless Locks
• AD-401: Networked Wireless Locks FIPS 201-1 compliant
• AD-300: Networked Hardwired Locks
• AD-301: Networked Hardwired Locks FIPS 201-1 compliant
• AD-250: Offline, access rights stored
on the magnetic stripe credential
• AD-200: Offline, access rights stored
on the lock
AD-Series - 993 Exit Trim
Interior View
Side View
Side View
Interior View
Side View
Side View
AD-200/250/300*/301*
- all styles
AD-200/250/300*/
301* - RIM/CVR/CVC
or Mortise
AD-200/250/300*/
301* SVR
AD-400/401
all styles
AD-400/401
RIM/CVR/CVC
or Mortise
AD-400/401
SVR
* AD-300/301 includes LED indicator
Note: (2) #7 fasteners with decorative washers located 11.88” below bottom edge of lock
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, Von Duprin and Falcon are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc,
its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company.
Precision is a trademark of Stanley Black & Decker. Yale is a trademark of Tale Security, Inc. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin
Russwin, Inc. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand
004382
06/12
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CO-100 Standalone
CO-100
Standalone Electronic Lock
Images shown are not to scale.
The CO-Series is the ideal solution for customers seeking the
added security and convenience of electronic access control
without the cost or complexity of a fully networked system.
The CO-100 is a standalone lock that is manually programmable.
User rights for the CO-100 are stored on the lock. Unique PIN
codes can be assigned to each user. This minimizes the number
of mechanical keys issued which protects the integrity of your
key system. PIN codes can be easily added or deleted at
anytime right at the door.
The CO-100 from Schlage offers you many choices. Cylindrical,
mortise, and exit trim chassis options are available as well as a
wide variety of finishes and levers to suite with your existing
hardware.
Mechanical key override is standard and compatible with
multiple cylinder types. The CO-Series is also compatible with
many popular brands of exit devices.
The CO-Series has been tested the highest standards in the
industry to ensure quality and reliability you have come to
expect from Schlage. The CO-Series is ANSI/BHMA A156.25,
ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified and UL 294 listed.
Features and Benefits
• Manually Programmable
• Up to 500 unique 3-6 digit PIN codes stored on the
lock
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified
and UL 294 listed
• Classroom/Storeroom function and Office function
available
• Chassis options include cylindrical, mortise, and exit
trim
• Compatible with most major brands of key systems and
exit devices
• Normal, toggle, pass through, and freeze credential
attributes available
Specifications
CO-100 Electronic Lock Specifications
Users
500
Credential Verification Time
(Keypad Only)
≤ 1 second
Functions
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators

Classroom/Storeroom
Power Supply
4 AA batteries (standard off the shelf: included)

Office
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4 AA batteries
Operating Temperature - Exterior
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature - Interior
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) due to battery
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL 10 C,
FCC Part 15, ADA and RoHS
Standard Status
Signals

Dimensions
Exterior of the Lock
Interior of the Lock
Cylindrical
Manually Programmable Options
Credential Type
Function
Programming*
Used to enable programming of the lock. Does not unlock the lock.
Normal Use*
Unlocks the lock momentarily when in a normally secured state.
Toggle*
Changes the state of the lock unless in Freeze state.
Freeze*
Maintains the lock in current state until Freeze PIN is entered again.
Pass-through*
Unlocks a lock momentarily, regardless of state.
*Credentials can be 3-6 digits in length.
Mortise
Battery Status - indicated
by blinking lights
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Handing
ANSI Standard
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Grade 1 strength and operational requirements
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
Door Thickness
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip
to center standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and
ANSI strike box available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x
1-3/16” lip to center with dust box standard,
optional strikes lip lengths available
Compatibility
Exit Device Compatibility
Von Duprin
98/99 and 98/99 XP
Von Duprin
22/22F
Falcon
Corbin Russwin®
Rim
SVR
CVR/CVC
Mortise
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓*
✓
25
5000
Precision™ 21 Rim 2100 converts to
21 with Precision's BP21 kit
✓
Yale®
7000
Dorma®
9300
Sargent®
✓
✓
✓
80
* Metal door only
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
Full Size
FSIC
SFIC
6 & 7pin
6 & 7pin

Corbin Russwin®






Yale®
(also includes Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)


Schlage
Falcon
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
key-in-lever 6 pin



Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
key-in-lever 7 pin

Full Cylinder
Full Size
Interchangeable Core

= less cylinder only
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Small Format
Interchangeable Core
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
Required Fields
Factory Defaults & Options
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Door
Thickness
Chassis
2
Strike
Class
1
Backset
& Latch
Series
CO -100 -CY-70 -KP - SPA - 626 - PD - C123 - RH -13-049 -10-025 -1-3/4
12
13
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
7 Finish
4 Function
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
70 50
8 Lever Cylinder Type
CY MS 993R
993S
993M
993DT
Cylindrical
Mortise
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Exit Dummy Trim
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
PD 5 Reader
KP Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
Keypad
6 Lever
SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
9 Keyway Type
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
C123
10 Handing
RH
RHR
LH
LHR
12 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
Available with knurled surface
11 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
Right Handed
Right Handed Reverse
Left Handed
Left Handed Reverse
13 Door Thickness
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4”
See price book for details
Field reversible
Lever styles
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Warm tone finishes
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Rhodes
Cool tone finishes
Athens
Tubular
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and Falcon
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin,
Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma
is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004186
06/12
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CO-200 Standalone
CO-200
Standalone Electronic Lock
Images shown are not to scale.
The CO-Series is the ideal solution for customers seeking the
added security and convenience of electronic access control
without the cost or complexity of a fully networked system.
The CO-200 is computer or manually programmable with users
rights stored on the lock. The Handheld Device (HHD) used in
conjunction with your access control software, allows you to
easily add or delete users and retrieve audits.
By issuing electronic credentials you can minimize the number
of mechanical keys issued which protects the integrity of your
key system. A variety of credential readers are also available
including: keypad only, magnetic stripe, and proximity. The
magnetic stripe and proximity readers are also available with
keypad for the added security of dual authentication.
Cylindrical, mortise, mortise deadbolt, and exit trim chassis
options are available as well as a wide variety of finishes and
levers to suite with your existing hardware.
Mechanical key override is standard and compatible with multiple cylinder types. The CO-Series is also compatible with many
popular brands and types of exit devices.
The CO-Series has been tested the highest standards in the industry to ensure quality and reliability you have come to expect
from Schlage. The CO-Series is ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/
BHMA Grade 1 certified and UL 294 listed.
Features and Benefits
• Computer programmable with audit trail
• Up to 2000 users & up to 2000 audits*
• Up to 32 holidays & 16 time zones*
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified
and UL 294 listed
• User rights stored on the lock
• The ability to add and delete users at the lock
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise deadbolt, and
exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of key systems and exit
devices
• Classroom/Storeroom, Office, and Privacy functions
available
*Depending on access control software.
Specifications
Functions
CO-200 Electronic Lock Specifications
Users
Up to 2,000*
Audits
Up to 2,000*
Credential Verification Time
≤ 1 second
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators
Power Supply
4 AA batteries (standard off the shelf: included)
Voltage Range
4 VDC to 7 VDC
Max Current Requirement
Up to 250 mA
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4 AA batteries
Operating Temperature - Exterior
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature - Interior
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) due to batteries
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL 10 C,
FCC Part 15, ADA and RoHS

Classroom/Storeroom

Office

Privacy*
Note: Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not available
with Mortise Deadbolt option. To
ensure safety, all functions always
allow for free egress.
*Door position switch is required
for cylindrical and mortise chassis
with privacy function.
Standard Status
Signals
*Depending on access control software.

Mechanical Key Override

Battery Status - indicated
by blinking lights
Dimensions
Exterior of the Lock
Interior of the Lock
Cylindrical
Mortise Deadbolt
Schlage Utility Software on Handheld Device
The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Device (HHD), in conjunction with
your access control software, provides an easy way to manage people, audits and locks
for simple access control management.
Schlage Utility Software
HHD
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen/Keypad Backlit
• 32-bit processor
• OS: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM/256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 v,
1,230 mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions: 5.3” x 2.9” x 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs. (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface,
2 drops per 6 sides
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
HHD is also compatible with CM, CL, VIP, WA, and KC2 series locks via a serial cable connection.
The HHD connects with
CO-Series and AD-Series
locks and accessories via
the USB interface
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handing
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
ANSI Standard
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1
strength and operational requirements
Door Thickness
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip to center
standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and ANSI strike box
available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x 1-3/16” lip to center
with dust box standard, optional strikes lip lengths available
Full Size
Cylinder Compatibility
key-in-lever 6 pin
Full Size
FSIC
SFIC
6 & 7pin
6 & 7pin

Corbin Russwin®






Yale®
(also includes Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)





Schlage
Falcon
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
key-in-lever 7 pin

Full Cylinder

Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
Full Size
Interchangeable Core
Small Format
Interchangeable Core
= less cylinder only
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Reader Specifications

Keypad
Magnetic Stripe
Proximity
Frequency
Standards
N/A
ABA, ISO76XX Standard High
& Low Coercivity
125 kHz
Maximum Read
Range
N/A
N/A (Swipe card)
up to 1.25”
Compatibility
3-6 digit pin code
Triple Track Reader (1, 2 or 3),
field configurable
Schlage, XceedID®, HID®,
GE/CASI ProxLite™ and AWID®
Compatible
Schlage
Credentials
N/A
Configurable to read complete
track 1, 2 or 3
125 kHz Proximity Clamshell
(SXF7410), 125 kHz Proximity ISO
Card (SXF7510), 125 kHz ISO Card
w/ Magnetic Stripe (SXF7510MS)
Style/Layout
12-button, 3x4 matrix
Option for 12-button,
3x4 matrix
Option for 12-button,
3x4 matrix
The combo proximity
keyfobs with iButton®
option are available which
allows you to manage
proximity and iButton®
technologies in the
same facility.
Available CO-200 Reader Options
• Keypad
• Proximity
+ KEYPAD
• Proximity
• Magnetic Stripe
• Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
Required Fields
Factory Defaults & Options
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Door
Thickness
Chassis
2
Strike
Class
1
Backset
& Latch
Series
CO-200-CY-70 - PR- SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
12
13
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
7 Finish
11 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Exit Dummy Trim
4 Function
70 50
40
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Keypad
Magnetic Stripe
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
Proximity
Proximity + Keypad
SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
12 Strike
PD Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
9 Keyway Type
C123
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
10 Handing
RH
RHR
LH
LHR
6 Lever
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
8 Lever Cylinder Type
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
5 Reader
KP MS MSK PR
PRK
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
Right Handed
Right Handed Reverse
Left Handed
Left Handed Reverse
See price book for other available strikes
13 Door Thickness
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4”
See price book for detail
Field reversible
Available with knurled surface
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Sparta 605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Rhodes
Cool tone finishes
Athens
Tubular
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and Falcon
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin,
Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma
is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004185
06/12
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CO-250 Standalone
CO-250
Standalone Electronic Lock
Images shown are not to scale.
The CO-Series is the ideal solution for customers seeking the
added security and convenience of electronic access control
without the cost or complexity of a fully networked system.
The CO-250 is a computer programmable offline lock that
stores user rights on the magnetic stripe credential, and
captures an audit trail in the lock. The CO-250 provides
dynamic rights management, meaning you do not have to
visit the door to change user access rights. This makes it a cost
effective solution for offline environments with a large number
of users. The CO-250 also allows you to retrieve audits by using
the Handheld Device (HHD) in conjunction with your access
control software.
The CO-250 from Schlage offers you many choices. Cylindrical,
mortise, mortise deadbolt, and exit trim chassis options are
available as well as a wide variety of finishes and levers to suite
with your existing hardware.
Mechanical key override is standard and compatible with
multiple cylinder types. The CO-Series is also compatible with
many popular brands of exit devices.
The CO-Series has been tested the highest standards in the
industry to ensure quality and reliability you have come to
expect from Schlage. The CO-Series is ANSI/BHMA A156.25,
ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified and UL 294 listed.
Features and Benefits
• Computer programmable with audit trail
• Unlimited number of users and up
to 4000 audits*
• Available with Magnetic Stripe and Magnetic Stripe
plus Keypad
• Up to 32 holidays & 16 time zones*
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified
and UL 294 listed
• User rights stored on the magnetic stripe credential
• The ability to easily add and delete users
• Available in cylindrical, mortise, mortise deadbolt, and
exit trim
• Compatible with major brands of key systems and exit
devices
• Classroom/Storeroom, Office, and Privacy functions
available
*Depending on access control software.
Specifications
Functions
CO-250 Electronic Lock Specifications
Users
Audits
Unlimited*
Up to 4,000*
Credential Verification Time
≤ 1 second
Visual/Audible Communications
Tri-colored LED’s & audible indicators
System Interface
Handheld Device
Power Supply
4 AA batteries
Battery Life
Up to 2 yrs with 4 AA batteries
Operating Temperature - Exterior
-31° to 151°F (-35° to 66°C)
Operating Temperature - Interior
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) due to batteries
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, UL 294, UL 10 C,
FCC Part 15, ADA and ROHS
Accessories
Handheld Device (HHD), Magnetic Stripe Credential Encoder
(CL-Encoder 2)
*Depending on access control software.

Classroom/Storeroom

Office

Privacy*
Note: Classroom/Storeroom
and Office function not
available with Mortise
Deadbolt option. To ensure
safety, all functions always
allow for free egress.
*Door position switch is required
for cylindrical and mortise chassis
with privacy function.
Standard Status
Signals

Mechanical Key Override

Battery Status
Dimensions
Exterior of the Lock
Interior of the Lock
Cylindrical
Mortise Deadbolt
Schlage Utility Software on Handheld Device
The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Device (HHD), in conjunction with
your access control software, provides an easy way to manage people, audits and locks
for simple access control management.
Schlage Utility Software
HHD
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen/Keypad Backlit
• 32-bit processor
• OS: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM/256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 v,
1,230 mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions: 5.3” x 2.9” x 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs. (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface,
2 drops per 6 sides
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
HHD is also compatible with CM, CL, VIP, WA, and KC2 series locks via a serial cable connection.
The HHD connects with
CO-Series and AD-Series
locks and accessories via
the USB interface
Mechanical Specifications
Chassis
Cylindrical (Based on Schlage ND-Series)
Mortise (Based on Schlage L-Series)
Handing
ANSI Standard
Handed to Order, Field Reversible
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1
strength and operational requirements
Door Thickness
Meets or exceeds A156.25 and A156.13
Series 1000, Grade 1 operational and security
1-3/4” standard, 1-3/8” to 2-3/4” optional (available in 1/8” increments)
Backset
2-3/4˝ standard, 2-3/8˝, 3-3/4˝ and 5˝ optional
2-3/4” only
Latch Bolt
1/2˝ throw security latch standard
3/4” throw optional
3/4” throw with anti-friction tongue standard
1” throw deadbolt on Mortise Deadbolt option
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Steel, plated to match finish symbols
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4˝ x 4-7/8˝ x 1-3/16˝ lip to center
standard, optional strikes, lip lengths and ANSI strike box
available
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x 1-3/16” lip to center
with dust box standard, optional strikes lip lengths available
Compatibility
Exit Device Compatibility
Von Duprin
98/99 and 98/99 XP
Von Duprin
22/22F
Falcon
Corbin Russwin®
Rim
SVR
CVR/CVC
Mortise
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓*
✓
25
5000
Precision™ 21 Rim 2100 converts to
21 with Precision's BP21 kit
✓
Yale®
7000
Dorma®
9300
Sargent®
✓
✓
✓
80
* Metal door only
Cylinder Compatibility
Schlage
Falcon
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
Full Size
key-in-lever 6 pin



Full Size
key-in-lever 7 pin
FSIC
6 & 7pin











Corbin Russwin®
Yale® (includes Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)
Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
SFIC
6 & 7pin
Full Cylinder
Full Size
Interchangeable Core
Small Format
Interchangeable Core
= less cylinder only
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Reader Specifications
Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2
or 3), field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
• 12 button, 3x4 matrix keypad
Magnetic Stripe
• Triple Track Reader (1, 2
or 3), field configurable
• ABA, ISO76XX Standard
Ordering Information
Available through one of our GSA Schedule 84 approved distributors
Required Fields
Factory Defaults & Options
Function
Reader
Lever Style
Finish
Lever Cylinder
Keying Type
Handing
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Door
Thickness
Chassis
2
Strike
Class
1
Backset
& Latch
Series
CO-250-CY-70 - MS - SPA - 626 - PD-C123 - RH -13-049-10-025 -1-3/4
13
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
Standard options are indicated in bold. See price book for specific configuration options.
3 Chassis
7 Finish
CY MS MD 993R
993S
993M
993DT
626
605
606
612
619
625
643e
626AM
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim – Rim/CVR/CVC
Exit Trim – SVR
Exit Trim – Mortise
Exit Dummy Trim
4 Function
70 50
40
8 Lever Cylinder Type
Classroom/Storeroom
Office
Privacy
PD Magnetic Stripe
Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
9 Keyway Type
C123
Everest
See price book for other available keyway options
including master keying
6 Lever
SPA RHO
ATH
TLR
Schlage 6-pin Full Cylinder
See price book for other SFIC, FSIC and Less Cores
options available. Compatible with Schlage,
Sargent, Corbin, Medeco and Yale
5 Reader
MS MSK
Satin Chrome
Bright Brass
Satin Brass
Satin Bronze
Satin Nickel
Bright Chrome
Aged Bronze
Satin Chrome Antimicrobial
Sparta
Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
Available with knurled surface
See price book for mortise deadbolt and other backset
and latch options or armor front options
12 Strike
Cylindrical
10-025 1-3/16 Lip, ANSI, No Box,
1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Mortise
10-072 1-3/16” Lip, 1-1/4” x 4-7/8”
Square Corner, Box
See price book for other available strikes
13 Door Thickness
10 Handing
RH
RHR
LH
LHR
11 Backset & Latch or Armor Front
Cylindrical
13-0492-3/4” Backset, Deadlatch,
Square Corner, 1-1/8” x 2-1/4”
Mortise
09-663Armor Front, 1-1/4” Wide,
Square Corner
Right Handed
Right Handed Reverse
Left Handed
Left Handed Reverse
1-3/4”
Other thicknesses available between
1-3/8” and 2-3/4
See price book for detail.
Field reversible
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Sparta 605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Rhodes
Cool tone finishes
Athens
Tubular
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
Antimicrobial
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and Falcon
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin,
Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma
is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004184
06/12
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CO-Series Exit Trim
CO-Series
Exit Trim Compatibility
The CO-Series offers 993 exit trim for use with compatible
exit devices in retrofit or new construction applications.
Features and Benefits
The 993 Exit Trim was designed to suite with CO-Series
cylindrical and mortise locksets to ensure that the facility
remains aesthetically consistent.
• Multiple Credential Reader Options
• A wide variety of finishes and lever styles
• Powered by 4 AA batteries*
• Compatible with most Standard, FSIC or SFIC keyways
from major brands of master key systems including
Schlage, Sargent®, Corbin®, Medeco® and Yale®
• UL 294 listed, ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA
Grade 1 certified**
The CO-Series 993 Exit Trim utilizes universal hardware to
simplify installation of offline trim to a variety of exit devices,
including Rim style from Von Duprin, Falcon, Sargent®, Corbin
Russwin®, Dorma®, and Yale®.
Available Exit Trim Styles:
• 993R – Rim, Concealed Vertical Rod or Concealed Vertical
Cable (CVR/CVC for metal doors only)
• 993S – Surface Vertical Rod
• 993M – Mortise
• 993DT – Non-Functioning Dummy Trim for Exit
*Excluding 993DT
**UL 294 does not apply to dummy trim devices
Compatibility
Devices
CO-100
CO-200
CO-250
Von Duprin 98/99 & 98/99 XP
Rim/SVR/CVR*/CVC*/Mortise
X
X
X
Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
X
X
X
Falcon 25 Rim
X
X
X
Sargent® 80 Rim
X
X
X
Precision™ 21 Rim 2100 converts
X
X
X
Yale® 7000 Rim
X
X
X
Corbin Russwin® 5000 Rim
X
X
X
Dorma® 9300 Rim
X
X
X
to 21 with Precision’s BP21 kit
* Metal door only
DIMENSIONS
Profile View
Exterior View
CO-Series - 993 Exit Trim
Compatibility
Reader Options
KP Keypad
CO-100
CO-200
X
X
CO-250
PR Proximity
X
PRK Proximity + Keypad
X
MS Magnetic Stripe
X
X
MSK Magnetic Stripe + Keypad
X
X
X
X
Programming Options
Computer
X
Manual
Cylinder
Compatibility
Full Size
key-in-lever 6 pin



Schlage
Falcon
Sargent®
X
FSIC
Full Size
key-in-lever 7 pin
Yale® (also includes
Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)
Interior View
Side View
CO-100/200/250 - CO-100/200/250 all styles
RIM/CVR/CVC or
Mortise
Side View
CO-100/200/250
SVR
6 & 7pin










Corbin Russwin®
SFIC
6 & 7pin

Best®
= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder only
= less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Note:(2) #7 fasteners with decorative
washers located 11.88” below bottom edge of lock
Full Cylinder
Full Size
Interchangeable Core
Small Format
Interchangeable Core
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and Falcon
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin,
Inc. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma
is a trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004183
06/12
Offline Controller
Overview
The CT5000 is an offline single opening controller designed
for applications where the security and convenience of offline
electronic access control is desired, but an integrated electronic
lock may not be practical. It is an ideal solution for narrow stile
aluminum store front applications because it can work with a
variety of readers as well as interface with peripheral devices
such automatic operators, electric strikes, and electromagnetic
locks.
The CT5000 supports up to two separate Wiegand reader inputs.
It is compatible with many types of credential technologies. The
CT5000 has three form C relay outputs, for strike, auxiliary and
alarm. It also has three inputs that include door position and
request-to-exit.
The CT5000 is compatible with many brands and types of
credential technologies including Magnetic Stripe (tracks 1, 2,
and 3), 125 kHz Proximity, and 13.56 MHz Smart Cards. It also
supports a variety of card functions including: normal, toggle,
freeze, pass through, construction, lockdown and Card + PIN
applications.
The CT5000 offline controller has the unique ability to be
programmed locally via keypad or via the Schlage Handheld
Programming Device. The CT5000 is compatible with Schlage
SMS Express, Premier or Enterprise access control software.
The CT5000 compliments your facility’s portfolio of CO-Series
and AD-Series devices along with all of your other networked
readers.
If networked functionality is required in the future, the
CT5000 can be upgraded. With the addition of a networked
communication board and upgraded firmware, the CT5000
becomes a wireless reader interface (WRI400). The WRI400
communicates via 900MHz wireless signals to an AD-Series
PIM400 which connects to the networked access control system.
The WRI400 eliminates the need to run additional wires to the
door, saving you time and money on installation.
Features and Benefits
• Supports up to 5000 users and 5000 audits
• UL 294, Canada UL, FCC Part 15, Canada RSS-210, RoHs
• Includes 15 foot USB remote cable connector and
decorative wall plate with USB input
• Supports up to two wiegand reader inputs
• Programmed using Schlage Handheld Device (HHD)
via USB connection or compatible keypad
• Requires 2 Amp power supply, such as the Schlage
PS902 (sold separately)
• Compatible with Schlage SMS Express, Select, Premier
or Enterprise access control software
• Request-to-exit (remote release)
• LED visual indicators (including low battery and state
of the relay)
CT5000 Offline Controller
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CT5000
CT5000
Offline Controllers
Front Door Application
Narrow Stile Application
Panic Device Application
The CT5000 can be used
for front door applications
with an automatic
operator, electric strike
and card reader
For narrow stile
applications the CT5000
can be used with an
electric strike and card
reader
The CT5000 and a card
reader along with the
Von Duprin 914 Power Supply
can control two EL exit devices for
double door applications
PS902
Power
Supply
PS902
Power
Supply
PS902
Power
Supply
CT5000
CT5000
CT5000
PS914
Operator
EPT
Pushbutton
Electric
Strike
Electric
Strike
Card
Reader
EPT
EL Exit Device
Card
Reader
EL Exit Device
Card
Reader
Note: PS902 and Von Duprin PS914 are sold separately.
CT5000 Offline Controller Specifications
Users
Up to 5000
Audits
Up to 5000
Power Supply
12 VDC or 24 VDC (sold separately, must be UL 294 Class 2 listed power supply)
Voltage Range
9.5 VDC to 26 VDC
DC Power Input
Connector Cable Specifications
Relay Output Tolerances
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 1000 ft (305 m)
Credential Readers
(x2)
Data Signals: 22AWG, 6 Conductor (Alpha 1296C or equivalent) up to 500 feet (152 meters)
Reader Tamper Signals: 18AWG, Twisted Pair Shielded (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 500
feet (152 meters)
Strike/ Aux Relay
Outputs
18AWG, 2 Conductor (Belden 8760 or equivalent) up to 2000 feet (610 meters)
Strike Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Auxiliary Output
Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Alarm Output Relay
Form C Relay; 6 Amps @ 24VDC or 6 Amps @ 20 VAC or 3 Amps @ 240 VAC
Operating Temperature
-31ºF (-35ºC) to 151ºF (66ºC)
Operating Humidity
0 - 100% condensing
Certifications
UL 294, Canada UL, FCC Part 15, Canada RSS-210, RoHs
Dimensions
10.43” x 7.28” x 3.79”
26.49 cm x 18.49 cm x 9.63 cm
Programming Method
Manually programmed via compatible keypad or computer programmed via SUS Software on
the Schlage Handheld Programming Device (HHD)
Optional Accessories
125 foot USB remote cable connector, PS902, PS904, or Von Duprin PS914 (sold separately)
Credential Compatibility (software and reader dependent)
Magnetic Stripe Card
Field configurable track 1, 2, or 3
125 kHz Proximity Card
Schlage, XceedID® (34X, 35X, 35C, 37X bit formats), HID®,
GE/CASI ProxLite™ and AWID® 26 bit format
13.56 MHz Smart Card
aptiQ™ smart cards featuring MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
HID iCLASS® CSN only
26 bit format

The following readers are UL 294
listed for use with the CT5000:
• Essex Electronics model KTP-162
• Mercury Security models MR-5 and MR-20,
XceedID models XF-1050, XF-1100, XF-1500,
XF-1550 and XF-2100
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin and aptiQ are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. GE, CASI and ProxLite are
trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are
trademarks of HID Corporation. AWID is a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. Essex Electronics is a registered
trademark of Essex Electronics, Inc. Mercury Security is a registered trademark of Mercury Security, Corp. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004016 03/12
on the Handheld Device (HHD)
Overview
Schlage Utility Software (SUS) is designed specifically for use
on the Handheld Device (HHD) as the link between your access
control management software and Schlage electronic offline
and networked locks and accessories.
This solution consolidates and simplifies programming and
managing your access control system. The SUS and HHD is
used to initialize, configure and test product operation, and
also provides an easy way to manage people, audits, locks and
other network panel interface devices for simple access control.
The intuitive screen layout for the SUS provides easy
navigation during use.
For offline products the SUS is utilized to transfer access control
data, such as authorized user lists, via the HHD to the locks.
The SUS is also utilized to download audit trail information from
offline devices to the HHD and then transfer that data to the
access control management software.
In addition the SUS can configure other networked electronic
devices (including PIM and PIB) and update firmware revision
updates to the devices as desired.
The HHD connects with Schlage AD-Series electronic locks and
accessories via a USB interface and utilizes Active Synch or Win
Mobile Device Manager to communicate with your PC via the
USB port. The HHD is also able to connect to the SPED, KC2,
CM, CL, CT500, CT1000, CL Controller and WA-Series PIMs via
a serial cable connection.
Features and Benefits
• Handheld Device with Schlage Utility
Software installed
• Touch Screen operation
• Initialize Lock and Accessories with SUS
• Configure and Test Devices
SUS on the Handheld Device
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
Schlage Utility Software (SUS)
FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Schlage Utility Software
• Initialize Lock and Accessories
• Field Configure Devices
-- Credential Reader Formats
-- Lock Function
-- Unlock Period
-- Failure Mode
-- Audible Alarm ON/OFF
• Offline Devices
-- Manage up to 100 unique door files
HHD Compatible Devices and Required Cable and Adaptors
Devices
Cable and Adaptors
AD-Series and CO-Series Locks PIM400,
WRI400, ECK400, GCK400, WPR400,
TK400 and CT5000 controller
HH-USB (included in HHD-Kit)
BE367, KC-2, CM, CL, CT500, CT1000,
CL-Controller
HH-Serial + CIP
WA-Series PIM
HH-Serial + PIMWA-CV
-- Retrieve Audit trails from up to 100 devices
• Networked Devices
-- Communication Settings
-- Validate Status Monitor
• Service & Diagnostics
-- Battery Status
-- Validate hardware and software revision
-- Troubleshooting Status Signals
-- Firmware Upgrades
HHD Specifications
• 3.5 in LCD display
• Touch Screen with Backlit Keypad
• 32-bit processor
• Operating System: Windows Mobile 5.0
• Memory: 128 MB RAM / 256 MB ROM
• Battery: Rechargeable 3.7 V, 1,230mAH, Li-ion
• Dimensions (HWD): 5.3” X 2.9” X 0.7”
(13.5 cm x 7.3 cm x 1.8 cm)
• Weight: 0.42 lbs (190 g)
• 4 ft. (1.2 m) drop to steel surface, 2 drops per 6 sides
How-To-Videos
• Specially formatted How-To-Videos for the HHD are
available
• They can be downloaded from www.schlage.com/
support
• If additional storage is needed, a standard mini SD
memory card can be used
• Videos should be saved on the SD card or in a new
folder on the device rather than in the shared sync
folder or root directory
ORDERING INFORMATION
HHD KIT – Handheld Device with SUS installed and HH-USB cable
HH-USB – USB Cable
HH-SERIAL – Serial Cable used to connect HHD to CIP
PIMWA-CV – Converter used to connect HH-SERIAL to
WA-Series PIM
P512112 – CIP, utilized with HH-SERIAL to connect to CM, CL
and KC-2 locks
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004443
03/12
with iButton® Option
Schlage’s keyfobs provide the convenience of either contactless
smart card technology or proximity technology in a form that
can optionally include an iButton® credential. This durable
combination works well in environments that do not require
photo ID badging. The ability to attach the keyfob to a key ring
ensures that personnel will be less likely to forget or lose their
access credential.
The combination of either smart card technology or proximity
technology with an iButton® provides the ideal dual credential
for organizations that have integrated multiple credential
technologies into their facilities. The iButton® provides a
registration number used for access control in legacy systems,
and the proximity or smart card technology enables future
expansion with more advanced credentials.
The proximity keyfob incorporates the convenience of proximity
technology with the iButton®. The smart keyfob can support
diverse applications such as access control, biometrics, cashless
vending, transit applications, and many more.
Smart Keyfob Features
• 13.56 MHz frequency Smart Technology
• Available with two memory and technology configurations
• 1K bit (8K byte) MIFARE® or a 4K bit (32K
byte) MIFARE DESFire™ EV1*
• Data transfer rates of up to 848 kbps
Proximity Keyfob Features
• 125 kHz proximity technology
iButton® Features
• Durable stainless-steel packaging
• Unique factory programmed 64-bit registration number
• Momentary contact initiates identification
• Data transfer rate of up to 16.3 kbps
* Factors affecting read range include installation
conditions such as voltage, location of power
supply and mounting material.
Proximity and Smart Keyfobs
Credentials
Proximity &
Smart Keyfobs
Keyfob Specifications
Dimensions
(At widest point)
2.24” x 1” x 0.60”
5.7 cm x 2.52 cm x 1.48 cm
Weight
0.20 oz. (5.6 g)
SXF 1060 Mini-Mullion up to 1”
SXF 1100 Mullion up to 2”
SXF 2100/2110 Mid-Range up to 2.5”
AD-Series
Maximum Read Range*
PR Reader Module up to 0.75”
PRK Reader Module up to 0.75”
SM Reader Module up to 0.75”
SMK Reader Module up to 0.75”
MT Reader Module up to 0.75”
MTK Reader Module up to 0.75”
Frequency
125 KHz or 13.56 MHz (see below for part numbers)
Operating Temperature
-50° to 160° F (-45° to 70° C)
Material
Polycarbonate
Color
Gray
* Factors affecting read range include installation conditions such as voltage,
location of power supply and mounting material.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number** IBF-110 (Combo iButton® keyfob with 125 KHz Prox)
IBWB-110 (125 KHz Prox keyfob without iButton®)
IBF-151(Combo iButton® keyfob with 8K bit/1K byte
MIFARE®)
IBWB-151 (8K bit/1K byte MIFARE® keyfob
without iButton®)
** Standard part numbers. See ordering guide for more
configurations and part numbers. Specifications
subject to change without notice.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE and the SCHLAGE logo, are
trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States
and other countries. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004227
07/11
Magnetic Stripe Credential Encoder
For use with AD-250 and CO-250
Electronic Locks Offline Controller
Overview
The CL-ENCODER2 is a motorized magnetic stripe encoderreader that allows credentials to be instantly encoded and
issued to users. Its compact footprint, rugged design and low
audible noise make it a perfect choice for credential issuance
in applications of any kind. A single card-slot design simplifies
user interface - ensuring quality encoding every time. A smooth
mechanical card-transport ensures fast, reliable, and highquality encoder operation. A dual-color red/green LED provides
clear status indications to the operator. Power-fail card return
and manual card-eject features ensure that a customer’s card
can easily be retrieved under any conditions.
Features and Benefits
• Read and write Hi-Co and Lo-Co magnetic stripe
cards per ISO 7810 and 7811
• Motorized for increased encoding precision and
reliability
• Dual color LED status indicator
• Remote power pack
• Small footprint
CL-ENCODER2
Standalone/Offline Locking Solutions
CL-ENCODER2
CL-ENCODER2 Specifications
Interface
RS232 - for use with Schlage software
USB
Dimensions (HWD)
3.85” x 4.47” x 8.44”
(9.78 mm x 11.18 mm x 21.10 mm)
Weight
2 lbs (0.9 kg)
Magnetic Stripe
Tracks 1, 2, 3
Hi-Co/Lo-Co read/write per ISO 7810, 7811
Card Speed
7-11 i.p.s.
Input Voltage
+12 VDC ± 5 %
Current Draw
Idle: 300 mA
Maximum: 3.0 A (during Hi-Co encode
sequence) 1 A draw from an auxiliary serial
port device
Communication Protocol
MagTek® MCP protocol
Command Set
MagTek MCP command set
MTBF
Electronics: 125,000 hours
Magnetic read head: 1,000,000 passes
(500,000 insertion cycles)
Temperature
Operating: 41°F to 113°F (5°C to 45°C)
Storage: -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
Humidity
Operating and Storage: 5% to 95%
non-condensing
Certifications
UL/CRU, CE Class B, FCC Class B
Material
PBT Polymer
ORDERING INFORMATION
CL-ENCODER2 - Magnetic Stripe Encoder, includes power supply
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
005003 07/11
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog covers mechanical
Schlage products which can be equipped with electronic features for
added security and functionality.
Overview
products. The Vandlgard® option allows the
The mechanical lock is the one of the most basic
lever to be rotated down even when the door is
aspects of electronic access systems, however,
in the locked position. This prevents the lever
they are as important as any other component of
from being vandalized or damaged when locked,
such a system. Mechanical security components
improving both the functional integrity of the
must be able to stand up to constant wear and
lock as well as the security which it provides. A
tear, and in some cases must be durable enough
full array of options, including levers, functions,
to handle direct attack or abuse. Without such
and finishes are also available with both the
durability and integrity, the building’s assets and
L-Series and ND-Series.
people are at risk.
Benefits
Features
Years of engineering and design have been put
The two primary electromechanical Schlage
into the L-Series and ND-Series from Schlage.
products are the L-Series Mortise Lock and the
This means with both sets of locks, strength,
ND-Series Cylindrical Lock. Both of these are
dependability, and flexibility are the best on the
offered as mechanical solutions for products
market today. Even after purchasing an expensive
without electronic capabilities; however, they
electronic access control system, there can still
may be equipped through order to incorporate
be a point of weakness at the opening if the
electronic wiring and function. The L-Series and
mechanical lock does not function properly or
ND-Series can both be equipped with electrified
stand up to abuse. Moreover, many tenants are
locking capabilities. When triggered by the
depending on the mechanical aspects of an
corresponding access control system, the lock will
opening to be completely functional every day.
engage or disengage depending on the command.
When so much is at stake, you can rely on Schlage
The L-Series and ND-Series can also be fitted
products to be dependable, strong, and flexible.
with Vandlgard® technology exclusive to Schlage
Electromechanical Solutions
Electromechanical Solutions
Electromechanical Solutions
ND-Series Mechanical Specifications
Handing
Non-handed
Door Thickness
1-5/8 in. to 2-1/8 in. standard
Backset
2-3/4 in. standard, 3-3/4 in. and 5 in. optional
Faceplate
Brass, bronze or stainless steel. 1-1/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. (29mm x 57mm) square corner, beveled.
Lock Chassis
Zinc plated for corrosion resistance
Latchbolt
Steel, 1/2 in. (12mm) throw, deadlocking on keyed and exterior functions
Exposed Trim
Levers: Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Roses
Brass, bronze or zinc
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4 in. x 4-7/8 in. x 1-3/16 in. lip to center standard
Cylinders and Keys
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two patented nickel silver keys per lock or SFIC Small Format
Interchangeable Core (Core Not Included)
Lever Design
Rhodes Lever Handle
Finish
Oil Rubbed Bronze 613 & Satin Chromium Plated 626
ND-Series Electronic Specifications
Voltage
24V AC or 24V DC
Holding Current
.15A or .35A
Operating Temperature
Maximum +151°F (+66°C)
Minimum -31°F (-33°C)
Rectifier used on AC operation unit only .35A @ 24 (Current requirements per lock)
ND-Series Electrified Functions
Function
Outside Lever
Fail Safe/Secure?
Auxillary Latch
Inside Lever
Vandlgard®
ND12DEL
Continuously locked
electronically
Safe
Deadlocks latchbolt
when door is closed
Always free for
immediate exit
No
ND12DEU
Continuously locked until
unlocked by electric current
Secure
Deadlocks latchbolt
when door is closed
Always free for
immediate exit
No
ND80PDEL
Continuously locked
electronically
Safe
Deadlocks latchbolt
when door is closed
Always free for
immediate exit
No
ND96PDEL
Continuously disengaged
electrically
Safe
Deadlocks latchbolt
when door is closed
Always free for
immediate exit
Yes
ND96PDEU
Continuously disengaged
until unlocked by key or
electric current
Secure
Deadlocks latchbolt
when door is closed
Always free for
immediate exit
Yes
Handing
Non-handed
Door Thickness
1-3/4 in. (44mm) standard, 1-3/8 in. (35mm) to 2-1/2 in. (64mm) optional. Over 2-1/2 in. (64mm) door
ranges vary by function. No escutcheon available for 1-3/4 in. (44mm) door standard 2 in. to 2-3/8 in.
optional. Specify door thickness other than 1-3/4 in.
Backset
2-3/4 in. (70mm) only
Armored Front
1-1/4 in. x 8 in. x 7/32 in. (32mm x 203mm x 6mm) standard
1-1/16 in. x 8 in. x 7/32 in. (27 mm x 203 mm x 6mm) optional
Case Size
4-7/16 in. x 6-1/16 in. x 1 in. (113mm x 154mm x 25mm)
Spacing
Knob or lever to cylinder, 3-7/8 in. (98mm); knob or lever to thumbturn hub, 2-11/16 in. (68mm)
Bolts
1 in. (25mm) throw stainless steel deadbolt and 3/4 in. (19mm) throw stainless steel latch with anti-friction
tounge
Cylinders and Keys
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two patented keys standard
Keying Options
Interchangeable core and Primus High Security available. Master keying, grand master keying, and
construction keying.
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4 in. x 4-7/8 in. (32mm x 124mm) x 1-3/16 in. (30mm) lip to center with dust box
standard
Trim Combinations
Available with knobs both sides, levers both sides, or knob and lever with rose or escutcheon on each side
Escutcheons
L escutcheons are cold forged brass or bronze and stainless steel. N escutcheons are heavy wrought
reinforced brass, bronze and stainless steel
Knobs
#41 and #42 heavy duty wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel knobs match D Series knobs
Levers
Forged brass or bronze and cast stainless steel. Designs available to match D-Series levers.
93 lever design: Extruded brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
L-Series Electronic Specifications
Voltage
24V AC or 24V DC (Max 29V; Min 20V)
Peak Current
1.3 Amps at 5 to 10 second intervals
Holding Current
.135 Amps between peak current intervals
Operating Temperature
Maximum +151°F (+66°C)
Minimum -31°F (-33°C)
Interfacing devices
HandReaders, wall switches, security consoles, access card readers, thermo-sensitive devices, smoke
and fire alarms, telephone access controls, automatic time devices and computerized controls
Micro Switch Electrical
Requirements for Request
to Exit (RX) Function
Current: 1.0 Amps
Voltage: 24V AC or 24V DC
Peak Load: 5 Amps, 250V AC or DC
Electromechanical Solutions
L-Series Mechanical Specifications
Electromechanical Solutions
L-Series Electrified Functions
Function
Outside Lever
L9080EL
Continuously
locked
electronically
L9080EU
Unlocked by
24V AC or DC
Fail Safe/
Secure?
Auxillary
Latch
Safe
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Latchbolt
Retract
Inside Lever
Request to Exit
Vandlgard®
Latchbolt
Always free for retracted by key
immediate exit
outside or by
lever inside
None
Optional
(LV9080EL)
Secure
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Latchbolt
Always free for retracted by key
immediate exit
outside or by
lever inside
None
Optional
(LV9080EU)
L9080EL-RX*
Continuously
locked
electronically
Safe
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Latchbolt
Always free for retracted by key
immediate exit
outside or by
lever inside
Allows for nondisruptive means
Optional
of immediate
(LV9080ELRX)
egress
L9080EU-RX*
Unlocked by
24V AC or DC
Secure
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Latchbolt
Always free for retracted by key
immediate exit
outside or by
lever inside
Allows for nondisruptive means
Optional
of immediate
(LV9080EURX)
egress
L9082EL
Continuously
locked
electronically
Safe
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Continuously
locked
electronically
Latchbolt is
retracted by key
on either side
None
None
L9082EU
Unlocked by
24V AC or DC
Secure
Deadlocks
latchbolt when
door is closed
Unlocked by
24V AC or DC
Latchbolt is
retracted by key
on either side
None
None
*Specify L283-263 with L functions, specify L283-239 with LV functions
ND-Series and L-Series Comparison
ND-Series
L-Series
Non-handed
Non-handed
Door Thickness
1-5/8 in. to 2-1/8 in. standard
1-3/4 in. (44mm) standard, 1-3/8 in. (35mm) to 2-1/2 in.
(64mm) optional. Over 2-1/2 in. (64mm) door ranges vary
by function. No escutcheon available for 1-3/4 in. (44mm)
door standard 2 in. to 2-3/8 in. optional. Specify door
thickness other than 1-3/4 in.
Backset
2-3/4 in. standard, 3-3/4 in. and 5 in. optional
2-3/4 in. (70mm) only
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols
Forged brass or bronze and cast stainless steel. Designs
available to match D-Series levers. 93 lever design:
Extruded brass, bronze, or stainless steel
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4 in. x 4-7/8 in.
x 1-3/16 in. lip to center standard
ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4 in. x 4-7/8 in. (32mm x
124mm) x 1-3/16 in. (30mm) lip to center with dust box
standard
Cylinders and Keys
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two
patented nickel silver keys per lock or SFIC
Small Format Interchangeable Core (Core Not
Included)
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two patented
keys standard
Handing
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand 005024 08/11
Mortise Electrified Lock
Overview
The most complex electronic access systems still rely on
mechanical hardware to operate properly. Advanced electronic
technology can go to waste without adequate mechanical
locking strength and functionality.
The Schlage L-Series is a mortise lock which can be equipped
with an electrified locking option. The L-Series Mortise Lock
is designed for the highest security applications, featuring a
heavy-duty deadbolt and superior strength and durability.
The L-Series can serve as the mechanical component to nearly
any electronic access system. With the electrified option, the
L-Series is wired to two sources; a regulating device and a
power source. A regulating device such as a hand or card
reader signals the L-Series to lock or unlock, while the power
source serves as the energy source to change the status of
the lock.
Top of the line security means getting the most of both
mechanical and electrical components. The Schlage L-Series
has a proven record of performance, strength, an durability
from the most trusted name in the industry.
Recommended Applications
The L-Series Electrified Mortise Lock is useful for many
applications, including but not limited to:
• Security control centers
• Cashier rooms
• Fire safety exits
• Equipment rooms
• Hazardous material storage
Features & Benefits
• Vandlgard ® option prevents damage to internal lock
when lever is subjected to force
• Fully wrapped heavy-gauge steel case protects against
door edge attacks
• Universal lock case provides up to ten functions in one
case
• Features reversible handing without opening the case
• Lever rotation up or down for easy use
L-Series Mortise Electrified Lock
Electromechanical Locks
L-Series
L-Series Mechanical Specifications
L-Series Electronic Specifications
Handing
Non-handed
Voltage
24V AC or 24 V DC (Max 29V; Min 20V)
Door Thickness
1 3/4” (44mm) standard, 1 3/8”(35mm) to 2
1/2” (64mm) optional. Over 2 1/2” (64mm)
door ranges vary by function. Specify door
thickness other than 1 3/4”.
Peak Current
1.3 Amps at 5 to 10 second intervals
Holding Current
.135 Amps between peak current intervals
Operating
Temperature
Maximum +151°F (+66°C)
Minimum -31°F (-33°C)
Interfacing devices
HandReaders, wall switches, security consoles,
access card readers, thermo-sensitive devices,
smoke and ire alarms, telephone access controls,
automatic time devices and computerized
controls
Micro Switch
Electrical
Requirements for
Request to Exit
(RX) Function)
Current: 1.0 Amps
Voltage: 24V AC or 24V DC
Peak Load: 5 Amps, 250 V AC or DC
Backset
2 3/4” (70mm) only
Armored Front
Standard: 1 1/4” x 8” x 7/32”
(32mm x 203mm x 6mm)
Optional: 1 1/16” x 8” x 7/32”
(27 mm x 203 mm x 6mm)
Case Size
4 7/16” x 6 1/16” x 1”
(113mm x 154mm x 25mm)
Spacing
Knob or Lever to cylinder, 3 7/8” (98mm); knob
or lever to thumbturn hub, 2 11/16” (68mm)
Bolts
1” (25mm) throw stainless steel deadbolt and
3/4” (19mm) throw stainless steel latch with
anti-friction tounge
Cylinders and Keys
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two
patented keys standard
Keying Options
Interchangeable core and Primus High Security
available. Master keying, grand master keying,
and construction keying
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 1 1/4” x 4 7/8” (32 mm
x 124 mm) x 1 3/16” (30mm) lip to center with
dust box standard
Trim Combinations
Available with knobs both sides, levers both
sides, or knob and lever with rose or escutcheon
on each side
Escutcheons
L escutcheons are cold forged brass or bronze
and stainless steel.
Knobs
#41 and #42 heavy duty wrought brass, bronze
or stainless steel knobs match D Series knobs
Levers
See pricebook for details.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
L-Series Electrified Functions
Note: See pricebook for details.
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004998 10/11
Cylindrical Electrified Lock
Overview
Electronic access control systems can be installed in a variety
of applications, but they always require a mechanical lock to
ensure that safety and security needs are met.
The Schlage-ND Series is a cylindrical lock which can be
equipped with an electrified locking option. It can be quickly
and easily installed and integrates with various key systems for
field adaptability.
The ND-Series serves as the mechanical component to nearly
any electronic access system. With the electrified option, the
ND-Series is wired to two sources; a regulating device and a
power source. A regulating device such as a hand or card reader
signals the ND-Series to lock or unlock, while the power source
serves as the energy source to change the status of the lock.
When it comes to access control, mechanical components
can be just as important as their electronic counterparts. The
Schlage ND-Series provides versatility and easy installation to
complete your access control system.
Features & Benefits
• Vandlgard ® option prevents damage to internal lock
when lever is subjected to force
• Tested to over four times the ANSI Grade 1 standards
• Exceeds ANSI A156.2 series 4000 Grade 1 torque
requirements
• Extensive options for lever, finish, handing, and
functions
• Can be set to fail safe or fail secure
• Is available with request to exit functionality
ND-Series Cylindrical Electrified Lock
Electromechanical Locks
ND-Series
ND-Series Mechanical Specifications
ND-Series Electronic Specifications
Handing
Non-handed
Voltage
24V AC or 24 V DC
Door Thickness
1-5/8” to 2-1/8” standard including Vandlgard
Holding Current
.35A or .15A
Backset
2-3/4” standard, 3-3/4” and 5” optional
Faceplate
Brass, bronze or stainless steel. 11/8” x 21/4”
(29 mm x 57mm) square corner, beveled.
Operating
Temperature
Maximum +151°F (+66°C)
Minimum -31°F (-33°C)
Lock Chassis
Zinc plated for corrosion resistance.
Latchbolt
Steel, 1/2” (12mm) throw, deadlocking on
keyed and exterior functions. 3/4” (19mm)
throw anti-friction latch available for pairs of
fire doors.
Exposed Trim
Levers
Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish
symbols.
Roses
Brass, bronze or zinc.
Strike
ANSI curved lip strike 11/4” x 47/8” x 13/16”lip
to center standard.
Cylinders and Keys
6-pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two
patented nickel silver keys per lock or SFIC
Small Format Interchangeable Core (Core Not
Included)
Keying Options
Interchangeable core and Primus high security
cylinders. Master keying, grand master keying
and construction keying.
Lever Design &
Finish
All ND levers and all ND finishes available
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Rectifier used on AC operation unit only
.35A @ 24 (Current requirements per lock)
ND-Series Electrified Functions
Note: See pricebook for details.
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004999
10/11
Readers
Readers
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog
covers XceedID® Proximity Readers, and aptiQ™ Smart and
Multi-Technology Readers from Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies.
Overview
Proximity Readers
Ingersoll Rand offers a comprehensive line of
• XceedID proximity technology offers your
credential readers with a range of technologies
facility an easy and convenient access control
and form factors to meet a variety of security
solution. Proximity technology, which operates
needs and budgets. The aptiQ™ line of multi-
on 125 kHz frequency, is easily integrated into
technology readers deliver complete flexibility
existing legacy proximity systems or ideal for a
when transitioning from proximity to smart
new installation.
technology. A variety of reader designs are
• The PR10 proximity mini-mullion reader is
available to accommodate a wide range of
attractive, cost-effective, and well suited for
mounting applications.
exterior and interior applications. This reader
also has a sleek and attractive architectural
styling. The PR10 proximity reader by XceedID
offers a visual indicator and audio feedback
representing status and activity information
which make access control simple for users to
understand.
• The proximity reader by XceedID operates on
a Wiegand interface, and is compatible with
industry leading proximity credentials.
Readers
Smart Readers
Multi-Technology Readers
• The aptiQ™ SM10 mini-mullion smart reader
• aptiQ™ multi-technology readers are
by Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies is one
the most flexible readers in the industry.
of the most secure readers in the industry.
Finally, one reader handles all applicable
Instead of using open transmission protocols,
ISO standards (14443), and can handle
the SM10 smart card reader utilizes high
multiple formats simultaneously. aptiQ™
security data. Each message between the card
multi-technology readers contain both 125
and the reader is digitally signed using Message
kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz contactless
Authentication Coding (MAC) to ensure the
smart card capability in one unit, which
integrity of the data.
allows customers to economically migrate
• Smart reader technology can be used in
applications such as logical access, cashless
to the latest in smart card technology at
their own pace.
vending, and cafeteria services.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005025 06/12
Multi-Technology Readers
Overview
aptiQ™ Multi-Technology Readers by Ingersoll Rand Security
Technologies are designed to simplify your access control
solutions. Transition your system from proximity to smart
card technology at your own pace without having to change
out readers as new technologies are available. aptiQ readers
handle all applicable ISO standards (14443A, 14443B, 15693),
are FIPS 201-1 compliant and are versatile enough to read
125kHz proximity and 13.56MHz contactless smart cards in
a single unit. aptiQ multi-technology readers interface with
XceedID® MIFARE® Classic smart cards, the ultra-secure aptiQ™
MIFARE DESFire™ EV1, and can read the card serial numbers of
a variety of smart cards from other manufacturers, making your
next upgrade in technology simple and seamless. Additionally,
aptiQ readers are already NFC compatible and able to communicate with NFC-enabled phones whenever you’re ready to take
that step.
aptiQ multi-technology readers use an open architecture platform
designed to work with industry standards and common access
control system interfaces. Multiple aptiQ reader form factors are
designed to fit a variety of placement needs, with an attractive
modern design which will complement any facility’s architecture
and décor. aptiQ readers are very easy to install with the quickconnect design and a standard wiring color scheme that most
technicians are already accustomed to. But if you do have
questions, you’ll never worry about lack of service or assistance.
As always, our knowledgeable sales & support staff is ready to
assist you with any design or technology questions you may
have.
Features & Benefits
•• Accommodates interior, exterior, metal, and non-metal
installation environments
•• Recognizes most proximity credentials, XceedID®
MIFARE® Classic smart credentials, and aptiQ™ MIFARE
DESFire™ EV1 smart credentials
•• FIPS 201-1 Compliant
•• NFC Compatible
•• Quick-connect design for easy installation
•• Simple wiring – color scheme is identical to most
readers in the market
•• Easy-to-install mounting bracket
•• Tri-state LED (red, green, amber) visual indicator
and audio feedback representing status and activity
information, easily discernible for the audibly or visually
impaired.
•• Wiegand output for simple interface with most access
control panels
•• Multiple reader cover color options
•• Limited Lifetime Warranty
•• Multi-technology readers may also
be ordered with RS-485 capability
aptiQ™ Multi-Technology Readers
Readers
aptiQ™
Proximity Mini-Mullion*
PR10
13.56 MHz
Smart Mini-Mullion*
SM10
Multi-Technology Mullion
MT11
Multi-Technology Single Gang
MT15
Multi-Technology Single Gang
Keypad
MTK15
No
ISO 14443A, 14443B, 15693
75 bit PIV**
Yes
Model*
Reader Type
125 kHz
FIPS 201-1 Compliant
n/a
13.56 MHz and 125 kHz
Frequency
Standard Default PIV Output
n/a
MTK15 & MTK15-485 Avg. 120mA
MTK15 & MTK15-485 Peak 230mA
9.3 oz
DESFire EV1: Up to 2” (5.1 cm)
PIV Credential: Up to 2.5” (6.5 cm)
MT15 & MT15-485 Avg. 120mA
MT15 & MT15-485 Peak 200mA
FCC Certification  IC Certification  UL 294 Listed  R&TTE Directive (15 EU Countries)  CE Mark  IP65
Standards
Certifications
Linear DC
MT11-485 Avg. 115 mA
MT11-485 Peak 145 mA
Proximity: Up to 5” (12.7 cm)
MIFARE: Up to 4” (10 cm)
Wiegand Output: 500 ft. (152 m)
5.1” x 3.25” x 0.76”
12.9 cm x 8.3 cm x 1.9 cm
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand Company
005354
07/12
*** RS-485 model numbers include “-485” after the original model number. For example, MT11-485 is the RS-485
version of the multi-technology mini-mullion reader. Multi-drop, Open Standard Device Protocol (OSDP).
** Other output options available through configuration.
* Some features and benefits listed on the front may not be applicable to the smart-only and proximity-only readers.
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector  XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector
aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA  DESFire® CSN
HID iClass® CSN  Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN  ST Microelectronics® CSN
Texas Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number  Phillips I-Code® CSN
Schlage Proximity  XceedID™ Proximity  HID® Proximity
GE/CASI ProxLite®  AWID® Proximity  LenelProx®
PBT Polymer
5.7 oz
-31 to 151F (-35 to 67C)
5.91” x 1.72” x 0.81”
15 cm x 4.4 cm x 2.1 cm
Warm Tone
Brown
9.1 oz
Wiegand / Clock & Data / RS-485*** (OSDP)
18 AWG, 5 Conductor Stranded/Shielded
MT11 Avg. 100 mA
MT11 Peak 135 mA
5-16 VDC
Avg. 95 mA
Peak 195 mA
Voltage Range
Avg. 65 mA
Peak 110 mA
MIFARE: Up to 3” (7.5 cm)
DESFire EV1: Up to 2” (5.1 cm)
Wiegand / Clock & Data
4.26” x 1.72” x 0.81”
10.8 cm x 4.4 cm x 2.1 cm
3.9 oz
Cool Tone
Gray
Schlage MIFARE® Secure Sector
XceedID™ MIFARE® Secure Sector
aptiQ™ Smart Cards using MIFARE
DESFire™ EV1 with PACSA
DESFire® CSN  HID iClass® CSN
Inside Contactless PicoTag® CSN
ST Microelectronics® CSN
Texas Instruments Tag-It® Serial Number
Phillips I-Code® CSN
Cream
Schlage Proximity
XceedID™ Proximity
HID® Proximity
GE/CASI ProxLite®
AWID® Proximity
LenelProx®
4.1 oz
Wiegand
Proximity:
Up to 3” (7.5 cm)
Power Supply
Current Requirement
(at 12 VDC and 25 C; mAmps)
Read Range
(Based off of MRD)
Cable Specification
System Interfaces
Cabling Distance
Physical Dimensions (HWD)
Operating Temperatures
Weight (lbs)
Material
Technologies Supported
in Default Mode
Color Options
Black
(Standard)
aptiQ™ Smart Technology from Ingersoll Rand enhances the intelligence of products through a secure, open architecture design in readers, credentials, and smart phone applications. aptiQ™ seamlessly interfaces and communicates with a variety of products, and provides a platform that easily adapts as new innovations enter the marketplace.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, Schlage, aptiQ and XceedID, are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
XACTT, ISOX Lite are trademarks of XceedID Corporation. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. Inside PicoTag is a trademark of Inside Technologies.
MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Tag-It is a trademark for Texas Instruments. STMicroelectronics is a
trademark of STMicroelectronics Inc. AWID is a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Overview
aptiQ™ Smart and Multi-Technology Readers by Ingersoll Rand
have been approved by the U.S. Government under HSPD-12
for FIPS 201-1 compliance as PIV Transparent Readers. PIV
compliance is available on four reader models, including the
SM10 Smart Mini-Mullion, MT11 Multi-technology Mullion,
MT15 Multi-technology Single Gang, and MTK15 Multitechnology Single Gang with Keypad.
aptiQ™ Multi-Technology readers are a unique and critical
component of successful security upgrades in all sectors of the
government. FIPS 201-1 is a Federal Information Processing
Standard (“FIPS”) developed by the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (“NIST”) to satisfy the requirements
of HSPD-12, a Homeland Security Presidential Directive. One
of the main objectives of HSPD-12 is to ensure governmentwide interoperability for information technology and security
through the implementation of a range of federal standards and
product requirements. FIPS 201-1 seeks to improve identification and authentication of Federal employees and contractors
for access to the Federal factilities and information systems.
aptiQ™ FIPS 201-1 PIV compliant readers are available with
multiple data output formats, which provide unprecedented
versatility within the PIV II specification.
In addition to reading approved FIPS 201-1 PIV II credentials,
aptiQ™ Smart and Multi-technology readers are also
compatible with many standard proximity and leading smart
card technologies (see specifications). The ability to read
multiple existing card types and PIV II cards simultaneously is a
tremendous benefit to those agencies looking to transition
seamlessly from older proximity technologies to new, mandated
PIV II credentials. A mixed population of old prox credentials and
new PIV II credentials is unavoidable during the government’s
multi-year upgrade path to FIPS 201-1 compliance.
Features & Benefits
• Compatibility: compatible with industry standard
125 kHz and 13.56 MHz contactless technologies
• Read Range: up to 6 inches (proximity), up to
2 inches for PIV II credentials
• Tri-state LED (red, green, amber): Visual indicator
and audio feedback representing status and activity
information
• Tamper Detection
• Environment: accommodates interior, exterior, metal
and non-metal installation environments
FIPS 201-1 Compliant Readers
Readers
FIPS 201-1
Compliant Readers
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
• Compliance: compatible with applicable ISO standards
• Compatible with all access control systems that
support Wiegand format
• Warranty: limited lifetime against defective workmanship and materials
• Additional Technologies Supported
-- Proximity
• Schlage
• XceedID®
• HID® Proximity (certain formats)
• GE/CASI ProxLite™
• AWID® Proximity
-- Smart Card (secure sector only)
• Schlage
• XceedID® MIFARE®
• aptiQ™ MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
• FIPS 201-1/PIV II
-- Smart Card (card serial number only)
• DESFire® Application HID iClass®
• Inside Contactless PicoTag™
ORDERING INFORMATION
SM10 - Smart Mini-Mullion Reader
MT11 - Multi-Technology Mullion Reader
MT15 - Multi-Technology Single Gang Reader
MTK15 - Multi-Technology Single Gang Reader with Keypad
aptiQ™ PIV readers have been approved by the GSA lab as compliant
with FIPS 201-1 and the appropriate PIV credentials.
Please see individual data sheets for each reader for more
specific technical information.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo and XceedID, are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates
in the United States and other countries. XACTT, ISOX Lite are trademarks of XceedID Corporation. Inside PicoTag is a
trademark of Inside Technologies. GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE
DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. AWID is a trademark of Applied
Wireless Identifications Group. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004256
06/12
Scramble Keypad
Overview
The SERlll Scramble Keypad is a keypad reader designed to
prevent onlookers from detecting the PIN code being entered.
The LED’s display a randomly allocated set of numbers from
0 to 9. The position of the numbers change every time the
keypad is activated. Only the user standing directly in front
of the keypad can see the scrambled digits.
Features and Benefits
• Very narrow viewing angle of the lighted,
scrambled digits
• The membrane keypad is extremely durable
• Random allocation of digits ensures even wear to the
keys
• Individual PIN codes can be up to 9 digits in length
• The SERlll has a weatherproof rating of IP65
• An audible alarm signals when a button is depressed
• Robust polycarbonate enclosure
• The unit is equipped with power-up diagnostics and
self-test routine
• The SERlll is provided with Wiegand communication
protocol
• Over 3.6 million unique permutations are available
• Terminal connection on the rear of the unit
SERIII-W Scramble Keypad
Readers
SERIII-W
Specifications
Dimensions
5.39” x 4.17” x 2.05”
Input Voltage
8 - 12 VDC
Input Current
500mA max.
Operating Temperature
5º F to 122º F
Weight
16.76 oz.
Cable Distance (Wiegand)
500’ with 22AWG 6 conductor stranded
with overall shield
ORDERING INFORMATION
SERIII-W - Scramble Keypad (Gray)
SERIII-WB - Scramble Keypad (Black)
SMK-2 - Scramble Keypad Surface Mount Kit (Gray)
SMK-2B - Scramble Keypad Surface Mount Kit (Black)
SSMK-2 - Scramble Keypad Surface Mount Kit (ADA Compliant)
PMK-2 - Panel Mount Kit (Gray)
PMK-2B - Panel Mount Kit (Black)
SPMK-2 - Panel Mount Kit w/Steel Back Box (Gray)
SPMK-2B - Panel Mount Kit w/Steel Back Box (Black)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004250
02/12
Magnetic Stripe Readers
Overview
The SMR10 and SMR20 Stripe Readers have a slim, mullion
style design. The die cast metal housing makes it ideal for
indoor or outdoor applications. The SMR20 has a 12 position
membrane style keypad.
Features and Benefits
• Rugged Metal Housing
• All stainless steel hardware is standard
• Audiovisual indication provides Two LED’s (red/green)
and beeper sounds
• Static Discharge Protection
• Accepts low or high coercivity-magnetic cards
• Standard Track 2 encoding (Track 1 & 3 are available)
• One security screw mounting
• Supports Wiegand or Clock & Data interface formats via
Dip Switches
SMR10 & SMR20 Mag Stripe Readers
Readers
SMR10 and SMR20
Specifications
Dimensions
1.95”W x 1.3”H x 5.5’L
Power requirements
5 or 12 VDC
Power consumption
20 mA at 12 VDC
Operating Temperature
-40º F to 170º F
Weight
10 oz.
Cable Distance
500’ with 18AWG 6 conductor stranded
with overall shield
ORDERING INFORMATION
SMR10 - 5 VDC standard, Magnetic Stripe Card Reader (specify
black or beige)
SMR10-12V - 12 VDC Magnetic Stripe Card Reader (specify black
or beige)
SMR20 - 5 VDC standard, Magnetic Stripe Card Reader w/keypad
(specify black or beige)
SMR20-12V - 12 VDC Magnetic Stripe Card Reader w/ keypad
(specify black or beige)
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004246
11/11
Magnetic Stripe Reader
Overview
The SMR5 Mercury Magnetic Stripe Reader has a slim, mullion
style design. The die cast metal housing makes it ideal for
indoor or outdoor applications.
Features and Benefits
• Rugged Metal Housing
• All stainless steel hardware is standard
• Audiovisual indication provides multicolor LED
(red/green) and beeper sounds
• Static discharge protection
• Accepts low or high coercivity-magnetic cards
• Standard Track 2 encoding (Track 1 & 3 are available)
• One security screw mounting
• Supports Wiegand or Clock & Data interface formats
SMR5 Magnetic Stripe Reader
Readers
SMR5
Specifications
Dimensions
1.95”W x 1.3”H x 5.5’L
Power requirements
5 or 12 VDC
Power consumption
20 mA at 12 VDC
Operating Temperature
-40º F to 170º F
Weight
10 oz.
Cable Distance
500’ with 18AWG 6 conductor stranded
with overall shield
ORDERING INFORMATION
SMR5 - 5VDC Magnetic Stripe Card Reader (specify black or beige)
SMR5-12V - 12VDC Magnetic Stripe Card Reader (specify black
or beige)
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5078
07/11
Electronic Keypads
Overview
The fully encapsulated Electronic Keypad can be used by
itself or next to another reader device for additional security. Its
stainless steel construction is ideal for indoor or outdoor
applications. The two designs, single gang box or the mullion
mount style, give it the diversity needed for any application.
Features and Benefits
• Field selectable keypad configurations
• SEKPDWG mounts directly to a single gang
electrical box
• SEKPDMGW mounts to any mullion style frame
• No moving parts to replace
SEKPDWG & SEKPDMGW Keypads
Readers
SEKPDWG and
SEKPDMGW
Specifications
Dimensions
SEKPDWG: 5.125” x 3.375” x .437”
SEKPDMGW: 7.125” x 1.75” x .75”
Power supply
5-12 VDC (field selectable)
Operating temperature
-40º F to 160º F
Weight
SEKPDWG: 16 oz.
SEKPDMGW: 4.4 oz
Material
316L Stainless Steel
Standby current draw
SEKPDWG: 5V-20mA,
SEKPDMGW: 5V-20mA
ORDERING INFORMATION
SEKPDWG - Single Gang Style Keypad
SEKPDMGW - Mullion Style Keypad
SEKPD8B - Mullion Style Keypad (8 Bit)
Note: Specify 5V or 12V
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004252
11/11
Wiegand Swipe Reader
Overview
The SWSRBL Wiegand Reader combines innovative circuitry
and rugged construction to resist vandals. The polymeric housing
and epoxy potted electronics makes it ideal for indoor or outdoor
applications. The reader can be mounted on a vertical surface
with the slot orientation either upward or downward, facing to
the left or the right.
Features and Benefits
• Rugged polymeric housing and epoxy potted electronics
• Visual indication provides tri-colored LED
• Immune to external magnetic fields and RF signal
• Supports Wiegand interface format
• Versatile mounting configurations
• Slot width is 0.062” to 0.069”
SWSRBL Wiegand Stripe Reader
Readers
SWSRBL
Specifications
Dimensions
2.3” x 5.3” x 1.7”
Power requirements
5-12 VDC
Power consumption
30 mA at 12 VDC
Operating Temperature
-40º F to 160º F
Weight
12.1 oz.
Cable Distance
500’ with 18AWG 6 conductor stranded
with overall shield
For use with code stripe layout options
A
long edge/right side
A1
long edge/left side
D
short edge
ORDERING INFORMATION
SWSRBL - Wiegand Reader
SWTRB - Wiegand Turnstile Reader
SWINS - Wiegand Insertion Reader
SWKEY - Wiegand Key Reader
SWPIN - Wiegand PinPad
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5080
07/11
Enrollment Reader
Overview
The SENROLL Enrollment Reader can be used in conjunction
with the Schlage Security Management System (SMS) Select,
Premier or Enterprise Software to facilitate automatic
enrollment of online and/or offline credentials into your
access control system. Automatic enrollment eliminates the
time involved in manually entering credential data and greatly
reduces the potential for human error. The SENROLL contains
read heads for:
• Proximity / Smartcard
• iButton®
• Magnetic Stripe
The SMS software will automatically store the credential data
in the database upon presentation of a credential to one of
the read heads. This all-in-one unit allows the end-user to
utilize different credential technologies or migrate to different
technologies in the future. The SENROLL can be connected to
the SMS workstation using either a serial port or a USB port
(the latter via an inline USB/Serial converter that is included
with the reader). For your convenience, the unit can be located
at the SMS workstation for easy enrollment. No additional
hardware is required.
SENROLL Enrollment Reader
Readers
SENROLL
Specifications
Dimensions
1.53” H x 4.20“ W x 6.92” D
Power supply
included
Power consumption
100mA
Ambient Temperature
0° to 70° C or –40° to 185° F
Humidity
10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Maximum distance to SMS PC
50 feet, RS-232 communication
Recommended cable
included
Please refer to SMS Manual for supported formats
ORDERING INFORMATION
SENROLL- Provides multiple read head technologies for entering
credential data into the Schlage Security Management System
database (SMS Select, Premier or Enterprise)
NOTE: Please specify if using with multi-technology cards
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5956
07/11
Barcode Slot Reader
Overview
The SBSRW Barcode Slot Reader combines innovative circuitry
and optics to provide high ‘first read’ rates. The polycarbonate
housing makes it ideal for indoor or outdoor applications.
Features and Benefits
• Polycarbonate housing
• Visual indication provides one LED
• 3”-30” per second barcode scanning speed
• Bi-directional scanning
• Slot width is 0.050”
• Supports TTL/Open Collector interface format or
Wiegand
• Optics resolution is 5 mil (high)/ 10 mil (low)
• Light source is 630nm visible/940 nm infrared
SBSRW Barcode Slot Reader
Readers
SBSRW
Specifications
Dimensions
2.4”W x 1.4”H x 4.6”L
Power requirements
5VDC
Power consumption
145mA typical 245 max at 5VDC
Operating temperature
-40º F to 170º F
Weight
7 oz.
Cable distance
50’ with 18AWG 6 conductor stranded
with overall shield to reader interface
ORDERING INFORMATION
SBSRW - Barcode Slot Reader TTL/Open Collector
SBSRW-WIEG - Barcode Slot Reader Wiegand interface format
SBSRW-TP - Barcode Slot Reader Thermal Paper
SBSRW-V - Barcode Slot Reader- Visual
SBSRW-OP - Barcode Slot Reader- Optical
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5101
07/11
Mullion Mounted Keypad Series
Overview
The Mullion Keypad Series is a stand alone solution and is ideal
for controlling electrified door hardware such as electric strikes
or electromagnetic locks. The one-piece design allows easy
installation, mounting directly to mullion. Designed with backlit
keys and weather resistant, they are well suited for both indoor
and outdoor applications.
The mullion stile readers can be programmed to accept up to 120
user codes, are equipped with a Form C, dry contact relay and can
be released by using a momentary Request to Exit switch.
The KP232 is designed to meet most residential, commercial, and
industrial single door access control needs, and has two inputs and
four outputs and factory set access control.
KP2000
Single Gang Flush Mount
Overview
The KP2000 Series Single gang flush mount keypads manage up
to 500 users and provide complete access control functionality
including monitoring door position, controlling locking hardware,
triggering propped or forced alert or alarm shunt output. Other
applications for the KP2000 Series keypads include: controlling
electronic devices such as handicapped doors, gate controls, alarm
systems, ATM vestibules, and other types of machinery requiring
momentary or latched outputs.
You can select between two modes of functionality with the
KP2000 Series Keypads. They can operate most Wiegand access
system controllers, or as standalone access control devices.
The KP2000 Series comes in two different styles: the “e” style and
the “eM” style. The “e” style keypad uses hardened backlit keys
while the “eM” style uses a durable metal keypad including Braille
alpha-numeric keys. The KP2000 series can be used in interior and
exterior applications. The flush-mount keypads are constructed to
meet your aesthetic needs while ensuring long-term durability and
high-quality performance.
Features and Benefits
KP212 and KP232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 120 Users
Illuminated Hardened Keys
Sounder
Doorbell Relay
Weather Resistant
Programmable 00-99 Second Relay Activation Time
Remote Trigger Input (REX)
Bell Output (timed or continuous)
Applications:
-- Heavy Traffic
-- Indoor/Outdoor
(KP2000 on back)
KP212 and KP232 Mullion Mounted Keypad
Readers
KP212 and KP232
KP2000 Features
•
•
•
•
500 users
Door position input
Request to Exit input
2 Form C SPDT relay outputs – default for access control
function
• Sounder for key press and alert conditions
• All outputs can be programmed independently if required
• Option for secure installation with control electronics in
protected area
• Widest array of user type options including single use
and two man rule
• 10-30 VDC and 12-24 VAC operation
• Over-voltage protection for reliable operation
• Single-gang flush mount design
• Indoor/outdoor use
• Keypad programmable
• Key press feedback via sounder and yellow LED
• Built-in assignable sounder
• Bi-color Red/Green LED indicates relay status
Reader Specifications
Feature Set
KP212
KP232
KP2000E
KP2000EM
Mounting
Mullion
Mullion
Single Gang/Flush
Single Gang/Flush
Users
120
120
500
500
PIN Length
1-6 digits
1-6 digits
1-10 digits
1-10 digits
Duty Cycles
Medium
Medium
Medium
Heavy Duty
Back Light
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Keys
Hard Plastic
Hard Plastic
Heavy Duty Plastic
Heavy Duty Metal w Braille
Weather Resistant
Indoor/Outdoor
Indoor/Outdoor
Indoor/Outdoor
Indoor/Outdoor
Doorbell Key
Yes
Yes
No
No
Wiegand Output
No
No
No
No
Remote Trigger (REX)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Access Control
Functionality
Programmable relay activation
time (0-99 seconds). Perfect
for electric or magnetic locks
requiring momentary control.
4 dedicated relay outputs
(Lock release, door forced,
door propped and alarm
shunt)
Monitors DPS, controls
various electronic hardware,
triggers door propped, forced
door alert or alarm shunt
Monitors DPS, controls
various electronic hardware,
triggers door propped, forced
door alert or alarm shunt
Relays
2 Relays (Main and Aux)
Main, Prop Door, Forced Door 2 Form C, expandable to 10
and Alarm Shunt Relay
programmable outputs
Outputs
2 Independent (configurable)
4 Independent (dedicated)
2 Independent
(Programmable with the
option to add 8 more)
Programmable
Finish
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
UL 294
No
No
Yes
Yes
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
2 Form C, expandable to 10
programmable outputs
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
005000
12/11
Enrollment Readers
Overview
The CRM2 Magnetic Stripe Credential Enrollment Reader and
the CRP2 Proximity Credential Enrollment Reader are designed
to allow easy enrollment of credentials into the SMS Express
access control system. These compact readers eliminate the
need for manual data entry, and provide error-free identification and security throughout the workplace. The plug and play
functionality provided via a convenient USB connection allows
either of these readers to seamlessly integrate with the SMS
Express software. Additionally, the reader allows for keystrokes
to be added before and after the card’s data, providing flexibility and data customization.
Note: Compatible with SMS Express version 4.0 and higher
Features and Benefits
CRM2
• Magnetic stripe reader
• Reads data from any data track location on the card
• USB connectivity
• Plug-and-play functionality
CRP2
• Proximity reader
• USB connectivity
• Plug-and-play functionality
CRM2 and CRP2 Enrollment Readers
Readers
CRM2 and CRP2
CRP2 Specifications
Typical Maximum read range:
1.0” – 3.0” (2.5 – 7.6cm) dependent upon proximity card
type and environmental conditions
Dimensions:
3 3/8” x 2” x 0.6”
Weight:
0.45 lbs (12.7g)
Power supply and interface:
USB self-powered
Indicators:
Tri-state LED, beeper
Transmit frequency:
125 kHz
Operating temperature range:
-22° to 150°F (-30° to 65°C)
Operating humidity range:
5% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Storage temperature range:
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Certifications:
FCC, United States; CE Mark Europe, C-tic Australia, RoHS
Warranty:
One year for material/workmanship and defects
CRM2 Specifications
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Desktop Dimensions:
3.674” x 1.325” x 1.193” (93.32 x 33.65 x 30.3 mm);
Optional base: 3.375” x 3.5” x 0.5” (86 x 89 x 13 mm)
Desktop Weight:
4.6 oz. (136g); Base: 13 oz. (369g)
Media Thickness:
0.015” (0.127 mm) to 0.038” (1.14 mm)
Slot Width:
0.040” (1.0 mm)
Swipe Speed:
3 to 60 inches per second, bi-directional
Power Supply and Interface:
USB: self-powered; RS-232 [DB9F] model: 5V supplied by
either PS/2 keyboard pass-through or USB power tap
Indicators:
Tri-state LED, beeper
Operating Temperature Range:
32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity Range:
5% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Storage Temperature Range:
-22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Cable Length:
6-foot articulated cable
Operating Life:
1,000,000 cycles minimum
Warranty:
One year for material/workmanship and defects
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
005132
09/11
Credentials
Credentials
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog
covers proximity, smart, and multi-technology credentials
from Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies.
Overview
Proximity Credentials
Schlage by Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
• Schlage proximity technology offers your facility
offers a comprehensive line of smart, multi-
an easy and convenient access control solution.
technology and proximity credentials with an array
Proximity technology, which operates on 125
of technological capabilities and form factors to
kHz frequency, is easily integrated into existing
meet the security needs and budget of virtually
legacy proximity systems and new installation.
any customer. Schlage has a full offering of
credentials to provide complete flexibility when
transitioning from proximity to smart technology.
Additionally, a variety of designs are available to
accommodate a wide range of needs, from ISO
card styles for name badges to keyfobs.
• Offered in several different form factors, Schlage
has the proximity credentials to meet your needs.
-- The clamshell style is highly durable and
more ridged than the typical credit card,
making this card ideal for harsh environments.
-- The ISO style card is similar in size and
thickness to a credit card and has the ideal
surface to print custom artwork, images, and
photographs for identification. This card can
also include a magnetic stripe.
-- The keyfob can be easily attached to any key
ring for convenience.
-- The PVC patch credential can be adhered to
any frequently used surface.
• Proximity credentials by Schlage are compatible
with most industry leading proximity readers and
are completely ISO compliant. These credentials
also have a passive design, requiring no batteries
or maintenance for the life of the card.
Credentials
Smart Credentials
Multi-Technology Credentials
• Schlage contactless smart credentials put you
• Schlage multi-technology credentials are
in control by delivering smarter solutions.
extremely flexible. Particularly useful during
Storage options of 2.5k, 8k, 16k, 32k, or 64k
a transition from proximity technology to
bits will meet the most demanding storage
smart technology, this card can be read by
requirements, and allow for a wide range of
both proximity readers and smart readers,
card applications to be utilized.
which allows customers to economically
• Aside from physical access, smart credential
uses could include transit and point of sale
applications, such as cashless vending and
cafeteria services.
• Contactless smart credentiasl by Schlage
operate on 13.56 MHz frequency, and utilize
high security encrypted data, which is mutually
authenticated in communication between the
card and reader, providing optimum security.
• Smart credentials are also offered in clamshell
style, ISO style cards, keyfobs, and PVC
patches.
migrate to the latest in smart technology at
their own pace.
• This credential is only available in an ISO
style card.
Model Number
7410
7510
7610
7710
Credential Type
Clamshell
ISO-Glossy White*
Keyfob
PVC Disk
125 kHz Prox
125 kHz Prox
125 kHz Prox
125 kHz Prox
3.37
x2.125
x0.075
Vertical
(Punched)
3.37
x2.125
x0.033
Vertical or
Horizontal
2
x1.24
x0.38
1.38 in.
or 35mm
diameter
3.37x2.125 x0.033
Key Ring
N/A
Vertical
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Credential Technology;
ISO Standard
Dimensions
(HWT in inches)
Slot Punch
(Printed Guide)
Memory Capacity;
Application Sectors
9951
9958
8920/8940/8980
ISO-Glossy White*
125 kHz Prox/MIFARE;
ISO 14443
8k bit/
1K byte;
16 sectors
32k bit/
4K byte;
40 sectors
125 kHz Prox/
MIFARE DESFire™
EV1; ISO 14443
2K/4K/8K byte
*All ISO glossy white cards are printable with a magnetic stripe option. Add M1 to the model number for magnetic stripes when ordering.
Credentials
125 kHz/13.56 MHz
Multi-Technology Credentials
125 kHz Proximity Credentials
Credentials
13.56 MHz Smart Credentials
Model Number
Credential Type
Credential
Technology;
ISO Standard
Dimensions
(HWT in inches)
Slot Punch
(Printed Guide)
Memory
Capacity;
Application
Sectors
9420
9451
Clamshell
MIFARE
Lite; ISO
14443
MIFARE;
ISO
14443
9520
9551
9558
ISO-Glossy White*
MIFARE; ISO 14443
3.37x2.125
x0.075
3.37x2.125x0.033
Vertical (Punched)
Vertical or Horizontal
2.5k bit;
5 sectors
9651
Keyfob
MIFARE;
ISO
14443
2
x1.24
x0.38
Key Ring
9751
9758
PVC Patch
MIFARE; ISO 14443
3.32x2.08x0.03
Vertical
8420/
8440/
8480
Clamshell
MIFARE
DESFireE
EV1
3.37
x2.125
x0.033
Vertical
(Punched)
8520/
8620/
8720/
8540/
8640/
8740/
8580
8680
8780
ISO
Glossy
Keyfob PVC Disk
White*
MIFARE MIFARE MIFARE
DESFireE DESFireE DESFireE
EV1
EV1
EV1
3.37
2
1.38 in.
x2.125
x1.24
or 35mm
x0.033
x0.38
diameter
Vertical or
Key Ring
N/A
Horizontal
8k bit/
8k bit/
32k bit/
8k bit/
8k bit/
32k bit/
2.5k bit;
2k/4k/8k 2k/4k/8k 2k/4k/8k 2k/4k/8k
1K byte;
1K byte; 4K byte; 1K byte; 1K byte; 4K byte;
5 sectors
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
16 sectors
16 sectors 40 sectors 16 sectors 16 sectors 40 sectors
*All ISO glossy white cards are printable with a magnetic stripe option. Add M1 to the model number for magnetic stripes when ordering.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005026 02/12
Overview
Schage Contactless Smart Credentials put you in control
by delivering smarter solutions. These credentials protect
your most sensitive data by utilizing extra layers of security
protection, and can be used for many other applications
including transit, cashless vending, and cafeteria point of sale.
The contactless smart credential by Schlage operates on a
13.56 MHz frequency, and utilizes high security encrypted data,
which is mutually authenticated in communication between the
card and reader, providing optimum security. Schlage offers the
choice of 2.5k, 8k, 16k, 32k, and 64k bits of storage, which will
meet the most demanding storage requirements.
Features & Benefits
• Open architecture design is built on ISO 14443A
standards, providing for a faster data transfer speed
• Offered in clamshell, ISO style cards, key fobs, and
adhesive patches
• Utilizes MIFARE or MIFARE DESFire EV1 technology
Smart Credentials
Credentials
Smart Credentials
13.56 MHz Smart Credentials
Model Number
9420
Credential Type
9451
9520
Clamshell
9551
9558
ISO-Glossy White
Credential Technology;
ISO Standard
9651
Keyfob
1
MIFARE; ISO 14443
MIFARE; 14443
Dimensions
(HWT in inches)
3.37x2.125x0.075
3.37x2.125x0.033
2x1.24x0.038
Slot Punch
(Printed Guide)
Vertical (Punched)
Vertical or Horizontal
Key Ring
Memory Capacity;
Application Sectors
8k bit/
1K byte;
16 sectors
2.5k bit;
5 sectors
2.5k bit;
5 sectors
8k bit/1K byte;
16 sectors
32k bit/
4K byte;
40 sectors
8k bit/1K byte;
16 sectors
Lifetime - Credentials have a lifetime warranty against manufacturers defects.
See sales policy for complete warranty details.
Warranty
13.56 MHz Smart Credentials
Model Number
Credential Type
Credential Technology;
ISO Standard
9758
PVC Patch
8420/8440/8480
8520/8540/8580
8620/8640/8680
8720/8740/8780
Clamshell
ISO-Glossy White1
Keyfob
PVC Disk
MIFARE; ISO 14443
MIFARE DESFire EV1
Dimensions
(HWT in inches)
3.37x2.125x0.033
3.37x2.125x0.075
3.37x2.125x0.033
2x1.24x0.28
35mm
Slot Punch
(Printed Guide)
Vertical
Vertical (Punched)
Vertical or
Horizontal
Keyring
N/A
Memory Capacity;
Application Sectors
Warranty
1
9751
8k bit/1K byte;
16 sectors
32k bit/4K byte;
40 sectors
2k/4k/8k bytes
Lifetime - Credentials have a lifetime warranty against manufacturers defects.
See sales policy for complete warranty details.
ISO Glossy White style credentials are made from composite material, are printable, and can include a magnetic stripe as an option. Add M1 to the model
number for a magnetic stripe when ordering.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo and Schlage are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc,
its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004992
11/11
Overview
Schlage multi-technology credentials are extremely
flexible. Particularly useful during a transition from proximity
technology to smart technology, this card can be read by both
proximity readers and smart readers, which allows customers
to economically migrate to the latest smart technology at their
own pace.
Multi-technology credentials from Schlage contain both 125
kHz proximity and 13.56 MHz contactless smart card capability
in one unit, and are available in the newest technologies of
today, including both MIFARE and aptiQ™ MIFARE DESFire™
EV1 technology.
Features & Benefits
• Only available in ISO style cards
Multi-Technology Credentials
Credentials
Multi-Technology
Credentials
125 kHz/13.56 MHz Multi-Technology Credentials
Model Number
9951
Credential Type
Credential Technology; ISO Standard
8920/8940/8980
ISO-Glossy White
1
125 kHz Prox/MIFARE DESFire™ EV1;
ISO 14443
125 kHz Prox/MIFARE®; ISO 14443
Dimensions (HWT in inches)
3.37x2.125 x0.033
Slot Punch (Printed Guide)
Vertical
Memory Capacity;
Application Sectors
Warranty
1
9958
8k bit/1K byte; 16 sectors
32k bit/4K byte; 40 sectors
2K/4K/8K byte
Lifetime - Credentials have a lifetime warranty against manufacturers defects.
See sales policy for complete warranty details.
ISO-Glossy White style credentials are made from composite material, are printable, and can include a magnetic stripe as an option. Add M1 to the model
number for a magnetic stripe when ordering.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, Schlage and aptiQ are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its
subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. MIFARE is a trademark of NXP B.V.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004993
03/12
Overview
Schlage proximity technology is an easy, convenient access
control solution. Proximity technology, which operates on
125 kHz frequency, is easily integrated into existing legacy
proximity systems or ideal for a new installation. Proximity
credentials can easily fit into a wallet or may be used as a
strapped or clipped badge.
From highly durable clamshell-style cards, to basic ISO style
cards, to keyfobs and adhesive patches, Schlage offers several
different form factors to meet the needs of many different
customers.
Proximity credentials by Schlage are compatible with all
industry leading proximity readers and are also completely
ISO compliant. These credentials also have a passive design,
requiring no batteries or maintenance for the life of the card.
Features & Benefits
• Clamshell style offers high durability, and is suitable for
harsh environments
• ISO style card is similar in size and thickness to a credit
card, and has the ideal surface to print custom artwork,
images, and photographs for identification
• Keyfob proximity credentials can easily be attached to
any key ring for convenience
• Adhesive patch proximity credentials can be adhered to
any frequently used surface
Proximity Credentials
Credentials
Proximity Credentials
125 kHz Proximity Credentials
Model Number
7410
7510
Credential Type
Clamshell
ISO-Glossy White
1
Credential Technology; ISO Standard
7710
Keyfob
PVC Disk
125 kHz Prox
Dimensions (HWT in inches)
3.37x2.125x0.075
3.37x2.125 x0.033
2x1.24 x0.38
35mm
Slot Punch (Printed Guide)
Vertical (Punched)
Vertical or Horizontal
Keyring
N/A
Memory Capacity;
Application Sectors
Warranty
1
7610
N/A
Lifetime - Credentials have a lifetime warranty against manufacturers defects.
See sales policy for complete warranty details.
ISO-Glossy White style credentials are made from composite material, are printable, and can include a magnetic stripe as an option. Add M1 to the model
number for a magnetic stripe when ordering.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo and Schlage are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc,
its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004996
07/11
with iButton® Option
Schlage’s keyfobs provide the convenience of either contactless
smart card technology or proximity technology in a form that
can optionally include an iButton® credential. This durable
combination works well in environments that do not require
photo ID badging. The ability to attach the keyfob to a key ring
ensures that personnel will be less likely to forget or lose their
access credential.
The combination of either smart card technology or proximity
technology with an iButton® provides the ideal dual credential
for organizations that have integrated multiple credential
technologies into their facilities. The iButton® provides a
registration number used for access control in legacy systems,
and the proximity or smart card technology enables future
expansion with more advanced credentials.
The proximity keyfob incorporates the convenience of proximity
technology with the iButton®. The smart keyfob can support
diverse applications such as access control, biometrics, cashless
vending, transit applications, and many more.
Smart Keyfob Features
• 13.56 MHz frequency Smart Technology
• Available with two memory and technology configurations
• 1K bit (8K byte) MIFARE® or a 4K bit (32K
byte) MIFARE DESFire™ EV1*
• Data transfer rates of up to 848 kbps
Proximity Keyfob Features
• 125 kHz proximity technology
iButton® Features
• Durable stainless-steel packaging
• Unique factory programmed 64-bit registration number
• Momentary contact initiates identification
• Data transfer rate of up to 16.3 kbps
* Factors affecting read range include installation
conditions such as voltage, location of power
supply and mounting material.
Proximity and Smart Keyfobs
Credentials
Proximity &
Smart Keyfobs
Keyfob Specifications
Dimensions
(At widest point)
2.24” x 1” x 0.60”
5.7 cm x 2.52 cm x 1.48 cm
Weight
0.20 oz. (5.6 g)
SXF 1060 Mini-Mullion up to 1”
SXF 1100 Mullion up to 2”
SXF 2100/2110 Mid-Range up to 2.5”
AD-Series
Maximum Read Range*
PR Reader Module up to 0.75”
PRK Reader Module up to 0.75”
SM Reader Module up to 0.75”
SMK Reader Module up to 0.75”
MT Reader Module up to 0.75”
MTK Reader Module up to 0.75”
Frequency
125 KHz or 13.56 MHz (see below for part numbers)
Operating Temperature
-50° to 160° F (-45° to 70° C)
Material
Polycarbonate
Color
Gray
* Factors affecting read range include installation conditions such as voltage,
location of power supply and mounting material.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number** IBF-110 (Combo iButton® keyfob with 125 KHz Prox)
IBWB-110 (125 KHz Prox keyfob without iButton®)
IBF-151(Combo iButton® keyfob with 8K bit/1K byte
MIFARE®)
IBWB-151 (8K bit/1K byte MIFARE® keyfob
without iButton®)
** Standard part numbers. See ordering guide for more
configurations and part numbers. Specifications
subject to change without notice.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE and the SCHLAGE logo, are
trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States
and other countries. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004227
07/11
Wiegand Card
Overview
Wiegand Card - The SWIEG Wiegand Card is virtually impossible
to counterfeit, it cannot be altered or copied. The Wiegand
code is embedded in the card, any attempt to reach the code
stripe will destroy the card.
Features and Benefits
• The card is laminated under pressure to create rugged
solid vinyl
• Provides trillions of possible codes
• Immune to external magnetic fields and RF signal
• Available to meet strict ISO thickness standards
• Can add a Proximity, Magnetic Stripe, Barcode, or
Photo ID
• Can be used with direct image and thermal transfer
printers
• The Wiegand cards provides an infinite number of reads
• Slot punching is available
Wiegand Cards (SWIEG)
Credentials
SWIEG
Specifications
Dimensions
3.375” x 2.125” x 0.030”
Operating temperature
-40º F to 160º F
Weight
.20 oz.
For use with code stripe layout options
A
long edge/right side
A1
long edge/left side
D
short edge
ORDERING INFORMATION
SWIEG - Standard Wiegand Card
SWIEGPL - Wiegand Card plain white ready for printing
SWIEGll - Dual Technology with Magnetic Stripe
SWIEGDUAL - Dual Technology with Proximity technology
SWKEY - Wiegand Key
SLOTWG - Slot Punching unit
888-943-1356 • xceedid.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004557
07/11
Biometrics
Biometrics
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog covers HandKey®
biometric hand geometry readers and other accessories that can be easily
integrated into an access control system.
Overview
number of verification attempts, or when the user
HandKey® biometric hand geometry readers
is under duress. With the HandKey, you can also
from Schlage provide increased security for the
customize security levels, time zones, holidays
most important openings in your facilities. The
and languages based on your unique needs.
HandKey utilizes the size and shape of the hand
to verify the identity of the user, ensuring that
only authorized users can access the door. While
other credentials can be lost, stolen or duplicated
without authorization, the HandKey eliminates this
risk. The open-architecture design of the HandKey
makes integrating biometric hand readers into
Benefits
The HandKey creates an affordable way to
provide the highest level of security possible for
your access control application. Verification of
identity takes less than one second, making it
ideal for even high throughput applications.
critical access points easy, simple, and seamless for
The hand reader ensures that you are only allowing
new or existing access control systems.
the correct people, not just the proper cards, to
access the most important areas of your facility.
Features
The cost commonly associated with managing an
The HandKey provides the flexibility to be used
access control system can be minimized with the
as a stand-alone device that protects a single
help of a HandKey. Since the credential cannot
critical access point, or integrated into virtually
be forgotten or stolen, you eliminate the need to
any new or existing access control system in the
replace lost, damaged, or stolen cards or keys.
market. Standalone operation is enabled utilizing
the built-in door lock output, and a programmable
auxiliary output that can be used to output audible
or silent alarms, or activate lighting systems or
other peripheral devices. The same HandKey reader
can be set up to operate in card reader emulation
mode, outputting Wiegand data to an access
control system. This enables the HandKey to look
just like a card reader to your access control system,
ensuring real-time monitoring and communication
between the device and your access control panel.
Event monitoring alerts you in the event that
the device has been tampered with, when a user
is refused after exceeding the user definable
The HandKey readers measure the size and
shape of a user’s hand, including length, width,
thickness and surface area, to verify identity.
The HandKey does not read fingerprints or palm
prints, and works effectively even if the user’s
hand is wet, dirty or injured.
Designed upon an open-architecture platform,
the HandKey ensures that you can incorporate
biometrics where you need them, whether it is
on a single high-security door within your facility,
or on many openings throughout your whole
organization as part of an access control system.
Biometrics
Options
Accessories
The HandKey Series readers have several options
A variety of HandKey accessories are available to
to choose from including:
maximize the flexibility of your solution:
• Biometric Reader Model: ID3D-R and
• HandNet Lite provides an easy way to
HandKey-II. Choice of model may limit
manage hand templates for up to 32
other available options and accessories.
HandKeys.
• Communications: Ethernet or modem
• HandNet for Windows enables you to control
communications module options to meet the
and monitor a network of HandKey® readers.
needs of your communication environment.
With one program you can monitor activity
• Memory: Field-upgradeable and expandable
and alarms on all readers, manage hand
memory options to support from 256 to
templates between readers, and control the
259,072 users.
access of each user. HandNet for Windows
• Outdoor Enclosures: To protect the reader
from the elements and enable operations
in a variety of outdoor or other harsh
environments.
• Card Reader and Keypads: A variety of
reader mounted or wall-mounted options,
including proximity, magnetic stripe, barcode,
HID iClass® and MIFARE®.
• Left-handed Configuration: Available to
support drive-through applications and
parking/entrance gates.
• Mounting Options: Enable mounting on
table-top, surface wall-mount, or recessed
wall-mount.
comes in three tiers to enable flexibility based
upon the size of your system. These tiers are
upgradable for added flexibility to meet your
future needs as your application grows.
Outdoor and Enclosure Options
Dimensions (HxWxD)
Power Requirements
Weight
Temperature
Operating
Non-Operating (Storage)
Relative Humidity
Operating
Non-Operating (Storage)
Inputs
Standard
Optional
HandKey Inputs
Outputs
Door Control
Card Reader Emulation Mode
Auxiliary Output
Outputs to peripheral devices
Event Monitoring
Tamper
ID Refused
Duress
Power Failure
Programmable HandKey
Commands
HandKey-II
Polycarbonate housing with aluminum fingerpins
512 Users
Expandable to 259,072 users
9 bytes
Less than one second for comparison to reference template
1-10 digits
1 leading digit, user definable
Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
Baud rate 300 bps to 14,400 bps
Field Installable: 10 Base T
Option Available
Standard
N/A
N/A
Standard
Standard
Heater option available; Polyethylene enclosure with UV resistance available; Metal water
tight enclosure available
11.65 in. x 8.85 in. x 8.55 in.; 29.6 cm x 22.5 cm x 21.7 cm
12 to 24 VDC or 12 to 24 VAC 50-60 Hz 7 Watts (without options)
5.3 lbs. (2.4 kgs.) (Without battery back-up or wall plate)
0° C to +45° C /32° F to 113° F
-10° C to +60° C /14° F to 140° F
20% to 80% RH Non-condensing
5% to 85% RH Non-condensing
26 bit, 9 bit ID Wiegand
Mag stripe, bar code, smart card
Request to Exit, Door switch input, 2 auxiliary inputs
Lock output
Wiegand (standard), mag stripe, bar code
1 programmable auxiliary
Audible or silent alarms, door locks, lighting systems
HandKey opened or removed
User not verified after user definable number of tries exceeded
User entered duress code digit
HandKey switched to optional battery power
Add/remove users; Set global operating thresholds; Set individual user data (authority or
threshold levels, time zones); Transmit data from Master to Remote; Data received by Master
from Remote; Transmit/receive data from optional software; Check status of door (Tamper,
Door monitor switch); Time zones – 62 total (2 fixed, 60 programmable); Set language; Set date
format, date and time; Edit holidays
Biometrics
Construction
Base Users
User Memory Options
Template Size
Verification Time
ID Number Length
Duress Code
Communications
RS232
RS485
RS422
Optional Modem
Optional Ethernet
Mounting Options
Table Mount
Surface Wall Mount
Recessed Wall Mount
Left Hand Option
Antimicrobial Coating on Platen
Blue Hand Outline
Biometrics
Construction
Base Users
User Memory Options
Template Size
Verification Time
ID Number Length
Duress Code
Communications
RS232
RS485
RS422
Optional Modem
Optional Ethernet
Mounting Options
Table Mount
Surface Wall Mount
Recessed Wall Mount
Left Hand Option
Antimicrobial Coating on Platen
Blue Hand Outline
Outdoor and Enclosure Options
Dimensions (HxWxD)
Power Requirements
Weight
Temperature
Operating
Non-Operating (Storage)
Relative Humidity
Operating
Non-Operating (Storage)
Inputs
Standard
Optional
HandKey Inputs
Outputs
Door Control
Card Reader Emulation Mode
Auxiliary Output
Outputs to peripheral devices
Event Monitoring
Tamper
ID Refused
Duress
Power Failure
Programmable HandKey
Commands
ID3D-R HandKey
Metal housing
256 Users
Expandable to 27,904 users
9 bytes
Less than one second for comparison to reference template
1-10 digits
1 leading digit, user definable
Printer Output Only: Baud rate 300 bps to 19,200 bps
Baud rate 300 bps to 19,200 bps
Baud rate 300 bps to 19,200 bps
Factory Installable Only: 2,400 baud
Factory Installable Only: 10 Base T
Standard
Option Available
Option Available
Left Handed configuration available
N/A
N/A
ID3D-RW available as whole unit with outdoor housing and integrated heaters
8.30 in. x 6.50 in. x 7.17 in.; 21.3 cm x 16.5 cm x 18.7 cm
12 to 24 VDC or 12 to 24 VAC 50-60 Hz 7 Watts (without options)
7.2 lbs. (3.3 kgs.) (Without back plate)
0° C to +45° C/32° F to 113° F
-10° C to +60° C/14° F to 140° F
20% to 80% RH Non-condensing
5% to 85% RH Non-condensing
26 bit, 9 bit ID Wiegand
Mag stripe, bar code, smart card
Request to Exit, Door switch input, 1 Auxilary input
Lock output
Wiegand (standard), mag stripe, bar code
1 programmable auxiliary
Audible or silent alarms, door locks, lighting systems
HandKey opened or removed
User not verified after user definable number of tries exceeded
User entered duress code digit
HandKey switched to optional battery power
Add/remove users; Set global operating thresholds; Set individual user data (authority or
threshold levels, time zones); Transmit data from Master to Remote; Data received by Master
from Remote; Transmit/receive data from optional software; Check status of door (Tamper,
Door monitor switch); Time zones – 62 total (2 fixed, 60 programmable); Set language; Set date
format, date and time; Edit holidays
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand 005027 08/11
Quick Reference
HandKey® II
Part Number: HK-2-F3
• Convenience of multiple credential options such as proximity,
magnetic stripe, barcode, HID iCLASS® and MIFARE®
• Field installable Ethernet module
• Outdoor enclosure options that make the HandKey II an ideal
solution for outdoor usage
• Field upgradable and expandable memory options from 512
to 259,072 users for scalable security that grows with your
needs
• Three user-definable outputs to connect to auxiliary
devices such as audible or silent alarms, door locks or
lighting systems
• Ability to write the industry’s most compact biometric
template on a card instead of in a database results in higher
security & unlimited user capacity
• Specially formulated antimicrobial coating with silver ions on
the platen to inhibit the growth of bacteria, mold and mildew
to mitigate hygiene concerns. The coating is safe and lasts
for the life of the product
• Blue hand outline on platen facilitates easy enrollment and
reduces error rates during verification
HandKey ID3D-R
Part Number: ID3D-R
• All-metal housing for increased durability and toughness
• Left handed configuration for drive-through applications and
entrance gates
• Recess-mount option for reduced obstruction at high traffic
areas
• Convenience of multiple credential options - magnetic stripe,
bar code
• Two user definable outputs to connect to auxiliary devices
such as audible or silent alarms, door locks or lighting systems
Biometric Access Control Quick Reference
Biometrics
Biometric Access
Control Products
ID3D-RW
Biometric HandKey with Standard
256 User Memory, Integrated Heater + Enclosure
Ideally suited for outdoor environments, the ID3D-RW enclosure
is constructed of heavy-gauge zinc-coated steel. It features a
sealed keypad, low-temperature display and a heated interior. This
is a fully integrated unit and comes complete with a HandKey and
an internal heater.
FX Enclosure (FX-ENCL)
Biometric HandKey Enclosure
Constructed from high impact UV resistant polycarbonate material,
the FX Enclosure provides a degree of protection against dusty,
dirty, or rainy environments. This enclosure has been designed so
that it can be added to an existing installation. When used with
an integrated heater option (INT-HTR), it provides a comfortable
heated platen against a cold climate.
TX Enclosure (TX-ENCL)
Biometric HandKey Enclosure
The TX Enclosure provides a higher degree of protection against
dusty, dirty, or rainy environments. When used with an integrated
heater option (INT-HTR), it provides a comfortable heated platen
against a cold climate.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, and HandKey are
trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other
countries. MIFARE is a trademark of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation.
Specifications subject to change. Please check with your system vendor for details. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004397
10/11
Biometric Hand Geometry Reader
Nothing is tougher!
Our HandKey II product is ideal for applications where
consistent and dependable security is of prime importance.
The product is easy to maintain, and provides an ideal mix
of convenience, security and peace of mind.
Top 10 reasons to select Hand Geometry
FIELD PROVEN RELIABILITY
1. Hundreds of thousands of HandKeys are installed all over
the world in diverse applications providing millions of error
free transactions every day
CONVENIENCE AND COST SAVINGS
2. Incredibly fast installation & intuitive enrollment increases
user convenience
3. Verification in less than 1 second makes it ideal for high throughput applications
4. High product quality + Low maintenance costs = Low total
cost of ownership
5. Eliminate the worry of lost, stolen or unauthorized transfer
of ID cards plus the cost of purchasing and maintaining
these cards
ELIMINATE PRIVACY CONCERNS
6. Hand Geometry technology is well accepted by end users as
there are NO fingerprints or palm prints taken and the user
does not leave behind any trace of their biometric data
AMAZING VERSATILITY
7. HandKeys can be used as standalone systems to protect
critical access points that can be easily integrated into
virtually every new or existing access control system in the
market today
8. Ability to customize user specific security levels, time zones,
holidays and languages based on your needs
9. Optional access control template management software
allows the HandKeys to form a system that communicates
alarms and transactions in real time, provides activity
reports, allows supervised on-site or remote user enrollment
and expiring privileges for temporary access
10.Environmental enclosures and integrated heater units make
the HandKey an ideal solution for outdoor usage
Features and Benefits
• Convenience of multiple credential options such as
proximity, magnetic stripe, barcode, HID iCLASS® and
MIFARE®
• Field installable Ethernet module
• Outdoor enclosure options that make the HandKey II an
ideal solution for outdoor usage
• Field upgradable and expandable memory options from
512 to 259,072 users for scalable security that grows
with your needs
• Three user-definable outputs to connect to auxiliary
devices such as audible or silent alarms, door locks or
lighting systems
• Ability to write the industry’s most compact biometric
template on a card instead of in a database results in
higher security & unlimited user capacity
• Specially formulated antimicrobial coating with silver
ions on the platen to inhibit the growth of bacteria,
mold and mildew to mitigate hygiene concerns. The
coating is safe and lasts for the life of the product
• Blue hand outline on the platen facilitates
easy enrollment and reduces error rates
during verification
HandKey® II Biometric HandReader
Biometrics
HandKey® II
Door control and monitoring
Each HandKey II is a complete, integrated door controller
providing lock operation, request-for-exit and alarm
monitoring. Biometric templates and decision-making
capability reside locally, ensuring your doors are always
secure and will continue to operate properly even if all
communication to the main access control system is lost.
Base Model
HandKey II
Description
HandKey with base memory for 512 users
Verification Time
≤ 1 second for comparison to reference template
ID Number Length
1 – 10 digits
Duress Code
1 leading digit, user definable
Communication
RS232: Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
RS422: Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
RS485: Baud rate 300 bps to 28,800 bps
Optional Modem: Baud rate 300 bps to 14,400 bps
Optional Ethernet: 10 Base T
Template Size
9 bytes
User Memory
512 users expandable to 259,072 users
Inputs
Standard: 26 bit, 9 bit ID Wiegand
Optional: Mag stripe, bar code, smart card
HandKey input: Request to Exit, Door switch
input,
2 auxiliary inputs
Outputs
Door control: Lock output
Card reader emulation mode: Wiegand, mag
stripe, bar code 1 programmable auxiliary
Outputs to peripheral devices: Audible or silent
alarms,door locks, lighting systems
Event Monitoring
Tamper: HandKey opened or removed
ID refused: User not verified after user definable number of tries exceeded
Duress: User entered duress code digit
Power failure: HandKey switched to optional
battery power
Programmable
HandKey Commands
• Add / remove users
• Set global operating thresholds
• Set individual user data (authority or
threshold levels, time zones)
• Transmit data from Master to Remote
• Data received by Master from Remote
• Transmit / receive data from optional software
• Check status of door (Tamper, Door monitor
switch)
• Time zones – 62 total (2 fixed, 60 programmable)
• Set language
• Set date format, date and time
• Edit holidays
Antimicrobial
Available on Platen
Blue Hand Outline
Available on Platen
Dimensions HxWxD
11.65 in. x 8.85 in. x 8.55 in.
29.6 cm x 22.5 cm x 21.7 cm
Stand-alone or fully integrated
HandKey readers can be used as a stand-alone unit
or as part of an integrated access control system. The
units easily integrate into existing systems using the card
reader emulation mode. Or, by using the HandNet
software for template
HandKey-II
Door Switch
management, thousands
of units can be linked
together to form a system
that communicates alarms
and transactions in real
time, provides activity,
user and systems reports,
Stand-alone operation lets you
provide security to a single
and allows supervised user
door at an affordable price
enrollment and deletions
at any reader. A variety of
communications options, including dial-up modems and
Ethernet, allow you to design a system that’s right for
your facilities.
In a network
Schlage’s HandNet software links a virtually unlimited
number of HandKey units into an integrated door
access control system. All alarms and transactions report
back in real time to the central computer, making door
and alarm monitoring easy and efficient. Activity, user
and system reports can be easily generated. The central
computer handles all hand template management
allowing supervised enrollment at any reader and
system wide deletions. An optional internal modem
lets you include remote site operations. Ethernet
communication is also available.
PC running HandNet
for Windows
(without options)
System Network
RS-485, Ethernet or Modem
Door Switch
Door
Lock
Power Requirements 12 to 24 VDC or 12 to 24 VAC 50-60 Hz 7 Watts
Door Switch
Door
Lock
Door Switch
Door
Lock
Weight
5.3 lbs. (2.4 kgs.) (Without battery back-up or
wall plate)
Temperature
Operating: 0 deg C to +45 deg C / 32 deg F to
113 deg F
Non-Operating (Storage): -10 deg C to +60 deg
C /14 deg F to 140 deg F
Relative Humidity
Operating: 20% to 80% RH Non-condensing
Non-operating (Storage): 5% to 85% RH Noncondensing
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, and HandKey are trademarks
of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. MIFARE is a
trademark of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Specifications subject to change.
Please check with your system vendor for details. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004535
10/11
Biometric Hand Geometry Reader
Nothing is tougher!
At Schlage biometrics we know that every product you specify
has to stand up to constant use and abuse. The all-metal
HandKeys ID3D-R and ID3D-RW are able to withstand the
rigors of daily use and abuse without fail.
Top 10 reasons to select Hand Geometry
Features and Benefits
FIELD PROVEN RELIABILITY
1. Hundreds of thousands of HandKeys are installed all over
the world in diverse applications providing millions of error
free transactions every day
• All-metal housing for increased durability
and toughness
• Left handed configuration option for
drive-through applications and entrance gates
• Recess-mount option for reduced obstruction
at high traffic areas
• Convenience of multiple credential options such as
magnetic stripe, bar code
• Integrated unit with heater and enclosure makes
ID3D-RW ideal for outdoor environments
• Two user definable outputs to connect to auxiliary
devices such as audible or silent alarms, door locks
or lighting systems
CONVENIENCE AND COST SAVINGS
2. Incredibly fast installation & intuitive enrollment increases
user convenience
3. Verification in less than 1 second makes it ideal for high
throughput applications
4. High product quality + Low maintenance costs = Low total
cost of ownership
5. Eliminate the worry of lost, stolen or unauthorized transfer
of ID cards plus the cost of purchasing and maintaining
these cards
ELIMINATE PRIVACY CONCERNS
6. Hand Geometry technology is well accepted by end users as
there are NO fingerprints or palm prints taken and the user
does not leave behind any trace of their biometric data
AMAZING VERSATILITY
7. HandKeys can be used as standalone systems to protect
critical access points that can be easily integrated into
virtually every new or existing access control system in the
market today
8. Ability to customize user specific security levels, time
zones, holidays and languages based on your needs
9. Optional access control template management software
allows the HandKeys to form a system that communicates
alarms and transactions in real time, provides activity
reports, allows supervised on-site or remote user enrollment
and expiring privileges for temporary access
10. Environmental enclosures and integrated heater units
make the HandKey an ideal solution for outdoor usage
HandKey® ID3D-R Biometric HandReader
Biometrics
HandKey® ID3D-R
Stand Alone System
Base Model
ID3D-R / ID3D-RW
The HandKey can operate as a complete stand-alone
access control station. Door lock operation and alarm
monitoring of the door status is provided. An external
alarm circuit is included for operating an audio or visual
alarm.
Description
HandKey with base memory for 256 users
Verification Time
≤ 1 second for comparison to reference template
ID Number Length
1 – 10 digits
Duress Code
1 leading digit, user definable
Communication
RS232 (Printer output only): Baud rate 300 bps
to 19,200 bps
RS422: Baud rate 300 bps to 19,200 bps
RS485: Baud rate 300 bps to 19,200 bps
Optional Ethernet: 10 Base T
Template Size
9 bytes
User Memory
256 users expandable to 27,904 users
Inputs
Standard: 26 bit, 9 bit ID Wiegand
Optional: Mag stripe, bar code
HandKey Input: Request to Exit, Door switch
input, 1 Auxilary input
Outputs
Door control: Lock output
Card reader emulation mode: Wiegand, mag
stripe, bar code 1 programmable auxiliary
Outputs to peripheral devices: Audible or silent
alarms, door locks, lighting systems
Event Monitoring
Tamper: HandKey opened or removed
ID refused: User not verified after user definable
number of tries exceeded
Duress: User entered duress code digit
Power failure: HandKey switched to optional
battery power
Programmable
HandKey Commands
• Add / remove users
• Set global operating thresholds
• Set individual user data (authority or
threshold levels, time zones)
• Transmit data from Master to Remote
• Data received by Master from Remote
• Transmit / receive data from optional software
• Check status of door (Tamper, Door monitor
switch)
• Time zones – 62 total (2 fixed, 60 programmable)
• Set language
• Set date format, date and time
• Edit holidays
Antimicrobial
NA
Blue Hand Outline
NA
Dimensions HxWxD
8.30 in. x 6.50 in. x 7.17 in. (ID3D-R Dimensions)
21.3 cm x 16.5 cm x 18.7 cm (ID3D-R Dimensions)
Third Party System Interface
The HandKey can easily be integrated into new or
existing third party access control systems using its
card reader emulation output. All Wiegand, proximity
and magnetic stripe formats can be accommodated. No
modifications are needed to the third party system. The
HandKeys can be interconnected via RS-485 twisted pair
for hand data transfer.
Power Requirements 12 to 24 VDC or 12 to 24 VAC 50-60 Hz 7 Watts
(without options)
Weight
7.2 lbs. (3.3 kgs.) (Without back plate)
Temperature
Operating: 0 deg C to +45 deg C / 32 deg F to
113 deg F
Non-Operating (Storage): -10 deg C to +60 deg C
/ 14 deg F to 140 deg F
Relative Humidity
Operating: 20% to 80% RH Non-condensing
Non-operating (Storage): 5% to 85% RH
Non-condensing
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, and HandKey
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States
and other countries. Specifications subject to change. Please check with your system
vendor for details. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
IR AC-1487
07/11
for HandKey®
Schlage offers a number of accessories for access control HandReader terminals. From mounting kits and
readers to networking options and memory expansions, we’ll help you create the solution to meet your
specific needs.
Base Model
HandKey II
ID3D-R / ID3D-RW
Card Readers
Prox: Externally top mounted HID prox reader.
Factory option only
HID iCLASS®: iCLASS reader,Factory option only
SC-100: MIFARE® reader, Factory option only
CR-2: Mag stripe wall mount card reader
BC-100: Bar code reader, wall mount swipe
Prox: NA
iCLASS: NA
SC-100: NA
CR-2: Mag stripe wall mount card reader
CR-2L: Mag stripe, top mount swipe card reader
CR-3L: Mag stripe, side mount swipe card reader
BC-100: Bar code reader, wall mount swipe
Memory
EM-801-F3: Field upgradable memory
expansion up to 9,728 users
EM-803-F3: Field upgradable memory
expansion up to 32,512 users
EM-813-F3: Memory expansion up to 64,768 users
EM-823-F3: Memory expansion up to 129,536 users
EM-833-F3: Memory expansion up to 194,304 users
EM-843-F3: Memory expansion up to 259,072 users
EM-600: Memory expansion up to 3,328 users
EM-602: Memory expansion up to 9,728 users
EM-604: Memory expansion up to 27,904 users
Communication
EN-200: Field upgradable Ethernet
communication module 10baseT
MD-500: Internal Dial-up modem
EN-100: Ethernet communication
module 10baseT
MD-200: Internal Dial-up modem
HandKey® Biometric Terminal Accessories
Biometrics
Biometric Terminal Accessories
Base Model
HandKey II
ID3D-R / ID3D-RW
Power Options
PS-110: Power supply, 120VAC to
13.5 VDC
PS-220: Power supply, 220VAC to
13.5 VDC
BB-250: Optional battery backup
IS-400: Power supply, 120VAC
to 13.5 VDC
PS-220: NA
BB-100: Optional battery backup
Mounting
TM-100: Table top secure mount for
flat surfaces
TM-100: NA
WM-200: Recessed wall mount kit
WM-201: Surface wall mount kit
Left Hand Option
NA
LH-100: Left hand version of ID3D-R
LH-100RW: Left hand version of ID3D-RW
Network Accessories
DC-102: Data converter for 4 wire system,
RS-232 to RS-422 with 120V, 60Hz
power supply
DC-102 with 220V, 50Hz power supply
DC-104: Data converter for 2 or 4 wire
systems, RS232 to RS485/RS 422 with
120V, 60Hz power supply
DC-104 with 220V, 50Hz power supply
DC-102: Data converter for 4 wire system,
RS-232 to RS-422 with 120V, 60Hz
power supply
DC-102 with 220V, 50Hz power supply
DC-104: Data converter for 2 or 4 wire
systems, RS232 to RS485/RS 422 with
120V, 60Hz power supply
DC-104 with 220V, 50Hz power supply
Mounting Accessories for HandKey® E-Series
Recessed Wall
Mount Kit
Surface Wall
Mount Kit
Part Number:
WM-200
Part Number:
WM-201
[INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE and the SCHLAGE logo are trademarks of
Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. MIFARE
is a trademark of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Specifications subject
to change. Please check with your system vendor for details. All other trademarks are the property
of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004400
10/11
for the HandKey® Series
ID3D-RW
Overview
Schlage biometrics provides various options to protect your
HandKeys® from the elements. Three different, proven solutions
are available to ensure your HandKeys keep performing
regardless of your environment.
ID3D-RW
Biometric HandKey with Standard 256 User
Memory, Integrated Heater + Enclosure
Ideally suited for outdoor environments, the ID3D-RW is constructed of heavy-gauge zinc-coated steel. It features a sealed
keypad, low-temperature display and a heated interior. This is a
fully integrated unit and comes complete with a HandKey and
an internal heater.
FX Enclosure
FX Enclosure (FX-ENCL)
Biometric HandKey Enclosure
Constructed from high impact UV resistant polycarbonate
material, the FX Enclosure provides a degree of protection against
dusty, dirty, or rainy environments. This enclosure has been
designed so that it can be added to an existing installation. When
used with an integrated heater option (INT-HTR), it provides a
comfortable heated platen against a cold climate.
TX Enclosure (TX-ENCL)
Biometric HandKey Enclosure
TX Enclosure
The TX Enclosure provides a higher degree of protection
against dusty, dirty, or rainy environments. When used with an
integrated heater option (INT-HTR), it provides a comfortable
heated platen against a cold climate.
HandKey® Enclosure Options
Biometrics
Enclosure Options
Specifications
ID3D-RW
FX Enclosure
TX Enclosure
Part Number
ID3D-RW
FX-ENCL
TX-ENCL
Temperature Range
-35F to 120F / -37C to 49C
-20F to 120F / -29C to 49C
-45F to 120F / -43C to 49C
11.75 in x 8.00 in x 8.75 in
14.75 in x 12.00 in x 10.50 in
23.00 in x 14.00 in x 11.25 in
29.9 cm x 20.3 cm x 22.2 cm
37.5 cm x 30.5 cm x 26.7 cm
58.4 cm x 35.6 cm x 28.6 cm
Cross Weight
(including reader)
23.0 lbs / 10.4 kg
7.3 lbs / 3.3 kg
45.0 lbs / 20.4 kg
HandReader Models
ID3D-RW
HK-2-F3
HK-2-F3
Factory installed option only,
Factory installed option only,
Model No. INT-HTR
Model No. INT-HTR
Dimensions H x W x D
Heater
Standard
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, HandPunch
and HandKey are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the
United States and other countries. Specifications subject to change. Please check with
your system vendor for details. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5278
07/11
for Windows
Overview
HandNet for Windows lets you control and monitor a network
of HandKey readers. With just one comprehensive program, you
can monitor activity and alarms on all readers, and control the
access of each user.
Features and Benefits
• Automatic hand template management feature allows
template distribution from an enrollment HandKey to
other selected HandKeys thus eliminating the need for a
user to be enrolled at every HandReader
• Independent door control capability without the need
for an access control panel
• Monitor multiple remote sites from the convenience of
your PC
• Remote enrollment feature enables a HandKey to be
controlled from the software. For example, a guard
behind a glass partition or a supervisor in a distant
office can enroll new users without physically going to
the HandKey
• Assign temporary access to selected users by specifying
a user’s access start and stop days and times
• Manage archive activity to keep old information
available for reports
• Manage alarms for additional security
HandNet® for Windows
Biometrics
HandNet®
Specifications
HandNet For Windows
HandNet Lite
Computer
Pentium 233 MHz or higher
(Minimum 133 MHz)
Intel 666 MHz or higher
Operating System
Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2
Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3
Windows Vista Business Service Pack 1
Windows 7 Pro Compatible 32 Bit
Windows 7 Pro Compatible 64 Bit
Windows XP SP3, Vista Business SP1
Windows Server 2003 SP1 or greater
Windows 2000 Professional or Server Editions
SP4, and Windows 95 & 98
Drive
CD ROM for installation
CD ROM for installation
Hard Disk
50 MB Minimum, 10 MB Free space
60 GB Minimum, 10 GB Free space
Monitor
SVGA Color, 1024 x 768
recommended(800 x 600 minimum)
SVGA Color, 1024 x 768
recommended(800 x 600 minimum)
Memory
32 MB (Minimum 16 MB)
4 Gb (Minimum 2 GB)
Database
MS Access
MS SQL Server 2000 MSDE
HK-2-F3, ID3D-R / RW
HK-2-F3, ID3D-R/RW, DX-2000,
DX-2100, DX-2200, DX-2400
Template Managements
Available
Available
Supported Communications
RS232, RS485, Ethernet,
Modem RS232, RS485, Ethernet
RS232, RS485, Ethernet, Modem RS232, RS485,
Ethernet
Smart Card Compatability
NA
HID iCLASS®, MIFARE®, MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
Time Zones
Available
Available
Reports
Available
Limited – use reports from an access control panel
Door Control
Available
NA – use panel door control
Alarms
Available
NA – use panel alarms
Open Door Remotely
Available
NA – use panel door control
Network Readers
Available
Available
Archive Activity
Available
Available – database backup
Remote Enrollment
Available
Available
Products Supported
OPTIONS
HN-2-T1
Manages up to 5 HandKeys
HN-2-T2
Manages up to 25 HandKeys
HN-2-T3
Manages an UNLIMITED number of HandKeys
HandNet Lite
Software program to manage up to 32 HandKeys
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo and HandKey are
trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other
countries. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are
trademarks of HID Corporation. Specifications subject to change. Please check with your system
vendor for details. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004399
11/11
Training Course Outline
Overview
Schlage biometrics offers training courses to provide you with
the tools and services needed to optimize the performance and
reliability of the HandKey® and related software solutions. Our
comprehensive offering will help reacquaint you with HandKey
hardware, installation, and its relationship with software
operation. Training is regularly scheduled at our factory location
or can be delivered at your location.
The HandKey Training Course Covers:
• Introduction to Biometrics
• Installation
• Access Control Product Line
• Hands-on Training
• Options & Accessories
• Troubleshooting
The Access Control HandKey Software Training Course Covers:
• Comparison of HandNet® for Windows vs. HandNet Lite
• Overview of HandNet for Windows & HandNet Lite
• Installing HandNet for Windows & HandNet Lite
• Adding Users
• Connecting to the HandKey
• Creating Reports
• Archiving
• Database Backup and Restore
• Troubleshooting
Schlage Biometrics
ACCESS CONTROL Training Courses
SBT-HK
1-Day Schlage Biometrics Training - HandKey
SBT-HNWL
1-Day Schlage Biometrics HandNet for Windows
& HandNet Lite Software Training
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, HandKey and
HandNet are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United
States and other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Training Courses
Keeping installers, technicians, and sales people current
on the HandKey features, capabilities, troubleshooting
techniques, and installation guidelines is key to profitability
and maintaining customer satisfaction.
The goals of these courses are to provide a working
knowledge of the HandKey hardware and software and be
able to perform basic troubleshooting. The Schlage HandKey
training classes are technically oriented and feature handson training through classroom exercises.
Biometrics Training Course Outline
Biometrics
Biometrics for
Access Control
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
002872
10/11
System Components
System Components
The Systems Components category features a variety of devices which are
utilized as part of an access control system. Products include electric strikes,
electromagnetic locks, power supplies, and system accessories.
Electric Strikes
Overview
The 6300 Series is a surface mounted electric
Electric strikes provide remote release of a locked
strike which is ideal for aftermarket applications. It
door, allowing a door to be opened without
can be used with the Von Duprin 98/99 as well as
retracting the latch bolt. Von Duprin offers a
most rim exit devices and can be mounted on any
selection of strikes for a variety of applications and
hollow metal, aluminum or wood frame.
door preps.
The 5100 Series has been designed for medium
Features
The 6000 Series features stainless steel
construction for heavy duty applications. The 6100
duty applications, specifically to control traffic
flow through interior and exterior openings in
retail and commercial facilities.
Series is designed for use with rim exit devices and
Benefits
the 6200 Series is designed for use with mortise or
Electric strikes can be used in standalone
cylindrical locks. Both the 6100 and 6200 Series
applications or as part of a sophisticated access
are available with a variety of options including AC
control system and can be deployed on a variety
operation, dual switch monitoring, entry buzzer,
of openings. In many cases electric strikes are
fail secure and fail safe.
an ideal solution for end users who are ready to
migrate from mechanical to electronic access
control.
System Components
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
For retrofit applications, the 40 Series and 70
Schlage offers a broad selection of
Series electromagnetic locks are fully featured
electromagnetic locks – with feature and
and cost effective. The 40 Series is rated to 500
function sets to address a variety of applications.
lbs and the 70 Series is rated to 1000 lbs of hold
Whether it’s securing a hospital laboratory,
force.
monitoring a controlled area in an airport or
providing traffic control for doors in a commercial
or education building, Schlage electromagnetic
locks are designed to exceed the standards
set by the Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (BHMA).
Features
The newly designed M400 Series
electromagnetic locks are available in two
configurations to meet your specific security
needs. The M420/450/490 provides basic
security while the M420P/450P/490P provides
intelligent sensing and reporting features needed
to integrate with access control systems. The
M400 Series is available with BHMA hold force
ratings of 500 lbs, 1000 lbs and 1500 lbs.
Schlage offers a variety of electromagnetic locks
for specialty applications including the M490DE
for delayed egress, 490G for gates, GF3000 shear
locks for mortised/vertical doors, and the 320M
for sliding door applications.
Benefits
The M400 Series electromagnetic locks were
redesigned with a new bayonet mounting feature
that allows the installer to have their hands free
during the mounting process. The M400 Series
electromagnetic locks are non-handed and
symmetrical, allowing for optimum placement of
the magnet no matter the application.
The 40 and 70 Series Electromagnetic
locks feature common templates for cost
effective retrofit installations. The specialty
electromagnetic locks are designed with specific
feature sets which optimize performance
in a variety of unique, harsh and complex
environments.
Overview
Benefits
The PS900 Series is a consolidated line of power
Common to the line of PS900 Series power
supplies and accessories that offer enhanced
supplies is a constant output rating at both 12v
flexibility and functionality specific to the
and 24v settings, universal 120 VAC to 240 VAC
changing needs of the access control market.
input, and polarized option board connectors.
The PS900 Series can be used in a variety of
New fire alarm interface board mounting allows
applications to convert high voltage AC power
outputs to be configured as switched (power cut)
into the low voltage DC outputs required by most
or unswitched (power continues) when signal
access control devices. The PS900 Series protects
provided.
devices downstream by providing Class 2*, filtered
and regulated power. The full line is UL 294
certified.
Installation is simplified by utilizing a flat
mounting design and polarized locking connectors
for option boards. This new design eliminates
Features
the need for racks and side connectors. The flat
The PS900 Series features three Schlage
mounting of the option boards also provides for
branded models; PS902 - 2 amp, PS904 - 4
easier access to the terminal blocks for connection
amp and PS906 – 6 amp. The PS900 Series also
of electrified devices (such as electrified strikes,
features the Von Duprin PS914 – 4 amp with
electromagnetic locks, card readers, etc).
high in-rush which is designed specifically for
use with electrified exit devices. These PS900
Series power supplies can be outfitted with a
variety of distribution options including basic
fuse protection, simple relay, and advanced
logic providing complex sequencing and timing
functions.
*Note: PS906 can provide Class 2 rated outputs when used with 900-8P distribution board.
System Components
Power Supplies
System Components
System Accessories
Overview
The 8200 Series consoles provide door control
System Accessories include a variety of devices
and monitoring for up to eight zones. The 8204 is
that enable specific functionality whether in
used for one to four zones and the 8208 for one
standalone applications or as part of networked
to eight zones.
access control systems. The category is comprised
of pushbuttons, key switches, request to exit
bars, monitoring stations & consoles, exit sensors,
electric horns and more.
The 800 Series monitoring stations can provide
monitoring for a single zone with up to 2 LED
indicators. The 801 unit includes an audible and
visual indication of lock status and delay activation.
Features
The 660 Series Mini Station Control is designed
The specially designed 620 Series heavy-duty
for concealed desk application, and it is used to
pushbuttons and 700 Series general purpose
release an electric or electronic locking mechanism
pushbuttons, as well as the 650 Series heavy-
from a remote location.
duty keyswitches, offer momentary or maintained
Electric horns are designed for use as an
SPDT or DPDT contact configurations.
immediate local audible warning device
The 700 Series Pushbuttons are used to control
incorporated in a security system. Horns are 12
the ingress and/or egress of a door.
or 24VDC, field selectable and have eight sound
The 620 to 631 Series are heavy duty and have
multiple button configurations and finish options.
The 650 Series keyswitches utilize an innovative
magnetic spring design which allows installers to
tones up to 3000Hz.
Magnetic door position switches can be used to
monitor a wide range of conditions for doors, roof
hatches, gates or the proximity of any two objects.
configure both clockwise and counterclockwise
Armored door cords are used when installing
key turn direction as well as momentary or
electric exit devices or electric locks and provide
maintained action in seconds.
a simple and economical solution for transferring
The 740 Series Emergency Break Glass Releases
power from frame to door.
are designed for use as emergency releases of
The PB405 PowerBolt is a mortise, right angle
non-designated egress doors such as in individual
deadbolt with which is available with fail safe or
and partitioned laboratories, secluded testing
fail secure options.
areas, or other isolated work rooms that are
purposely provided with exit doors.
The 672/692 Series Request-to-Exit Bars are
non-latching releasing devices which allow egress
at doors with electric locking devices, such as
electromagnetic locks. The SCAN II is a passive
infrared (PIR) sensor specifically designed for
request-to-exit applications.
Benefits
System accessories allow you to customize each
opening to meet specific security and safety
needs. Schlage offers a variety of the most
popular accessories designed for medium to
heavy duty applications. By choosing Schlage
components you can be assured that the system
will meet the requirements of the job, whether
new construction or aftermarket.
PS902
Features
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
AC Primary Fuse Size
Battery Fuse Size
DC Output Protection
AC Input Termination
DC Output Termination
Operating Temperature
Distribution/Option Board Connectors
Fire Alarm Board Connector
Enclosure
Operating Temperature
Option Boards:
900-BB: Battery Backup
900-BBK: Battery Backup Kit
900-FA: Fire Alarm
PS904
Von Duprin Supplies
PS906
120V/240V AC, 50/60 Hz, universal input
2 amp @ 12V or 24V DC, 4 amp @ 12V or 24V DC, 6 amp @ 12V or 24V DC,
field selectable with
field selectable with
field selectable with
jumper,
jumper,
jumper,
240m Vpp max ripple,
240m Vpp max ripple,
240m Vpp max ripple,
5% regulation
5% regulation
5% regulation
3.15A, 250V, 5 x 20mm
SLOW-BLOW
4 amp, High Inrush
@ 12V or 24V DC,
field selectable with
jumper,
360m Vpp max ripple,
5% regulation
6.3A, 250V, 5 x 20mm
SLOW-BLOW
4A, 250V, 5 x 20mm
6.3A, 250V, 5 x 20mm
SLOW-BLOW
SLOW-BLOW
7.5A 32V ATO Blade Style
Overload Protection - current limited foldback circuit
3 position terminal block with protective cover; wire capacity 10 AWG max
2 position terminal block with protective cover; wire capacity 12 AWG max
32 - 120°F (0 -49°C)
1
2
3
2
Yes
No
No
No
14 in. (h) x 12 in. (w) x 4 in. (d)
32˚F - 120˚F (0˚C - 49˚C)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
(Must be installed on
distribution boards)
Y
Y
Y
(Must be installed on
distribution boards)
Y
Y
Y
(Must be installed on
distribution boards)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
900-2RS: 2 Relay EL Control Board
900-2Q: 2 Relay QEL Control Board
900-4R: 4 Relay Output Board
900-4RL: 4 Relay Logic Board
900-8F: Fused 8 Zone Distribution Board
900-8P: PTC 8 Zone Distribution Board
Certifications
UL294
Class 2
RoHS
FCC Part 15
PS914
*Note: Class 2 rated outputs can be provided using 900-8P distribution board in conjunction with the PS906.
System Components
Schlage Power Supplies
System Components
M400 High Security Mag Locks
M420
Features
Hold Force
Input Voltage
Current Draw
Features
Automatic Voltage Sensor (AVS)
Voltage Suppression
Internal Plunger Switch
Auto Relocking Switch (ARS)
Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS)
Door/Gate Status Monitoring (DPS/DSM)
Relock Time Delay
Anti-Tamper Switch (ATS)
MBS Indicator (LED)
Anti-Tailgate Feature
Surface Mount
Mortise Mount
Top Jam (inswinging doors)
Herculite Door Bracket
Bayonet Mounting Bracket
Universal Mounting Bracket
Field Configurable Handing
Lock Dimensions (H xW x L)
Weight
Certifications
BHMA Grade 1
UL1034
Ul10C
cUL
CSFM
NFPA101
BOCA
M420P
M450
M450P
M490
M490P M490DE M490DEP
M490G
500 lbs.
12V/24V DC
0.75A @ 12V DC
0.38A @ 24V DC
1000 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.75A @ 12V DC
0.38A @ 24V DC
1500 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.65A @ 12V DC
0.35A @ 24V DC
1500 lbs
12V/24V DC
.75A @ 12V DC
.45A @ 24V DC
1500 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.65A @ 12V DC
0.35A @ 24V DC
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3 in. x 11 in.
x 1.75 in.
14 lbs
-
Y
Y
Y
O
O
-
Y
Y
Y
O
O
-
Y
Y
Y
O
O
Y
Y
O
O
Y
Y
2.5 in. x 9 in.
x 1.375 in.
6 lbs
Y
O
O
Y
Y
3 in. x 10.25 in.
x 1.75 in.
10 lbs
Y
O
O
Y
Y
3 in. x 12.5 in.
x 1.75 in.
14 lbs
Y
Y
3HR
Y
Pending
-
Y
Y
3HR
Y
Pending
-
Y
Y
3HR
Y
Pending
-
-
Y
Y
Y
O
O
Y
O
Y
Y
3 in. x 12.5 in.
x 3.0625 in.
16 lbs
Y
3HR
Y
Pending
Y
Y
-
GF3000SM
(Surface Mount)
GF3000
(Mortise Mount)
40/70 Standard Duty Mag Locks
320M
40
70
3000 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.90A @ 12V DC
0.45A @ 24V DC
500 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.23A @12V DC
0.45A @ 24V DC
500 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.32A @ 12V DC
0.15A @ 24V DC
1000 lbs
12V/24V DC
0.25A @12V DC
0.12A @ 24V DC
Features
Automatic Voltage Sensor (AVS)
Voltage Suppression
Internal Plunger Switch
Auto Relocking Switch (ARS)
Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS)
Y
Y
S
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Door/Gate Status Monitoring (DPS/DSM)
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1.375 in. x 7 in.
x 1.875 in.
6 lbs.
Y
O
1.875 in. x 8 in.
x 1625 in.
Y
O
3 in. x 8 in.
x 1.875 in.
8 lbs.
Y
Y
3HR
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
1HR
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
1HR
Y
Y
-
Features
Hold Force
Input Voltage
Current Draw
Relock Time Delay
Anti-Tamper Switch (ATS)
MBS Indicator (LED)
Anti-Tailgate Feature
Surface Mount
Mortise Mount
Top Jam (inswinging doors)
Herculite Door Bracket
Bayonet Mounting Bracket
Universal Mounting Bracket
Field Configurable Handing
Lock Dimensions (H x W x L)
Weight
Certifications
BHMA Grade 1
UL1034
Ul10C
cUL
CSFM
NFPA101
BOCA
Y
Y
Y
1.25 in. X 9.8125 in.
X 1.5 in.
9 lbs.
Y
3HR
Y
Y
-
Y
1.5 in. X 9.5 in.
X 1.5 in.
7 lbs.
System Components
Specialty Mag Locks
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand 005028 12/11
Strikes for Rim Exit Devices
Models 6111, 6112, 6113 & 6121
Overview
Von Duprin electric strikes are known for their reliability, durability
and security. The 6100 Series is designed to withstand abuse. Its
heavy duty stainless steel construction is fully UL1034 and UL10C
listed and ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 1500 lb. hold force rated.
6100 Series electric strikes are designed for use with a variety
of Rim Exit Devices. They interface with the latch mechanism
of the exit device. The movable lip (keeper) allows a door to
open even when the latch bolt is extended. This feature, called
remote release provides added benefits such as increased
convenience and efficiency. The 6100 Series also provides
added security and traffic control.
6100 Series electric strikes can be used for retrofit applications
or new construction. To assure the proper selection of an electric
strike on new applications, lockset compatibility charts are shown
on the next page. When using a lockset not listed or when
retrofitting a strike to an existing application, please contact
Von Duprin Technical Support for application assistance.
The power failure mode of the 6100 can be specified at the
time of order. Fail secure is available for fire rated openings. In
a fail secure application the door is normally locked. To unlock
the door power must be applied. Fail safe strikes which are
commonly used for life safety applications are non-fire rated.
To unlock a fail safe strike power is removed. The 6100 comes
standard 24 VDC; 12 VDC and AC operation are optional.
Features and Benefits
•• Non-handed design provides greater flexibility
•• Strike box is adjustable to compensate for
misalignment of the door or frame
•• Two piece plug connectors are furnished for ease of
installation and for removal during strike servicing
•• ANSI 156.5 Grade 1 1500 lb. hold force rated
•• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant & UL10C Electric Strike
for Fire Door
•• Six finishes available to suite with existing hardware
•• Durable stainless steel construction
•• 24 VDC standard with 12 VDC and AC operation
optional
6100 Series Electric Strikes
System Components
6100 Series
Rim Exit Device Compatibility
6111, 6112, 6113 & 6121 Strikes
6100 Series Specifications
12VDC
24VDC
Manufacturer
Device
Resistance in Ohms +/- 10% @ 70 F
21
82
Von Duprin
Watt-seated @ 70 F
7.5
8
Amps-seated @ 70 F
0.6
0.33
22, 33A, 35A, 55*, 88, 98, 99
8827 LBR† x Pullman latch Non-Fire rated
9827 LBR† x Pullman latch Non-Fire rated
9927 LBR† x Pullman latch Non-Fire rated
Amps-inrush @ 70 F
0.6
0.33
Falcon Monarch **
XX-R, 18-R, 19-R, 24-R, 25-R
Falcon Doromatic
1790
Precision**
2100
Sargent
2800, 6500, 6800, 8500, 8800, 9500,
9800***, 9898
Yale
1500, 700
Wiring
*
**
***
†
Note:
Strike must be factory modified, specify when using with a
55 Rim device
Deadlocking feature will not properly function, consult factory
Panic only, NO Fire rated
6111 is recommended for LBR applications
When using a lockset not listed or when retrofitting an
existing application, please contact Von Duprin Technical
Support for application assistance
AC
AC with Buzzer
DC
DC with Buzzer
Optional DS (FSE Shown)
Model Specifications
Model #
Retrofits Model
6111
6112
6113
6121
VD 3031
FA 310-4
VD 3011 or 3021
FA 310-4-100
Latchbolt Throw
/”
34
Face Plate Length
Backbox Depth
6”
9”
6”
9 1/8 ”
1 3/4 ”
1 3/4 ”
1 15/16 ”
N/A
Lockset
Rim Exit Device
Single, Double Door with
Mullion
# Doors
Door/Frame Type
Hollow Metal, Aluminum & Wood
Blade Stop Shim
Options
Double Door
without Mullion
Single
Yes
No
Yes
DS or DS-LC (Dual
Monitor Switches)
Yes
EB (Entry Buzzer Fail Secure Only)
Yes
Certifications
No
UL1034, UL10C, ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1 1500 lb. Hold force rated
Application Notes
For use with rim exit devices
on single doors or double
doors with mullion applications. 1/2“ projection
Blade Stop Shim 010055-XX
available for use on cased
opening or blade stop
frames. Specify when using
55 rim devices. May also be
used with Vertical Rod exit
devices noted on previous
page x Pullman latch LBR
Non-fired rated.
For use with rim exit devices
on single door applications.
Designed to replace Folger
Adam 310-4, minor fame
prep modification required.
/ “ projection Blade Stop
Shim 010055-XX available
for use on cased opening
or blade stop frames. NonFire rated.
Non-fire rated. For use with
rim exit devices on double
door applications without
mullion. Strike mounts on
inactive leaf. Replace Folger
Adam 310-4-100.
1 2
Note: 16 VDC and 28 VDC solenoid are sold as replacement parts for existing strikes. Please contact Customer Care for details.
Dimensions
6111
6113
1 5/8"
(41mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
6"
(152mm)
2 3/16"
(56mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
6"
(152mm)
Minimum
Clearance
7/8"
(22mm)
9/16"
(14mm)
2 1/4"
(57mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
13/16"
(21mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
Minimum
Clearance
7/8"
(22mm)
6112
1 15/16"
(49mm)
6121
3/4"
(19mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
2 1/2"
(64mm)
1 11/16"
(43mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
9"
(229mm)
2 9/16"
(65mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
9/16"
(14mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1 5/8"
(41mm)
9 1/8"
(232mm)
Ordering Information
Model
Power Failure
Mode
Dual Switch*
Voltage
Rectifier Kit*
Finish
Buzzer*
6112 – FSE – DS – 24 – S024 – US3 – EB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
–
–
–
*Optional
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
1 Model
6111
6112
6113
6121
4 Voltage (VDC)
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
24
Low voltage DC power
12
Low voltage DC power
If AC power is required specify rectifier kit below.
5 Rectifier Kit (Optional)
SO12
S024
2 Power Failure Mode
FSE
FS
Fail Secure. Requires power to be applied
to unlock the strike lip. On loss of power,
the strike lip is locked. Fire rated.
Fail Safe. Requires power to be applied to
lock the strike lip. On loss of power, the
strike lip is unlocked. Non-Fire Rated.
3 Dual Switch (Optional)
DS
DS-LC
Monitors latch bolt & lock status. DS
Switches rated at 24 VDC 50 milliampere
- 2 Amps.
Optional for computer monitoring.
Monitors latch bolt & lock status. DS
switches rated 24 VDC 50 milliampere
or less.
Converts 12 VAC voltage to 12 VDC to
operate the solenoid
Converts 24 VAC voltage to 24 VDC to
operate the solenoid
6 Finish
US Number/Von Duprin Number
US3/85
US4/84
US10/06
US10B/86
US32/31
US32D/32
Plated Polished Brass on Stainless Steel
Plated Dull Brass on Stainless Steel
Plated Dull Bronze on Stainless Steel
Plated Dark Bronze on Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel, Polished
Stainless Steel, Satin
7 Buzzer (Optional)
EB
Entry Buzzer. Only available if Fail Secure
(FSE) is specified.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, Von Duprin, the Von Duprin logo and Falcon are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand
plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Precision is a trademark of Stanley Black &
Decker. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005282
04/12
Overview
Von Duprin electric strikes are known for their reliability, durability
and security. The 6200 Series is designed to withstand abuse. Its
heavy duty stainless steel construction is fully UL1034 and UL10C
listed and ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 1500lb. hold force rated.
6200 Series electric strikes are designed for use with a variety
of mortise or cylindrical locksets as well as mortise exit devices.
It interfaces with the latch mechanism of the exit device. The
6200 Series movable lip (keeper) allows a door to open even
when the latch bolt is extended. This feature, called remote
release provides added benefits such as increased convenience
and efficiency. The 6200 Series also provides added security
and traffic control.
6200 Series electric strikes can be used for retrofit applications
or new construction. To assure the proper selection of an electric
strike on new applications, lockset compatibility charts are shown
on the next page. When using a lockset not listed or when
retrofitting a strike to an existing application, please contact Von
Duprin Technical Support for application assistance.
The power failure mode of the 6200 Series can be specified at the
time of order. Fail secure is available for fire rated openings. In a
fail secure application the door is normally locked. To unlock the
door power must be applied. Fail safe strikes which are commonly
used for life safety applications are non-fire rated. To unlock a fail
safe strike power is removed. The 6200 Series comes standard with
24 VDC; 12 VDC and AC operation are optional.
Features and Benefits
•• Non handed design provides greater flexibility
•• Strike box is adjustable to compensate for
misalignment of the door or frame
•• Two piece plug connectors are furnished for ease of
installation and for removal during strike servicing.
•• ANSI 156.5 Grade 1 1500lb. hold force rated
•• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant & UL10C Electric Strike
for Fire Door
•• Six finishes available to suite with existing hardware
•• Durable stainless steel construction
•• 24 VDC standard with 12 VDC and AC operation
optional
6200 Series Electric Strikes
Strikes for Mortise or Cylindrical Devices
Models 6210, 6211, 6211AL, 6211WF,
6212, 6212WF, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6216, 6221,
6222, 6223, 6224, 6224AL, 6225 & 6226
System Components
6200 Series
6200 Series Specifications
12VDC
24VDC
Resistance in Ohms +/- 10% @ 70 F
21
82
Watt-seated @ 70 F
7.5
8
Amps-seated @ 70 F
0.6
0.33
Amps-inrush @ 70 F
0.6
0.33
Wiring
AC
Mortise Lockset Compatibility
6211, 6211AL, 6211WF, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221,
6222, 6223, 6224, 6224AL, 6225 & 6226 Strikes
Manufacturer
Model Number
Von Duprin
7500
Adams Rite
4510, 4710
Baldwin
6000
Best
24H, 30H
Corbin
9000
Falcon
M2300, M2500, M2600, M3300, M3500,
M3600
Precision
Mortise
Russwin
Mortise
Sargent
7700, 8100, 9000
Schlage
L9000, K30, K40, K50, K60
Yale
7030, 7130, 8600, 8700
AC with Buzzer
DC
Note: Von Duprin cannot guarantee compatibility as other manufacturer’s
designs may change without notice.
Mortise Lockset Compatibility
6210
Manufacturer
Model Number
Von Duprin
7500
Best
30H (Not 45H/47H)
Corbin/Russwin
ML2200, 5000, 9000, CR2200 (Not 2000)
Falcon
M100, M200, M300, M400, M500, M600
Sargent
7700, 8100 (Not 7800/8200)
Schlage
L9000
Yale
8700 (Not 8800)
DC with Buzzer
Cylindrical Lockset Compatibility
6211, 6211AL, 6211WF, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221,
6222, 6223, 6224, 6224AL, 6225 & 6226 Strikes
Manufacturer
Cylindrical Latchbolt Projection
Baldwin
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Best
3⁄8˝ – 3⁄4˝ (10mm – 19mm)
Corbin
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Falcon
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Russwin
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Sargent
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Schlage
3⁄8˝ – 3⁄4˝ (10mm – 19mm)
Yale
1⁄2˝ – 3⁄4˝ (13mm – 19mm)
Optional DS (FSE Shown)
Note: Signalling may not function when using 3⁄8” (10mm) throw bolt.
Deadlocking cannot be guaranteed with all locks.
Note: When using a lockset not listed or when retrofitting a strike to an existing application, please contact Von Duprin Technical Support for assistance.
Model Specifications
Model #
Retrofits Model
6210
6211
6211AL
6211WF
6212
n/a
VD 3140, FA 712
FA 722
FA 732
VD 3146
/4 ”
Latchbolt Throw
3
/4 ”
3
/4 ”
3
/4 ”
3
/4 ”
3
4 7/8 ”
4 7/8 ”
4 7/8 ”
4 7/8 ”
6 3/8 ”
1 21/32”
1 21/32”
1 21/32”
4 1/2 ”
1 21/32”














Hollow Metal


Aluminum


Face Plate Length
Backbox Depth
Mortise
Lockset
Cylindrical
Single
# Doors
Pair
Door &
Frame Type


Wood
Options
Certifications


DS or DS-LC (Dual
Monitor Switches)





EB (Entry Buzzer - Fail
Secure Only)





28 VDC AC rectifier kit





16 VDC solenoid





UL1034





UL10C





ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1
1500lb. Hold force rated





1
2
3
4
5
Application Notes
Application Notes
1
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt on single door, hollow metal frame applications and using ANSI
prep at standard height. Strike pocket inserts are provided to accommodate different manufacturers deadlocking trigger locations.
2
For use on new installations with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door, hollow
metal frame applications. Designed to replace Von Duprin 3140 or Folger Adam 712.
3
For use on new installations with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door, aluminum
frame applications
4
For use on new installations with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door wood
frame applications. Designed to replace Folger Adams 732. Wood frame horizontal solenoid location differs
from Folger Adams. Requires additional frame prep when retrofitting.
5
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door, hollow metal or aluminum
frame applications. Fits modified ANSI 115.2 cutout. Designed to replace Von Duprin 3146
Model Specifications
Model #
Retrofits Model
6212WF
6213
6214
6215
6216
6221
n/a
VD 3041, 3042,
3061, 3062
FA 310-2 3/4
FA 310-2
FA 310-3-1
VD 3071 & 3072
/4 ”
Latchbolt Throw
3

3
/4 ”
3
/4 ”
3
/4 ”
6”
9”
9”
9”
6”
/”
34
/”
34
Face Plate Length
6 /8 ”
Backbox Depth
4 3/4 ”
2 1/2 ”
1 5/8 ”
1 5/8 ”
3 5/32”
4 3/4 ”
Mortise






Cylindrical




Single




Lockset
3


# Doors
Pair
Door &
Frame Type
Options
Certifications

Hollow Metal





Aluminum
†






Wood

See note 7 below
DS or DS-LC (Dual
Monitor Switches)






EB (Entry Buzzer - Fail
Secure Only)






28VDC AC rectifier kit






16VDC solenoid






UL1034






UL10C






ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1
1500lb. Hold force rated






6
7
8
9
10
11
Application Notes
Application Notes
6
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door, wood frame applications.
7
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on
single door hollow metal or aluminum frame applications (includes wood frame on retrofit applications).
Designed to replace Von Duprin 3041, 3042, 3061 and 3062.
8
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on sing door hollow metal or aluminum frame
applications. Designed to replace Folger Adams 310-2 3/4
9
For use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single door hollow metal or aluminum
frame applications. Designed to replace Folger Adams 310-2.
10 For use with mortise locks with deadbolt 1” throw on single door
hollow metal aluminum or wood frame applications. Deadbolt must be manually operated. Designed to replace
Folger Adams 310-3-1.
11 Open back electric strike for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
thick double door applications. 4 3/4” (120 mm) minimum stile required. For a concealed vertical rod and
mortise device combination, specify “A” backbox.
Model Specifications
Model #
6222
6223
6224
6224AL
6225
6226
FA 310-23/
4 OB
VD 3091 & 3092
FA 310-2 3/4
FA 310-2RF
FA 310-2 OB
FA 310-2
Retrofits Model
/”
Latchbolt Throw
Face Plate Length
/”
34
/”
/”
34
34
/”
34
/”
34
34
9”
6”
9”
9”
9”
9”
1 5/8 ”
4 1/2 ”
1 5/8 ”
1 5/8 ”
1 5/8 ”
1 5/8 ”






Mortise






Cylindrical
Backbox Depth
Lockset
Single
# Doors













Pair


Hollow Metal


Aluminum
Door &
Frame Type
Wood







DS or DS-LC (Dual
Monitor Switches)






EB (Entry Buzzer - Fail
Secure Only)






28VDC AC rectifier kit






16VDC solenoid






UL1034






UL10C


ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1
1500lb. Hold force rated
16
17




12
13
14
15
Application Notes
12 Open back electric strike for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
thick double door applications
13 Closed back electric stirke for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
thick double door applications. 4 3/4” (120mm) minimum stile required. For a concealed vertical rod and
mortise device combination specify “A” backbox.
14 Closed back electric strike for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
or 2 1/4” (57mm) thick double door applications.
15 Closed back electric strike for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
or 2 1/4” (57mm) thick aluminum double door applications.
16 Open back electric stirke for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
thick double door applications.
17 Closed back electric strike for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on 1 3/4” (44mm)
or 2 1/4” (57mm) thick double door applications.
Options
Certifications
Application Notes
Dimensions
6210
6212WF
4 1/2"
(114mm)
1 3/4"
(44mm)
4 7/8"
(124mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1 15/32"
(37mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 9/16"
(38mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
3 1/4"
(83mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
6211
3 9/16"
(90mm)
2 1/16"
(52mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
6 3/8"
(162mm)
12"
(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1/8"
(3mm)
6213
2 3/16"
(56mm)
1 15/32"
(37mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 11/16"
(43mm)
4 7/8"
(124mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
2 1/16"
(52mm)
12"
(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1"
(25mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
6211AL
Minimum
Clearance
1/4"
(6mm)
6214
1 15/32"
(37mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
2 1/6"
(52mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
2"
(51mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1 11/16"
(43mm)
4 7/8"
(124mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
9"
(229mm)
12"
(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
3 3/4"
(95mm)
5
1 /8"
(41mm)
1"
(25mm)
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
5/32"
(4mm)
11/16"
(17mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
6211WF
6215
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1 15/32"
(37mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
(38mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
4 7/8"
(124mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
2 1/6"
(52mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
(41mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
(305mm)
9"
(229mm)
1"
(25mm)
3 9/16"
(90mm)
Minimum
Clearance
(95mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
11/16"
(17mm)
6212
(4mm)
6216
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 15/32"
(37mm)
3 3/8"
(86mm)
6 3/8"
(162mm)
2 1/16"
(52mm)
7/8"
(22mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
3 5/32"
(80mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1 11/16"
(43mm)
1/2"
(13mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
3 7/8"
(98mm)
6"
(152mm)
21/29"
(64mm)
2 7/8"
(73mm)
1"
(25mm)
12" (305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
5 3/8"
(137mm)
9"
(229mm)
1 1/2"
(38mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
3/4"
(19mm)
12 "(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
9"
(229mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
5/32"
(4mm)
1"
(25mm)
5 3/8"
(137mm)
5
3 3/4"
(95mm)
6 1/8"
(156mm)
35/32"
(80mm)
Minimum
15/16"7
Clearance
2 /8"
(24mm)
(73mm)
6 1/8"
(156mm)
Dimensions
6221
6224AL
1 1/4"
(32mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
1 7/16"
(37mm)
3 7/8"
(98mm)
3 7/8"
(98mm)
6"
(152mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
Minimum
Clearance
9"
(229mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1 5/8"
(41mm)
1"
(25mm)
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 3/4"
(44mm)
1 1/2"
(38mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
5/32"
(4mm)
11/16"
(17mm)
6225
6222
2 1/16"(41mm)
2"(51mm)
1 1/2"(38mm)
2 1/16"(22mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
9"
(229mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
3 3/4"
(95mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
9"
(229mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
6223
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
5/32"(4mm)
6226
1 1/4"
(32mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
3 7/8"(98mm)
3 7/8"
(98mm)
6"
(152mm)
1 3/8"
(35mm)
4 1/2"
(114mm)
9"
(229mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
1 1/2"
(38mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
1"
(25mm)
1"
(25mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1 3/4"
(44mm)
1/4"
(6mm)
11/16"
(17mm)
6224
1 3/8"
(35mm)
2"
(51mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
9"
(229mm)
1"
(25mm)
11/16"
(17mm)
3 3/4"
(95mm)
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
1 5/8"
(41mm)
5/32"
(4mm)
5/32"
(4mm)
12"(305mm)
Minimum
Clearance
6210 – FSE –
DS







Power
Failure Mode
Dual Switch*
Voltage
Rectifier Kit*
Finish
Buzzer*
Model
Ordering Information
–
24
– S024 – US3 –
EB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*Optional
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
1 Model
6210
6211
6211AL
6211WF
6212
6212WF
6213
6214
6215
6216
6221
6222
6223
6224
6224AL
6225
6226
3 Dual Switch (Optional)
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 3 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 4 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
See chart on page 5 to make the proper
selection
DS
DS-LC
Monitors latch bolt & lock status. DS
Switches rated at 24 VDC 50 milliampere
- 2 Amps.
Optional for computer monitoring.
Monitors latch bolt & lock status. DSLC switches rated 24 VDC 50 milliampere
or less.
4 Voltage (VDC)
24
Low voltage DC power
12
Low voltage DC power
If AC power is required specify rectifier kit below.
5 Rectifier Kit (Optional)
S012
S024
Converts 12 VAC voltage to 12 VDC to
operate the solenoid
Converts 24 VAC voltage to 24 VDC to
operate the solenoid
6 Finish
US Number/Von Duprin Number
US3/85
US4/84
US10/06
US10B/86
US32/31
US32D/32
Plated Polished Brass on Stainless Steel
Plated Dull Brass on Stainless Steel
Plated Dull Bronze on Stainless Steel
Plated Dark Bronze on Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel, Polished
Stainless Steel, Satin
7 Buzzer (Optional)
EB
Entry Buzzer. Only available if Fail Secure
(FSE) is specified.
2 Power Failure Mode
FSE
FS
Fail Secure. Requires power to be applied
to unlock the strike lip. On loss of power,
the strike lip is locked. Fire rated.
Fail Safe. Requires power to be applied to
lock the strike lip. On loss of power, the
strike lip is unlocked. Non-Fire Rated.
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, Von Duprin, the Von Duprin logo and Falcon are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand
plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. Precision is a trademark of Stanley Black &
Decker. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005368
04/12
Surface Mounted Strike for Rim
Exit Devices
Overview
Von Duprin electric strikes are known for their reliability, durability
and security. The 6300 Series is designed to withstand abuse. Its
heavy duty stainless steel construction is fully UL1034 and UL10C
listed.
6300 Series electric strikes are designed for use with a variety of
rim devices. It interfaces with the latch mechanism of the exit
device. The movable lip (keeper) allows a door to open even when
the latch bolt is extended. This feature, called remote release
provides added benefits such as increased convenience and
efficiency. The 6300 Series is also provides added security and
traffic control.
6300 Series electric strikes are ideal for aftermarket applications.
It is easy to install without modifying or altering the door frame.
To assure the proper selection of an electric strike on new applications, lockset compatibility charts are shown on the next page.
When using a lockset not listed or when retrofitting a strike to an
existing application, please contact Von Duprin Technical Support
for application assistance.
The 6300 is fail secure (FSE) only to achieve compliance with
UL10C for fire rated openings. In a fail secure application the
door is normally locked. To unlock the door power must be applied. The 6300 strike can be used with either 12VDC or 24VDC.
There are 2 connectors that ship with it and the appropriate connector for either 12VDC or 24VDC will be used based upon the
available voltage at the opening.
Features and Benefits
•• Non handed design provides greater flexibility
•• Requires no alteration or cutting to existing frame
•• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant & UL10C Electric Strike for
Fire Door
•• Stainless steel (satin) finish
•• Durable stainless steel construction
•• Field selectable voltage 12VDC or 24VDC
6300 Series Electric Strikes
System Components
6300 Series
6300 Surface Mount Specifications
Wiring
Model
Voltage
Current
Duty
Amps
Ohms
6300
12V
DC
Continuous
0.50
22
6300
24V
DC
Continuous
0.24
89
AC
DC = Direct Current
Continuous Duty = Energized 1 min. or more
Rim Exit Device Compatibility 6300 Strikes
Manufacturer
Model Number
Von Duprin
VD 22/22-F Rim
Von Duprin
VD 33A/35A Rim
Von Duprin
VD 55 Rim
Von Duprin
VD 88/88-F Rim device
Von Duprin
VD 98/99 and 98/99-F Rim
Falcon
Falcon 24/24-F Rim
Falcon
Falcon 25/25-F Rim
Falcon
Falcon 19/19-F Rim
Falcon Doromatic
Falcon Doromatic 1790
Falcon Doromatic
Falcon Doromatic 2090
AC with Buzzer
DC
* Note: When using device not listed or when retrofitting a strike to an
existing application, please contact Von Duprin Technical Support for
application assistance.
Model Specifications
Model #
6300
Retrofits Model
N/A
Latchbolt Throw
DC with Buzzer
/”
34
Face Plate Length
9”
Projection
/”
34
Single or Pair with Mullion
Door/Frame Type
Hollow Metal, Aluminum & Wood
EB (Entry Buzzer)
Optional
Certifications
UL1034, UL10C
Application Notes
Surface mounted electric strike ideal for
aftermarket applications. Strike designed for
use with Von Duprin 98/99, however it can
be used with most rim exit devices.
1-3/4"
3/4"
(19.0mm)
(44.5mm)
HORIZONTAL
ADJUSTMENT
MOUNTING
HOLES
Ordering Information
6300 S024 EB
  
Buzzer*
# Doors
Rectifier
Kit *
Rim Exit Device
Model
Lockset
1
2
3
Selections Correspond With the Numbers Above
* Optional
1 Model
6300
Surface Mounted Strike for Rim Exit Devices
2 Rectifier Kit (Optional)
S012
S024
Converts 12 VAC voltage to 12 VDC to operate the solenoid
Converts 24 VAC voltage to 24 VDC to operate the solenoid
3 Buzzer (Optional)
9"
(228.6mm)
8-1/4"
(209.6mm)
5-1/2"
(139.7mm)
1-5/8"
EB
Entry Buzzer.
(42.0mm)
Standard Features:
• Power Failure Mode: Fail Secure (FSE)
• Voltage: Field selectable 24 VDC or 12 VDC
• Finish: Stainless Steel, Satin (US32D/32)
LOCK DOWN
HOLES
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, Von Duprin, the Von Duprin logo, Falcon, and Falcon Doromatic
are trademarks of Ingersoll-Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
003242
04/12
Electric Strikes
Overview
The Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike has been designed and
manufactured to meet the needs of locksmiths and security
professionals. This easy-to-install electric strike was created for
medium duty applications, specifically to control traffic flow
through interior and exterior openings in retail and commercial
environments.
Features and Benefits
• Three faceplates standard in every box
• 12/24 dual-voltage
• Fail-safe/fail-secure
• Adjustable keeper
• Internal solenoid
• Non-handed
• Backbox depth of 1 11/16”
• Keeper depth of 1/2”
• Mounting tabs
• Retrofit kit
• Illustrated installation instructions
• Tamper resistant
• 1 year electrical product warranty
• Continuous duty operation
• Heavy duty construction
5100 Series Electric Strikes
System Components
5100 Series
POWER OPTIONS
• DC: Regulated Power Supplies (Recommended)
-- PS902 Power Supply
• DC: 24V Unregulated Power Supplies (Acceptable)
-- Schlage 593 PI-24DC (Plug-In)
-- Schlage 592-24RC (Hard-Wired)
• AC/DC Conversion:
-- Von Duprin SO-24 Kit
Specifications
ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1
UL 1034 Burglary Listing
12VDC
24VDC
Resistance (Ohms)
32
128
Power (watts)
4.5
4.5
Current (amps)
0.38
0.19
All specs ± 10% @77°F/25°C
STANDARD CONFIGURATION
• 24 volts DC
• Fail-secure
• Field convertible to Fail-safe
DIMENSIONS
• Backbox: 3 3/8” x 1” x 1 11/32”
• Overall Strike Depth: 1 11/16”
• Faceplates:
-- 4 7/8” round corner ANSI A115.2 standard frame prep
-- 4 7/8” square corner ANSI A115.2 standard frame prep
-- 7 15/16” long, round corner wood frame prep
• Keeper pocket: 1 7/16”L x 1/2”D x 11/16” - 13/16”W (adjustable)
• Lip Attachment cut-out depth: 1 1/16”
877-671-7011 • vonduprin.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5990
07/11
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
The M400 Series line of electromagnetic locks from Schlage
are designed with the customer in mind to be robust, easy to
install, and secure. The new bayonet mounting feature makes
installs easier, allowing the installer to have their hands free
during the mounting process. There is no need to consider door
handing as all the M400 Series electromagnetic locks are both
non-handed and symmetrical, allowing optimum placement of
the magnet no matter the application.
All M400 Series locks have automatic voltage sensing for 12
and 24 volts along with polarity protection to make wiring less
complex.
The M490 is tested and certified to meet or exceed UL1034
and BHMA 1500lb. hold force requirements.
The M490 electromagnetic lock comes in two configurations
to meet your specific security needs. The M490 provides basic
security, while the M490P provides intelligent sensing and
reporting features needed to integrate with access control
systems. Additional options are available for the M490P. Kits are
available for top jam, double door, and glass door applications.
Features and Benefits
• Bayonet mount makes installation simpler by not requiring magnet to be held overhead while mounting screws
are installed
• New design allows for RH/LH configuration in the field
• Armature mount allows armature to pivot compensating
for slight opening imperfections
• Limited Lifetime Warranty
• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant Electronic Locking
Mechanisms, UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies and ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certifications
• 1500 lb. Hold Force
• See page 2 for additional features and options
M490/492 Mag Lock
System Components
M490/492
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
M490/M492
• Automatic Voltage Selection (AVS) senses the
voltage applied to the lock and responds accordingly
M490/M492 Electromagnetic Lock Specifications
Specification
M490/M490P
M492/M492P
Holding Force
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 1500 lbs.
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 1500 lbs.
M490P/M492P
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the bond between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
• Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether the
door is open or closed
• Relock Time Delay (RTD) provides a relock delay
that is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds
Optional
-- Anti-Tamper Switch (ATS) provides an
indication that the cover of the magnet is
securely fastened to the lock and that the on
board circuitry is secure
-- MBS Indicator (LED) provides visual indication
of magnetic bond at the lock
Input Voltage
(Standard Unit)
OPTIONS (FOR ALL)
Filler Plates and Angle Brackets Specifications
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit)
.65A @ 12 VDC
.35A @ 24 VDC
Automatic Dual
Voltage
1.3A @ 12 VDC
.7A @ 12 VDC
12/24 VDC
Height
3"
3"
Length
12 - 1/2"
25 - 1/16"
Width
1 - 3/4"
1 - 3/4"
Weight (approximate)
14 lbs.
28 lbs.
Certifications
UL 294, UL10C, ANSI/BHMA A156.23
Temperature
0º-49º C (32º-120º F)
Wire Gauge
14-22 AWG
• Herculite Door Bracket
• Top Jamb (inswinging doors)
12/24 VDC
M490
M492
10-1/2"
20- 5/8"
1-1/4" x 1/8"
4901F
4921F
1-1/4" x 1/4"
4902F
4922F
1-1/4" x 3/8"
4903F
4923F
1-1/4" x 1/2"
4904F
4924F
1-1/4" x 5/8"
4905F
4925F
3/4" x 1/2"
4906F
4926F
3/4" x 5/8"
4907F
4927F
3/4" x 3/4"
4908F
4928F
Width x Height
Plate No.
Plate No.
1"x1"
4901A
4921A
1-1/2" x 1"
4902A
4922A
1-1/2" x 1-1/2"
4903A
4923A
1-1/2" x 2"
4904A
4924A
1-1/2" x 2 -1/2"
4905A
4925A
Length
Filler Plates
Width x Height
Angle Brackets
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004204
10/11
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
The M400 Series line of electromagnetic locks from Schlage
are designed with the customer in mind to be robust, easy to
install, and secure. The new bayonet mounting feature makes
installs easier, allowing the installer to have their hands free
during the mounting process. There is no need to consider door
handing as all the M400 Series electromagnetic locks are both
non-handed and symmetrical, allowing optimum placement of
the magnet no matter the application.
All M400 Series locks have automatic voltage sensing for 12
and 24 volts along with polarity protection to make wiring less
complex. The M450 is tested and certified to meet or exceed
UL1034 and BHMA 1000lb. hold force requirements.
The M450 electromagnetic lock comes in two configurations
to meet your specific security needs. The M450 provides basic
security, while the M450P provides intelligent sensing and
reporting features needed to integrate with access control systems. Additional options are available for the M450P. Kits are
available for top jam, double door, and glass door applications.
Features and Benefits
• Bayonet mount makes installation simpler by not
requiring magnet to be held overhead while mounting
screws are installed
• New design allows for RH/LH configuration in the field
• Armature mount allows armature to pivot compensating
for slight opening imperfections
• Limited Lifetime Warranty
• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant Electronic Locking
Mechanisms, UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
• 1000 lb. Hold Force
• See page 2 for additional features and options
M450/452 Mag Lock
System Components
M450/452
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
M450/M452
• Automatic Voltage Selection (AVS) senses the
voltage applied to the lock and responds accordingly
M450P/M452P
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the bond between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
• Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether the
door is open or closed
• Relock Time Delay (RTD) provides a relock delay
that is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds
Optional (P models only)
-- Anti-Tamper Switch (ATS) provides an
indication that the cover of the magnet is securely
fastened to the lock and that the on board
circuitry is secure
-- MBS Indicator (LED) provides visual indication
of magnetic bond at the lock
OPTIONS (FOR ALL)
• Herculite Door Bracket
• Top Jamb (inswinging doors)
M450/M452 Electromagnetic Lock Specifications
Specification
M450/M450P
M452/M452P
Holding Force
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 1000 lbs.
1000 lbs. per door leaf
Input Voltage
(Standard Unit)
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit)
12/24 VDC
.75A @ 12 VDC
.38A @ 24 VDC
Automatic Dual
Voltage
1.5A @ 12 VDC
.75A @ 24 VDC
12/24 VDC
Height
3"
3"
Length
10 - 1/4"
20 - 9/16"
Width
1 - 3/4"
1 - 3/4"
Weight (approximate)
10 lbs.
20 lbs.
Certifications
UL1034, UL10C, ANSI/BHMA156.23
Temperature
0º-49º C (32º-120º F)
Wire Gauge
14-22 AWG
Filler Plates and Angle Brackets Specifications
M450
M452
10-1/2"
20- 5/8"
1-1/4" x 1/8"
4501F
4521F
1-1/4" x 1/4"
4502F
4522F
1-1/4" x 3/8"
4503F
4523F
1-1/4" x 1/2"
4504F
4524F
1-1/4" x 5/8"
4505F
4525F
3/4" x 1/2"
4506F
4526F
3/4" x 5/8"
4507F
4527F
3/4" x 3/4"
4508F
4528F
Width x Height
Plate No.
Plate No.
1"x1"
4501A
4521A
1-1/2" x 1"
4502A
4522A
1-1/2" x 1-1/2"
4503A
4523A
1-1/2" x 2"
4504A
4524A
1-1/2" x 2 -1/2"
4505A
4525A
Length
Filler Plates
Width x Height
Angle Brackets
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004205
11/11
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
The M400 Series line of electromagnetic locks from Schlage
are designed with the customer in mind to be robust, easy to
install, and secure. The new bayonet mounting feature makes
installs easier, allowing the installer to have their hands free
during the mounting process. There is no need to consider door
handing as all the M400 Series electromagnetic locks are both
non-handed and symmetrical, allowing optimum placement of
the magnet no matter the application.
All M400 Series locks have automatic voltage sensing for 12
and 24 volts along with polarity protection to make wiring less
complex. The M420 is tested and certified to meet or exceed
UL1034 and BHMA 500lb. hold force requirements.
The M420 electromagnetic lock comes in two configurations
to meet your specific security needs. The M420 provides basic
security, while the M420P provides intelligent sensing and
reporting features needed to integrate with access control
systems. Additional options are available for the M420P. Kits are
available for top jam, double door, and glass door applications.
Features and Benefits
• Bayonet mount makes installation simpler by not
requiring magnet to be held overhead while mounting
screws are installed
• New design allows for RH/LH configuration in the field
• Armature mount allows armature to pivot compensating
for slight opening imperfections
• Limited Lifetime Warranty
• UL1034 Burglary-Resistant Electronic Locking
Mechanisms, UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies and ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certifications
• 500 lb. Hold Force
• See page 2 for additional features and options
M420/422 Mag Lock
System Components
M420/422
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
M420/M422
• Automatic Voltage Selection (AVS) senses the
voltage applied to the lock and responds accordingly
M420P/M422P
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the bond between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
• Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether the
door is open or closed
• Relock Time Delay (RTD) provides a relock delay
that is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds
Optional (P models only)
-- Anti-Tamper Switch (ATS) provides an indication
that the cover of the magnet is securely fastened to
the lock and that the on board circuitry is secure
-- MBS Indicator (LED) provides visual indication
of magnetic bond at the lock
OPTIONS (FOR ALL)
• Herculite Door Bracket
• Top Jamb (inswinging doors)
M420/M422 Electromagnetic Lock Specifications
Specification
M420/M420P
M422/M422P
Holding Force
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 500 lbs.
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 500 lbs.
Input Voltage
(Standard Unit)
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit)
12/24 VDC
.75A @ 12 VDC
.38A @ 24 VDC
Automatic Dual
Voltage
1.5A @ 12 VDC
.76A @ 24 VDC
12/24 VDC
Height
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
Length
9"
18-1/16"
Width
1 - 3/8"
1 - 3/8”
Weight (approximate)
6 lbs.
12 lbs.
Certifications
UL1034, UL10C, ANSI/BHMA156.23
Temperature
0º-49º C (32º-120º F)
Wire Gauge
14-22 AWG
Filler Plates and Angle Brackets Specifications
M420
M422
10-1/2"
20- 5/8"
1-1/4" x 1/8"
4201F
4221F
1-1/4" x 1/4"
4202F
4222F
1-1/4" x 3/8"
4203F
4223F
1-1/4" x 1/2"
4204F
4224F
1-1/4" x 5/8"
4205F
4225F
3/4" x 1/2"
4206F
4226F
3/4" x 5/8"
4207F
4227F
3/4" x 3/4"
4208F
4228F
Width x Height
Plate No.
Plate No.
1"x1"
4201A
4221A
1-1/2" x 1"
4202A
4222A
1-1/2" x 1-1/2"
4203A
4223A
1-1/2" x 2"
4204A
4224A
1-1/2" x 2 -1/2"
4205A
4225A
Length
Filler Plates
Width x Height
Angle Brackets
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004206
10/11
Electromagnetic Gate Lock
Overview
The Schlage M490G Electromagnetic Gate Lock is a weather
resistant electromagnetic lock with 1500 lbs. of holding force,
designed for use on all types of sliding and swinging gates.
As a high security magnetic lock it can accommodate
misalignment problems while supplying superior holding force.
A 1/2˝ compression connector is provided for installation of
1/2˝ EMT conduit, insuring protection of hook-up wiring from
weather and vandalism. Heavy duty plating resists corrosion of
mating surfaces providing a low maintenance locking device.
A modified Top Jamb mounting bracket allows a single M490G
to be mounted in a variety of positions. The M490G Gate Lock
may be mounted to any gate frame or post. Special brackets
may be required to adapt the lock to a particular frame or post.
It is important that the lock is mounted so that the armature
pulls straight back from the magnet face.
The M490G can be field configured for either 12 or 24 VDC
operation. Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) and Gate Status
Monitor (DPS) are standard.
Features and Benefits
• 1500 lbs. of direct holding force
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) and
Gate Status Monitor (DPS)
• Field Selectable 12 or 24VDC operation
• Built-in voltage spike suppressor
• Electroless nickel plated finish
• Universal mounting brackets
• 1/2˝ EMT compression fitting
• Two foot wire leads
• Weather resistant for exterior use
• Accomodates gate misalignment
• No moving parts - low maintenance
M490G Magnetic Gate Lock
System Components
M490G
STANDARD FEATURES
M490G
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the bond between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
• Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether
the door is open or closed
• Universal Mounting Brackets, for swinging or
sliding gate applications
• Built in voltage spike suppression
• ½” EMT compression fitting
• Special corrosion resistant plating
M490G Electromagnetic Gate Lock Specifications
Specifications
M490/M490G
Holding Force
Meets or exceeds BHMA standard
of 1500 lbs.
Input Voltage (Field Selectable)
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit)
.65A @ 12 VDC
.35A @ 24 VDC
Height
3”
Length
11”
Width
1-3/4”
Weight (approximates)
14 lbs.
Temperature
0°- 49° C (32°- 120° F)
Wire Gauge
14-22 AWG
Filler Plates
Electromagnetic Lock
M490G
Length
9”
Width x Height
Plate No.
1-1/4” x 1/8”
49G1F
1-1/4” x 1/4”
49G2F
1-1/4” x 3/8”
49G3F
1-1/4” x 1/2”
49G4F
1-1/4” x 5/8”
49G5F
1-1/4” x 3/4”
49G6F
3/4” x 1/2”
49G7F
3/4” x 5/8”
49G8F
Angle Brackets
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Electromagnetic Lock
M490G
Length
9”
Width x Height
Bracket No.
1” x 1”
49G1A
1-1/2” x 1”
49G2A
1-1/2” x 1-1/2”
49G3A
1-1/2” x 2”
49G4A
1-1/2” x 2-1/2”
49G5A
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-6012
07/11
Delayed Egress
Electromagnetic Lock
Overview
The Schlage M490DE Delayed Egress Locking System is
designed to meet NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, while providing
the same robust, easy to install, security of our M400 Series line
of electromagnetic locks. The M490DE has a 15 second delayed
egress timer with audible alarm which can be configured to
trigger by an internal “plunger switch,” or by external contacts,
such as an request to exit push bar.
All M400 Series locks have automatic voltage sensing for 12
and 24 volts along with polarity protection to make wiring less
complex. The M490DE is tested and certified to meet or exceed
UL special locking arrangements and BHMA 1500lb. hold force
requirements.
The M490DE electromagnetic lock comes in two configurations
to meet your specific security needs. The M490DE provides
basic security and delayed egress functionality, while the
M490DEP provides intelligent sensing and reporting features
needed to integrate with access control systems.
This easy to install, cost effective solution provides the highest
access security and safety.
Features and Benefits
• Bayonet mount makes installation simpler by not
requiring magnet to be held overhead while mounting
screws are installed
• 15 Second Delay - Activated by internal plunger switch
or auxilary imput
• Automatic Voltage Selection
• LED Indication with Audible Alerts
• Release Input
• Reset Input
• Fire Alarm Input
• UL Special Locking Arrangements, ANSI/BHMA 156.23
Grade 1, UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies Certifications
• 1500 lbs. Hold Force
M490DE Delayed Egress Mag Lock
System Components
M490DE
STANDARD FEATURES
M490DE/M490DE-2
• Auto Voltage Selection (AVS) senses the voltage
applied to lock and responds accordingly
• Internal Plunger Switch activates delayed egress
timer
Additional Options and Accessories
• Herculite Door Bracket (HDB)
M490DEP/M490DEP-2
• Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) monitors the
strength of the bond between the lock and armature
so you know the door is secure
• Door Position Switch (DPS) monitors whether the
door is open or closed
• Relocking Time Delay
• BOCA Compliant (upon request)
M490DE Electromagnetic Delayed Egress Lock Specifications
Specification
M490DE
M490DE-2
Holding Force
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 1500 lbs.
meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 1500 lbs.
per door leaf
Input Voltage
(Standard Unit)
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
(Amps Standard Unit)
.85A @ 12 VDC
.55A @ 24 VDC
1.25A @ 12 VDC
.76A @ 24 VDC
Height
3"
3"
Length
12 - 1/2"
25 - 1/16"
Width
3 - 1/16"
3 - 1/16"
Weight (approximate)
16 lbs.
32 lbs.
Certifications
UL special locking arrangements,
UL10C, ANSI/BHMA156.23
Temperature
0º-49º C (32º-120º F)
Wire Gauge
14-22 AWG
Filler Plates
Electromagnetic Lock
M490DE/M490DE-2
Length
12-1/2”
Width x Height
Plate No.
1-1/4” x 1/8”
4901F
1-1/4” x 1/4”
4902F
1-1/4” x 3/8”
4903F
1-1/4” x 1/2”
4904F
1-1/4” x 5/8”
4905F
3/4” x 1/2”
4906F
3/4” x 5/8”
4907F
3/4” x 3/4”
4908F
Angle Brackets
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
Electromagnetic Lock
M490DE/M490DE-2
Length
10-1/2”
Width x Height
Bracket No.
1” x 1”
4901A
1-1/2” x 1”
4902A
1-1/2” x 1-1/2”
4903A
1-1/2” x 2”
4904A
1-1/2” x 2-1/2”
4905A
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004762
11/11
Mortise Mounted Shear Lock
Overview
The GF3000 Series Shear Lock features a patented design
offering advances over any Shear Lock in the market.
A microprocessor-based control module provides advanced
electronic features. This circuitry automatically senses and
adjusts input voltage, allowing for operation from 12 to 24 volt
DC power sources.
The mortise Shear Lock offers the advantage of a totally
concealed locking mechanism providing superior security and
appearance. The patented design incorporates locking “tabs”
on the magnet assembly with mating grooves in the armature
plate. The flexible mounting features allows for normal door
and frame movement.
The Shear Lock is ideally suited for commercial grade quality
hollow metal doors and frames as well as herculite doors with
top rail. Advances in design provide low operating temperatures,
making this Shear Lock suitable for use in the growing demand
for concealed locks in wood frames.
The GF3000 TRD Model is available when armature adjustment
is required from the edge of the door due to flush ceiling
conditions. The GF3000BRD model is available when no top rail
mounting is available.
Features and Benefits
• Automatic voltage selection 12/24 VDC (Filtered)
• 3000 lbs. of holding force
• Requires filtered, regulated power supply
• Built-in Automatic Relock Switch
• Adjustable time delay on relock, 0-30 seconds
• Low temperature operation
• Microprocessor controlled
• Optional Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) to monitor the
secure/not secure condition of the lock
• Optional Door Status Monitor (DSM) to sense the
open/closed position of the door
• UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,
cUL, CSFM and MEA listed to use on fire labeled
openings
• Meet ANSI/BHMA A156.23 standards
GF3000 Mortise Mounted Shear Lock
System Components
GF3000
Specifications
Holding Force
3000 lbs
Current Draw
0.90 Amp @ 12 VDC
0.45 Amp @ 24VDC
Weight
7 lbs
Lock Body: Length x Height x Depth
9-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1-1/2”
w/Mounting Tabs: Length x Height x Depth
11-9/16” x 1-1/2” x 1-1/2”
Armature: Length x Height x Depth
8-3/8” x 1-3/8” x 1/2”
Armature Bracket: Length x Height x Depth
10-5/8” x 1-3/8” x 1”
Certifications
UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies
ANSI/BHMA A156.23 1500 lbs
ORDERING INFORMATION
GF3000
Adjustable from top edge of door
GF3000TRD Mounting assembly which provides armature
adjustable from the latch edge of the door.
Recommended with zero clearance condition
between top of door and ceiling.
GF3000BRD Mounting assembly to mortise armature into
bottom rail of door. Magnet is installed in floor/
threshold. Provides solution when no top rail is
available.
OPTIONS
DSM/MBS
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Door Status Monitor/Magnetic Bond Sensor
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004160
10/11
Surface Mounted Shear Lock
Overview
The GF3000 Series Shear Lock features a patented design
offering advances over any Shear Lock on the market.
A microprocessor-based control module provides advanced
electronic features. This circuitry automatically senses and
adjusts input voltage, allowing for operation from 12 to 24 volt
DC power sources.
The surface Shear Lock offers the advantage of a totally
concealed locking mechanism, providing superior security and
appearance. The patented design incorporates locking “tabs”
on the magnet assembly with mating grooves in the armature
plate. While the strength afforded by this design is a major
advantage, the flexible mounting features are as important.
This design allows for normal door and frame movement.
This Surface Shear Lock offers maximum versatility in application.
The GF3000SM model provides a low profile, surface mount lock
for outswinging doors. The GF3000TJ model provides a low
profile, surface mount lock for inswinging doors. It provides a
unique mounting solution with no brackets needed, which are
standard with direct pull magnets.
The GF3000SM and TJ models feature a black anodized housing
with the choice of modular finish plates.
Features and Benefits
• Automatic Voltage Selection 12/24 VDC (filtered)
• 3000 lbs. of holding force
• Requires filtered, regulated power supply
• Built-in Automatic Relock Switch
• Adjustable time delay on relock, 0-30 seconds
• Low temperature operation
• Microprocessor controlled
• Optional Magnetic Bond Sensor (MBS) to monitor the
secure/not secure condition of the lock
• Optional Door Status Monitor (DSM) to sense the
open/closed position of the door
• Modular, slide-in in finish plates on SM and TJ models
• UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies,
cUL, CSFM and MEA listed to use on fire labeled
openings
• Meets ANSI/BHMA 156.23 standards
GF3000 Surface Mounted Shear Lock
System Components
GF3000
Specifications
Holding Force
3000 lbs
Current Draw
0.90 Amp @ 12 VDC
0.45 Amp @ 24VDC
Weight
8.5 lbs
Lock Housing:
Length x Height x Depth
9-13/16” x 1-7/8” x 2”
Armature Housing:
Length x Height x Depth
9-13/16” x 1-1/4” x 2”
Certifications
UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire
Tests of Door Assemblies
ANSI/BHMA A156.23
Selections Correspond With the Numbers to the left
1 Model
GGF3000SM
GF3000TJ
Standard Unit (outswinging doors). Adjustable from top edge of armature. Available in special finishes.
Top Jamb Unit (inswinging doors). Magnet mounts on inside
top jamb. Adjustable from top edge of armature. Available in
special finish.
2. Options
DSM/MBS
Door Status Monitor/Magnetic Bond Sensor
3. Finish (for GF3000SM & GF3000TJ only)
628
335 613 626 606 630 612 625 605 877-671-7011 • schlage.com
US28 US19 US10B US26D US4 US32D US10 US26 US3 Satin Aluminum, Anodized (standard)
Satin Black, Anodized
Dark Satin Bronze, Anodized
Satin Chrome
Satin Brass
Satin Stainless Steel
Satin Bronze
Bright Chrome
Bright Brass
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004159
10/11
Mortise Mount MiniLine™
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
Schlage provides the industry’s most complete selection
of electromagnetic locks. The 320M Mortise Mounted
Electromagnetic Lock is designed to interface with electronic
access control systems, automatic door operators, and fire or
hazard sensing systems, to provide egress upon detectable
emergency. With no moving parts and a fail safe design, it
offers an excellent solution for both security and life safety
requirements when connected to the fire alarm circuit.
The 320M has been installed on thousands of locations
worldwide including airports, hospitals, nursing homes, schools,
universities, libraries, museums, retail and office buildings,
laboratories, and government buildings.
The 320M MiniLine is UL listed and engineered to meet the
ANSI/BHMA standards for electromagnetic locks.
Features and Benefits
• Mortise mount for sliding doors
• Includes mounting tabs and armature mounting block
• Low maintenance - no moving parts
• Meets security and life safety requirements
• Fields Selectable 12 or 24 VDC operation
• UL listed
• Meets ANSI/BHMA standards
• ATD - Adjustable Time Delay
• DSM - Door Status Monitor
• MBS - Magnetic Bond Sensor
320M Mortise Mount Mini Mag Lock
System Components
320M
Specifications
Holding Force
Meets or exceeds BHMA
standard of 500 lbs.
Input Voltage
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
[email protected] 12 VDC
.23A @ 24 VDC
Wiring
Wire leads 12” long
Lock Body: Length x Height x Depth
7” x 1 3/8” x 1 7/8”
Armature: Length x Height x Depth
4-1/4” x 1-1/2” x 5/8”
Weight
6 lbs.
Note for Wood Frames: Due to higher ambient operating temperatures,
it is required that the 12 VDC configuration be used
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-6013
07/11
Electromagnetic Locks
Overview
Schlage introduces the integrator’s an answer to retrofit
needs for electromagnetics locks. These “Full Featured”
electromagnetic locks are easy to stock, easy to select and
easy to install. With common templating and standard features,
the 40 and 70 Series Electromagnetic Locks for retrofit make
sense for virtually every application.
Features and Benefits
• Stainless steel housing - standard
• Low amp draw:
-- 70 Series – .12A @ 24 VDC, 25A @ 12 VDC
-- 40 Series – .15A @ 24 VDC, 32A @ 12 VDC
• Simplified armature installation
• Strong holding forces:
-- 70 Series – BHMA Grade 1 Certified 1000 lb. rating
-- 40 Series – BHMA Grade 1 Certified 500 lb. rating
• Universal Header Bracket (UHB)
• Double magnet available with 70 series
• ANSI/BHMA A156.23 Grade 1
• UL 10C - 1 Hour Fire Rated
• UL1034 Certified: Burglary-Resistant Electronic Locking
Mechanisms
40/70 Series Mag Lock
System Components
40/70 Series
70 Specifications
40 Specifications
Holding Force
BHMA 500 lb rating
Holding Force
BHMA 1000 lb rating
Input Voltage
12/24 VDC
Input Voltage
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
.32A @ 12 VDC
.15A @ 24VDC
Current Draw
.25A @ 12 VDC
.12 @24 VDC
Length
8”
Length
8”
Height
1 7/8”
Height
3”
Depth
1 5/8”
Depth
1 7/8”
Weight
3.5 lbs.
Weight
7.5 lbs.
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.23, UL10C &
UL1034
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.23, UL10C &
UL1034
72 Specifications
Filler Plates
Holding Force
BHMA 1000 lb rating per door leaf
Input Voltage
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
.50A @ 12 VDC
.25A @ 24 VDC
Length
22”
Height
3”
Depth
1 7/8”
1-1/4" x 1/2"
Weight
15 lbs.
1-1/4" x 5/8"
Certifications
ANSI/BHMA A156.23, UL10C &
UL1034
Filler Plates Available in 628 Satin Aluminum
or 335 Satin Black Finishes
1-1/4" x 1/8"
1-1/4" x 1/4"
1-1/4" x 3/8"
ORDERING INFORMATION
40
70
72
Single Lock
Single Lock
Double Lock
ACCESSORIES
HDB70 HDB40 UHB HEB CWB70 CWB40 ASB70
ASB40 DC70 DC40
OSA Herculite Door Bracket
Herculite Door Bracket
Universal Header Bracket
Header Extension Bracket
Concrete/Wood Bracket
Concrete/Wood Bracket
Aluminum Spacer Brackets
Aluminum Spacer Brackets
Dress Cover
Dress Cover
1/4” offset Armature Strike
FINISHES (ACCESSORIES ONLY)
628 605 335 877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
US28 Satin Aluminum, Anodized (standard)
US3 Bright Brass (Dress Cover Only)
US19 Satin Black, Anodized
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
004156
11/11
6 amp Power Supply
Overview
Schlage’s comprehensive line of power supplies and option
boards were designed to address the changing needs of the
access control market.
Installation is simplified by utilizing a flat mounting design and
polarized locking connectors for option boards. This new design
eliminates the need for racks and side connectors. The flat
mounting of the option boards also provides for easier access to
the terminal blocks for connection of electrified devices (such
as electrified strikes, electromagnetic locks, card readers, etc).
Common to the line of PS900 Series power supplies is a constant
output rating at both 12v and 24v settings, universal 120 VAC to
240 VAC input, and polarized option board connectors. New fire
alarm interface board mounting allows outputs to be configured
as switched (power cut) or unswitched (power continues) when
signal provided.
*All PS900 Series of power supplies and option boards have
been tested and certified to meet UL 294.
Photo as shown includes optional board(s)
Please contact your local sales office or visit the support
section on our website for configuration assistance.
Features and Benefits
• 6A @ 12/24 VDC output, field selectable
with jumper
• Universal 120 -240 VAC input
• Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered
• Three polarized connectors for distribution boards
• Fused primary input
• AC input and DC output monitoring circuit
w/ LED indicators
• Cover mounted AC input indication
• Hinged cover w/ lock down screws
• High voltage protective cover
PS906 Power Supply
System Components
PS906
OPTIONS
• Emergency Interface Relay (FA)
-- Must be installed on distribution boards
• Battery Backup
• 2 relay QEL panic device control board
• 4 relay distribution board
• 4 relay distribution board with logic
-- Field configurable for:
• Time delay function
• Auto operator
• Security interlock
PS906
• 8 fused output distribution board
• 8 PTC output distribution board
PS906 Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Description
Input Voltage
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, universal input
Output Voltage
6A @ 12 or 24 VDC
Field selectable with jumper
Switching supply, 5% regulation, 240mVpp max ripple
Enclosure
Grey / Baked enamel
14"H x 12"W x 4"D
Eight 1/2" x 3/4" Knockouts
NEMA Grade 1
Hinged cover with lock down screws
Operating Temperature
32º-120º F (0º-49º C)
Certifications
UL 294
RoHS
FCC Part 15
Option Board Compatibility
900-BB: Battery Backup
900-BBK: Battery Backup Kit (backup board and battery pack)
900-FA: Fire Alarm (Must be installed on distribution boards)
900-2Q: 2 Relay QEL control Board
900-4R: 4 Relay Output Board
900-4RL: 4 Relay Logic Board
900-8F: Fused 8 Zone Distribution Board
900-8P: PTC 8 Zone Distribution Board
AC Primary Fuse Size
6.3A, 250v, 5 x 20mm SLOW-BLOW
Battery Fuse Size
7.5A 32v ATO blade style
DC Output Protection
Overload protection - current limited foldback circuit
Indicators
LED indicators:
-AC input (visible on outside of enclosure)
-DC output
Isolated SPDT contacts to monitor AC power status
Weight (Power Supply)
Approx. 9.0 lbs
Weight (Each Battery)
4.0 lbs
AC Input Termination
3 position terminal block with protective cover
Wire capacity: 10 AWG max.
DC Output Termination
2 position terminal block
Wire capacity: 12 AWG max.
Distribution board connectors
3
Fire Alarm board connector
No
Keylock
Optional
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5902
07/11
4 amp Power Supply
Overview
Schlage’s comprehensive line of power supplies and option
boards were designed to address the changing needs of the
access control market.
Installation is simplified by utilizing a flat mounting design and
polarized locking connectors for option boards. This new design
eliminates the need for racks and side connectors. The flat
mounting of the option boards also provides for easier access to
the terminal blocks for connection of electrified devices (such
as electrified strikes, electromagnetic locks, card readers, etc).
Common to the line of PS900 Series power supplies is a constant
output rating at both 12v and 24v settings, universal 120 VAC to
240 VAC input, and polarized option board connectors. New fire
alarm interface board mounting allows outputs to be configured
as switched (power cut) or unswitched (power continues) when
signal provided.
* All PS900 Series of power supplies and option boards have
been tested and certified to meet UL 294.
Photo as shown includes optional board(s)
Please contact your local sales office or visit the support
section on our website for configuration assistance.
Features and Benefits
• 4A @ 12/24 VDC output, field selectable with jumper
• Class 2 Rated power limited output
• Universal 120 -240 VAC input
• Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered
• Two polarized connectors for distribution boards
• Fused primary input
• AC input and DC output monitoring circuit
w/ LED indicators
• Cover mounted AC input indication
• Hinged cover w/ lock down screws
• High voltage protective cover
PS904 Power Supply
System Components
PS904
OPTIONS
• Emergency Interface Relay (FA)
-- Must be installed on distribution boards
• Battery Backup
• 2 relay QEL panic device control board
• 4 relay distribution board
• 4 relay distribution board with logic
-- Field configurable for:
• Time delay function
• Auto operator
• Security interlock
• 8 fused output distribution board
• 8 PTC output distribution board
PS904
PS904 Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Description
Input Voltage
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, universal input
Output Voltage
4A @ 12 or 24 VDC
Field selectable with jumper
Switching supply, 5% regulation, 240mVpp max ripple
Enclosure
Grey / Baked enamel
14"H x 12"W x 4"D
Eight 1/2" x 3/4" Knockouts
NEMA Grade 1
Hinged cover with lock down screws
Operating Temperature
32º-120º F (0º-49º C)
Certifications
UL 294
Class 2
RoHS
FCC Part 15
Option Board Compatibility
900-BB: Battery Backup
900-BBK: Battery Backup Kit (backup board and battery pack)
900-FA: Fire Alarm (Must be installed on distribution boards)
900-2Q: 2 Relay QEL control Board
900-4R: 4 Relay Output Board
900-4RL: 4 Relay Logic Board
900-8F: Fused 8 Zone Distribution Board
900-8P: PTC 8 Zone Distribution Board
AC Primary Fuse Size
4A, 250v, 5 x 20mm SLOW-BLOW
Battery Fuse Size
7.5A 32v ATO blade style
DC Output Protection
Overload protection - current limited foldback circuit
Indicators
LED indicators:
-AC input (visible on outside of enclosure)
-DC output
Isolated SPDT contacts to monitor AC power status
Weight (Power Supply)
Approx. 9.0 lbs
Weight (Each Battery)
4.0 lbs
AC Input Termination
3 position terminal block with protective cover
Wire capacity: 10 AWG max.
DC Output Termination
2 position terminal block
Wire capacity: 12 AWG max.
Distribution board connectors
2
Fire Alarm board connector
No
Keylock
Optional
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5901
07/11
2 amp Power Supply
Overview
Schlage’s comprehensive line of power supplies and option
boards were designed to address the changing needs of the
access control market.
Installation is simplified by utilizing a flat mounting design and
polarized locking connectors for option boards. This new design
eliminates the need for racks and side connectors. The flat
mounting of the option boards also provides for easier access to
the terminal blocks for connection of electrified devices (such
as electrified strikes, electromagnetic locks, card readers, etc).
Common to the line of PS900 Series power supplies is a constant output rating at both 12v and 24v settings, universal 120
VAC to 240 VAC input, and polarized option board connectors.
New fire alarm interface board mounting allows outputs to
be configured as switched (power cut) or unswitched (power
continues) when
signal provided.
* All PS900 Series of power supplies and option boards have
been tested and certified to meet UL 294.
Photo as shown includes optional board(s)
Please contact your local sales office or visit the support
section on our website for configuration assistance.
Features and Benefits
• 2A @ 12/24 VDC output, field selectable with jumper
• Class 2 Rated power limited output
• Universal 120 -240 VAC input
• Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered
• Single polarized connector for distribution board
• Fused primary input
• AC input and DC output monitoring circuit
w/ LED indicators
• Cover mounted AC input indication
• Hinged cover w/ lock down screws
• High voltage protective cover
PS902 Power Supply
System Components
PS902
OPTIONS
• Emergency Interface Relay (FA)
• Battery Backup
• 2 relay QEL panic device control board
• 4 relay distribution board
• 4 relay distribution board with logic
-- Field configurable for:
• Time delay function
• Auto operator
• Security interlock
• 8 fused output distribution board
• 8 PTC output distribution board
PS902
PS902 Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Description
Input Voltage
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, universal input
Output Voltage
2A @ 12 or 24 VDC
Field selectable with jumper
Switching supply, 5% regulation, 240mVpp max ripple
Enclosure
Grey / Baked enamel
14"H x 12"W x 4"D
Eight 1/2" x 3/4" Knockouts
NEMA Grade 1
Hinged cover with lock down screws
Operating Temperature
32º-120º F (0º-49º C)
Certifications
UL 294
Class 2
RoHS
FCC Part 15
Option Board Compatibility
900-BB: Battery Backup
900-BBK: Battery Backup Kit (backup board and battery pack)
900-FA: Fire Alarm
900-2Q: 2 Relay QEL control Board
900-4R: 4 Relay Output Board
900-4RL: 4 Relay Logic Board
900-8F: Fused 8 Zone Distribution Board
900-8P: PTC 8 Zone Distribution Board
AC Primary Fuse Size
3.15A, 250v, 5 x 20mm SLOW-BLOW
Battery Fuse Size
7.5A 32v ATO blade style
DC Output Protection
Overload protection - current limited foldback circuit
Indicators
LED indicators:
-AC input (visible on outside of enclosure)
-DC output
Isolated SPDT contacts to monitor AC power status
Weight (Power Supply)
Approx. 9.0 lbs
Weight (Each Battery)
4.0 lbs
AC Input Termination
3 position terminal block with protective cover
Wire capacity: 10 AWG max.
DC Output Termination
2 position terminal block
Wire capacity: 12 AWG max.
Distribution board connectors
1
Fire Alarm board connector
Yes
Keylock
Optional
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5900
07/11
4 amp Power Supply
(Von Duprin)
Overview
Von Duprin’s power supply and option boards were designed to
meet the specific requirements of electrified fire exit devices.
Installation is simplified by utilizing a flat mounting design and
polarized locking connectors for option boards. This new design
eliminates the need for racks and side connectors. The flat
mounting of the option boards also provides for easier access to
the terminal blocks for connection of electrified devices (such
as electrified panic devices, strikes, card readers, etc).
Common to the line of PS900 Series power supplies is a constant
output rating at both 12v and 24v settings, universal 120 VAC to
240 VAC input, and polarized option board connectors. New fire
alarm interface board mounting allows outputs to be configured
as switched (power cut) or unswitched (power continues) when
signal provided.
* All PS900 Series of power supplies and option boards have
been tested and certified to meet UL 294.
Photo as shown includes optional board(s)
Please contact your local sales office or visit the support
section on our website for configuration assistance.
Features and Benefits
• 4A @ 12/24 VDC output, field selectable with jumper
• Designed with high in rush current for powering
electrified panic devices
• Universal 120 -240 VAC input
• Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered
• Electronic power limiting foldback circuit for
AC current overload protection
• Two polarized connectors for distribution boards
• Fused primary input
• AC status monitor - isolated SPDT contacts
• AC input and DC output LED status indicators
• Cover mounted AC input indication
• Hinged cover w/ lock down screws
• High voltage protective cover
PS914 Power Supply
System Components
PS914
OPTIONS
• Fire Alarm Relay (FA)
-- Must be installed on distribution boards
• Battery Backup
• 2 relay EL panic device control board
• 2 relay QEL panic device control board
• 4 relay distribution board
• 4 relay distribution board with logic
-- Field configurable for:
• Time delay function
• Auto operator
• Security interlock
• 8 fused output distribution board
• 8 PTC output distribution board
PS914Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Description
Input Voltage
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, universal input
Output Voltage
4A @ 12 or 24 VDC
Field selectable with jumper
Switching supply, 5% regulation, 360mVpp max ripple
Enclosure
Grey / Baked enamel
14"H x 12"W x 4"D
Eight 1/2" x 3/4" Knockouts
Hinged cover with lock down screws
Operating Temperature
32º-120º F (0º-49º C)
Certifications
UL 294
RoHS
FCC Part 15
Class 2
Option Board Compatibility
900-BB: Battery Backup
900-BBK: Battery Backup Kit (backup board and battery pack)
900-FA: Fire Alarm (Must be installed on distribution boards)
900-2RS: 2 Relay EL panic device control board
900-2Q: 2 Relay QEL panic device control Board
900-4R: 4 Relay Output Board
900-4RL: 4 Relay Logic Board
900-8F: Fused 8 Zone Distribution Board
900-8P: PTC 8 Zone Distribution Board
AC Primary Fuse Size
6.3A, 250v, 5 x 20mm SLOW-BLOW
Battery Fuse Size
7.5A 32v ATO blade style
DC Output Protection
Overload protection - current limited foldback circuit
Indicators
LED indicators:
-AC input (visible on outside of enclosure)
-DC output
Isolated SPDT contacts to monitor AC power status
Weight (Power Supply)
Approx. 9.0 lbs
Weight (Each Battery)
4.0 lbs
AC Input Termination
3 position terminal block with protective cover
Wire capacity: 10 AWG max.
DC Output Termination
2 position terminal block
Wire capacity: 12 AWG max.
Distribution board connectors
2
Fire Alarm board connector
No
Keylock
Optional
877-671-7011 • vonduprin.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
VD-5903
07/11
Heavy Duty Pushbuttons
Overview
Schlage Pushbuttons are used to control the ingress and/or
egress of a door. The 620 and 631 Series Pushbuttons are easy
to install and operate. Their standard and narrow stile plates
offer ultimate flexibility. The 620 to 631 Series have multiple
button configuration and finish options provide enhanced
architectural appeal.
Schlage 620 and 631 Series Pushbuttons also offer significant
installer friendly innovations: screw terminal connections for the
momentary action models, easy to install L2/ILL optional PC
board offering backlit illumination for the cone with green and
red LEDs for monitoring purposes. Additional options include:
Delayed Action, Double Pole Double Throw, Heavy Duty Plate,
with several architectural finishes and extreme duty pushbuttons.
Features and Benefits
• Pushbuttons are available in 1-1/4”, 1-5/8”, and
2-3/4” sizes
• Two metal 1-1/4” button options: aluminum with
engraved painted red “PUSH TO EXIT”, and red coated
aluminum button with engraved “PUSH TO EXIT”
• 631 Push button available in 1-1/4” metal button,
single gang and narrow stile.
• Two models of metal 1-1/4” button: aluminum with
engraved painted red “PUSH TO EXIT” and new red
coated aluminum with engraved “PUSH TO EXIT”
• Variety of colors and finishes available
620/631 Series Heavy Duty Pushbuttons
System Components
620/631 Series
Button Configurations
GID-EX
GID-H
GID
Finishes
RD-EX
RD
GR-EX
621
621 - NS
PUSH
TO
EXIT
PUSH
TO
EXIT
PUSH
TO
EXIT
623
623 - NS
PUSH
TO
EXIT
PUSH
TO
EXIT
PUSH
TO
EXIT
625
625 - NS
PUSH
TO
EXIT
631
631 - NS
BL-H
BK
PUSH
TO
EXIT
AL-EX
621
621 - NS
GR
SF-626
Satin
Chrome
(standard)
SF-605
Bright
Brass
SF-612
Satin
Bronze
SF-625
Bright
Chrome
SF-1
White
Powder
Coat
SF-2
Black
Powder
Coat
SF-613
Oil
Rubbed
Bronze
AL
PUSH
TO
EXIT
AL-EX
AL-RD-EX
PUSH
TO
EXIT
PUSH
TO
EXIT
Multiple Button Configuration
1-5/8˝ Mushroom Button
1-1/4˝ Button
Ordering Information
Model
Button
Options
Finish
621-GID-DA-SF-626
1
2
3
4
2-3/4˝ Mushroom Button
Selections Correspond With the Numbers to the left
3. Options
1 Model
621
621-NS
623
623-NS
625
625-NS
631
631-N
1 1/4” Button, single gang
1 1/4” Button Narrow Stile
1 5/8” Mushroom Button, single gang
1 5/8” Mushroom Button Narrow Stile
2 3/4” Mushroom Button, single gang
2 3/4” Mushroom Button Narrow Stile
1 1/4” Metal Button, single gang
1 1/4” Metal Button Narrow Stile
DA
AA
DP
L2/ILL
HDP
Glow-in-the-dark “PUSH TO EXIT”
Glow-in-the-dark handicapped symbol
Glow-in-the-dark
Red, “PUSH TO EXIT”
Red
Green, “PUSH TO EXIT”
Green
Blue, handicapped symbol
Black
Aluminum button red coated, engraved
“PUSH TO EXIT”
Aluminum button, engraved
“PUSH TO EXIT”
Aluminum button
4. Finish
2. Button
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
1-1/4˝ Metal Button
GID-EX
GID-H
GID
RD-EX
RD GR-EX
GR
BL-H
BK
AL-EX-RD
AL-EX
AL
SF-626
SF-605
SF-612
SF-613
SF-625
SF-1
SF-2
Delayed Action (0-60 seconds)
Alternate Action Maintained
Double Pole Double Throw (not available
with DA option)
3 LEDs -green/yellow/red concealed
within opaque cone (not available for
625/625-NS models)
Heavy Duty Plate-1/4. thick Cast Zinc
(standard - 626 Satin Chrome Finish)
Satin Chrome (standard)
Bright Brass
Satin Bronze
Oil Satin Bronze
Bright Chrome
White Powder Coat
Black Powder Coat
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5975
07/11
Pushbuttons
Overview
Schlage Pushbuttons are used to control the ingress and/or
egress of a door. The 700 Series Pushbuttons are easy to install
and operate.
Schlage 700 Series Entry Level Pushbuttons are designed to
meet commercial applications. Use with egress swinging or
sliding doors that are electrically or electronically locked. 700
Series Entry Level Pushbuttons are available for single gang
and narrow stile applications. The 709 model includes backlit
buttons with “PUSH TO EXIT” or Handicap Symbol to meet
ADA requirements.
Features and Benefits
• Single gang and narrow stile
• Standard stainless steel
• Momentary action (standard)
• Options include LEDs, alternate action – maintained (AA)
700 Series Pushbuttons
System Components
700 Series
700 Specifications
701 Pushbutton
Contact Ratings
5A @ 30VAC/UDC, momentary
SPDT contacts
Wire Leads
20 awg – 6” long
709 Pushbutton
Contact Ratings
5A @ 30VAC/UDC, momentary
SPDT contacts
Wire Leads
20 awg – 8” long
Input requirements with LED option
Voltage
12/24 VDC
Current Draw
30 mA
Wire Leads
24 awg – 6” long
Input requirements with ILL option
Voltage
12 VDC for 709 series only
24 VDC for 701/709 series
ORDERING INFORMATION
701RD
7/8” Red Mushroom Button
701BK
7/8” Black Mushroom Button
701RD EX
5/8” Red Button - Engraved “PUSH TO EXIT”
701RD EX ILL
5/8” Red Button – Illuminated “PUSH TO EXIT”
709RD EX ILL
2” Red Square - Illuminated “PUSH TO EXIT”
709GR EX ILL
2” Green Square – Illuminated “PUSH TO EXIT”
709BLH ILL
2” Blue Square – Illuminated Handicapped Symbol
OPTIONS
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
L2
Two LEDs, red and green, dual voltage
AA
Alternate Action – Maintained (not available for 709 models)
NS
Narrow Stile plate (not available for 709 models)
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003911
12/11
Emergency Break Glass Releases
Overview
Schlage 740 Series Emergency Break Glass Releases are
designed for use as emergency releases of non-designated
egress doors such as in individual and partitioned laboratories,
secluded testing areas, or other isolated work rooms that are
purposely provided with exit doors. In perimeter protection
systems that involve the central control of electric locking
devices, an on-site emergency release may be required. The
“break glass” concept may be preferred over the pull station,
because it is less vulnerable to misuse or tamper actuation.
The 740 Series Emergency Break Glass units consist of a
replacement Break glass cartridge, that normally holds the
plunger-activated switch depressed until the cartridge lens is
broken. When the lens is broken the plunger moves forward
and alters the switch contact position. Four replacement lens
disks are provided with each assembly. The small hammer is
attached to the Break Glass Assembly via a mounting clip along
with a 12” chain, to insure it will not detach from the assembly.
Features and Benefits
• Surface mount in a standard 3-gang enclosure
• Compatible with all Fail Safe type electronic locking
systems
• An effective alternative to the standard pull box
• Stainless steel standard finish
• Models with LED or audible alarm
• Clearly marked signage indicating purpose of the
release
740 Emergency Release
System Components
740 Series
740 Specifications - Contact Box from “Z” switch
Contact Rating
6A @ 120 VAC
Normally Open (NO)
Normally Closed (NC) contacts with
color-coded leads
LED
12/24 VDC
Horn
3-18 mA
Input
6-28 VDC
Decibles
80 dB @ 2ft.
ORDERING INFORMATION
740 – Includes break glass switch assembly and hammer mounted to
a silk-screened 3-gang stainless switch plate
741 – Includes an attached indicator light with red lens
742 – Includes a Sonalert horn for 6-24 VDC operation attached to
the plate
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5977
07/11
Mini Station Control
Overview
The 660 Series Mini Station Control is designed for concealed
desk application, and it is used to release an electric or electronic
locking mechanism from a remote location. The 660 Series Mini
Station Control is mounted in a mini aluminum box, 2” x 2” x
1”. The 660 is available with a momentary action pushbutton or
maintained action toggle switch. Both can be surface mounted. A
typical application is under a desk to release an entrance door
Features and Benefits
• Surface mount application
• Choice of maintained or momentary action
• Compact size
• Recommended for concealed desk application
660 Series Mini Station Control
System Components
660 Series
Specifications
Switch contact rating:
6 AMP @ 128 VAC
Length
2”
Width
2”
Height
1
ORDERING INFORMATION
660-T4 SPDT Maintained Toggle
660-PB PB SPDT Momentary Pushbutton (DPDT Optional)
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5979
07/11
Keyswitches
Overview
Schlage 650 Series Keyswitches utilize and innovative
magnetic spring design which allows installers to configure
both clockwise and counterclockwise key turn direction as well
as momentary or maintained action in seconds. Single gang
and narrow stiles are available with numerous options which
include: Heavy Duty Plate, Weather Resistant Cover (single
gang size only), 2 LED lights – green/red, Anti-Tamper Switch
and Schlage Everest Cylinder. In addition to the standard (626)
Satin Chrome finish, there are five additional architectural
finishes to choose from.
Features and Benefits
• Easy to install and maintain
• Single gang and narrow stile offer ultimate flexibility
• Multiple options
650 Series Keyswitches
System Components
650 Series
Innovative magnetic spring technology allows installers to configure models in seconds
MOMENTARY ACTION
MAINTAINED ACTION
Momentary action - magnet dot side up.
Maintained action - magnet dot side down.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specifications
Standard keyswitch
• 5 [email protected] VAC,
• dual voltage,
• SPDT contacts
ATS switch closes when cover is on [email protected]
LED Indicator Lights operate at 12/24 VDC [email protected]
653-04 653-05 653-14 653-15 653-1414 653-1415 653-1515 653-041 653-0404 653-0405 653-141 653-0505 SPDT maintained single direction
SPDT momentary single direction
DPDT maintained single direction
DPDT momentary single direction
(2) DPDT maintained bi-direction
DPDT maintained x DPDT momentary
(2) DPDT momentary bi-direction
SPDT maintained x key remove one position
(2) SPDT maintained bi-direction
SPDT maintained x SPDT momentary
DPDT maintained x key remove one position
(2) SPDT momentary bi-direction
OPTIONS
L2 NS ATS HDP WP CYL CYL-KA 2 LEDs green and red, dual voltage
Narrow Stile - stainless steel plate (1 3/4” x 4 1/2”)
Anti-Tamper Switch
Heavy Duty Plate 1/4” thick cast zinc (standard 626
Satin Chrome Finish with anti tamper plugs)
Weather Resistant Cover fits 1 1/8” cylinder only
(not available with NS and L2 Options)
1-1/4” Schlage Everest® Mortise Cylinder &
1/8” spacer ring (keyed different)
1-1/4” Schlage Everest Mortise Cylinder &
1/8” spacer ring (keyed alike)
Note: 650 Series Keyswitches operate with either a 1-1/8” or 1-1/4”
cylinder having a straight type cam. 1-1/4” cylinders require a 1/8”
blocking/spacer ring (included with the CYL and CYL-KA options).
FINISH
SF-626
SF-605
SF-612
SF-613
SF-625
SF-2 877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Satin Chrome (standard)
Bright Brass
Satin Bronze
Oil Satin Bronze
Bright Chrome
Black Powder Coat
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5978
07/11
TouchBar
Overview
The 672 TouchBar is a request to exit device which releases
electromagnetic or electronic locks when the bar is depressed.
Designed for easy installation, smooth operation and maximum
durability, the 672 TouchBar offers unmatched features and
user benefits.
The “Push to Exit” signage provides an obvious exit indication
for building occupants and the simplified design allows for
reversing the signage in the field. The new pivoting bar design
allows 1/4” activation and the 2-1/4” low profile provides
ample clearance through the door - notably less than others in
the industry.
The 672 TouchBar Request to Exit Device is easy to install and
simple to wire. The device’s rugged cast ramped end caps
deflect blows and provide extra durability.
• 1/4” Movement activates immediate release
• DPDT (standard)
Features and Benefits
• Heavy duty aluminum extrusion with powder coat cast
metal end caps - Maximum durability
• Field reversible, field sized
• Quick install brackets / Universal mounting system for
aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors
• Low profile for greater clearance through door
• “PUSH TO EXIT” signage designates opening
• Glow in the Dark (GID) “PUSH TO EXIT” option
672 Series Request-to-Exit Bar
System Components
672 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
Door Size
36”, 42” or 48”
Finishes
628 Satin Anodized Aluminum (standard)
313 Dark Satin Bronze Anodized Aluminum
672 TouchBar Electrical Specifications
Input Voltage
12 or 24 VDC maximum current draw
.25 Amps
Switch
DPDT contacts rated 4 Amps @
30 VDC
Wiring
6 Conductor Cable - 20 AWG (standard)
TouchPads
RD Black with red “PUSH TO EXIT”
GID Black with Glow in the Dark “PUSH TO EXIT”
Handing
RHR Right Hand Reverse
LHR Left Hand Reverse -Field Reversible
Options
WD
Sexnut door kit for heavy duty wood door and hollow
metal door applications
AR
18” x 1/2” armored door cord (less wire)
SHK
Aluminum door mounting shim kit includes brackets
shims and screws for narrow stile aluminum doors.*
* Note: Screw pack has self-drilling and self-tapping screws
for aluminum and wood door applications and rivnuts for
hollow metal door applications.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
003909
12/11
SmartBar™
Overview
The 692 SmartBar is an electronic switching device with no
moving parts, which serves as a non-latching request to exit
bar at and egress door. It allows one motion egress at doors
equipped with electromagnetic or electronic locks, with “no
prior knowledge” required by the user. Touching the SmartBar
at any point on the bar activates internal circuitry which controls
power to the locking device. No moving parts results in low
maintenance and long life.
The 692 SmartBar provides two directionally opposed infrared
detection circuits to sense an exit request. As a person touches
the bar the light beam is broken. The patent pending redundant
system provides a high level of life safety and peace of mind to
the end user.
An audible alarm is standard. This feature provides a security
alarm to alert when there is a prolonged unlocked condition
caused by a continued break in the light beam. This feature
is desirable in applications requiring monitoring of security
conditions or delayed egress.
• Dual Infrared detection circuits – patent pending
• No Moving Parts – One Motion Egress
• Audible alarm standard, alerts prolonged unlock condition
• DPDT relay standard – single access control panel or
auxiliary device
Features and Benefits
• Heavy duty aluminum extrusion with cast metal end
caps - Maximum durability
• Field reversible, field sized
• Quick install brackets / Universal mounting system for
aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors
• Low profile for greater clearance through door
• “PUSH TO EXIT” signage designates opening
• Glow in the Dark “PUSH TO EXIT” option
692 Series Request-to-Exit Bar
System Components
692 Series
692 SmartBar Electrical Specifications
Input Voltage
12 or 24 VDC maximum current draw
.5 Amps
Switch
DPDT contacts rated 4 Amps @ 30 VDC
Wiring
8 Conductor Cable - 20 AWG (standard)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Door Size
36”, 42” or 48”
Finishes
628 Satin Anodized Aluminum (standard)
313 Dark Satin Bronze Anodized Aluminum
TouchPads
RD Black with red “PUSH TO EXIT”
GID Black with Glow in the Dark “PUSH TO EXIT”
Handing
RHR Right Hand Reverse
LHR Left Hand Reverse -Field Reversible
Options
WD
Sexnut door kit for heavy duty wood door and hollow metal door
applications
AR
18” x 1/2” armored door cord (less wire)
SHK
Aluminum door mounting shim kit includes brackets shims and
screws for narrow stile aluminum doors.*
* Note: Screw pack has self-drilling and self-tapping screws for aluminum
and wood door applications and rivnuts for hollow metal door applications.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5899
07/11
Remote and Local
Monitoring Stations
Overview
800 Series Local & Remote Monitoring Station
The 800 Series monitoring stations can provide monitoring for
a single zone with up to 2 LED indicators.
801 Series Local & Remote Monitoring Stations
The 801 unit includes an audible and visual indication of lock
status and delay activation. Interfaces with electromagnetic
locks with magnetic bond sensor (MBS) option. Unit mounts
in a standard single gang electrical box.
The 801-KS fulfills a code requirement stating that a local signal
assures users that a delayed egress system is functional. The
unit includes an audible and visual indication of lock status and
delay activation. Provides a Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT)
momentary x SPDT maintained contact arrangement keyswitch
for legal release and reset of the system, which interfaces with
a standard 1-1/4” mortise cylinder with standard straight cam.
Interfaces with electromagnetic locks with magnetic bond
sensor (MBS) option. Unit mounts in a standard double gang
electrical box.
Features and Benefits
800 Series Local & Remote Monitoring Station
• Up to 2 LED Indicators
801 Series Local & Remote Monitoring Stations
• 801-KS Option
800 Series Monitoring Stations
System Components
800 Series
800 Specifications
Operating Power:
12/24 VDC
LED Operating Power:
6-28 VDC
LED Current Draw:
30 mA ea.
Audible Input:
10-28 VDC
Audible Current Draw:
3-14 mA
Decibel Rating:
80 dB @ 2 ft.
Single Gang Unit
Length:
2-3/4"
Width:
1-1/2"
Height:
4-1/2"
Finish:
Stainless Steel
800L1
One (1) LED Indicator - red, green, and amber
800L2
Two (2) LED Indicators - red, green, and amber
800A
Audible Sounder
801 Specifications
Operating Power:
12/24 VDC
LED Operating Power:
6-28 VDC
LED Current Draw:
30 mA ea.
Audible Input:
10-28 VDC
Audible Current Draw:
3-14 mA
Decibel Rating:
80 dB @ 2 ft.
Single Gang Unit
801* Local or Remote Monitoring System
Length:
2-3/4"
Width:
1-1/2"
Height:
4-1/2"
Finish:
Stainless Steel
Double Gang Unit
801-KS* Local or Remote Monitoring System with Keyswitch (less cylinder)
Length:
4-9/16"
Width:
1-15/16"
Height:
4-1/2"
Finish:
Stainless Steel
Keyswitch Contacts:
5A/250 VAC
*Note: 801/801-KS requires MBS on locking device.
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5988
07/11
Consoles
Overview
Schlage 8200 Series desk consoles provide door control and
monitoring for up to eight zones. Designed to meet a wide
range of security requirements, the 8200 Series can control and
monitor electric strikes, electromagnetic locks, electromechanical
exit devices or other electric locks. The console can also be used
for surveillance of monitoring devices.
The circuit boards inside the console are shipped for four or
eight zone applications. This design allows for momentary or
maintained switch operation. Pushbuttons control and monitor
assigned zones, and a signaling horn provides an audible alert
of any conditions change that is associated with the red indicator
lamp. Console control can be disabled with the security keyswitch.
Features and Benefits
• Slope front design, with anodized face plate and
durable housing
• Each station provides maintained or momentary Single
Pole, Double Throw (SPDT) pushbutton switch
• Red and green indicator lamps
• Security keyswitch
• Signaling horn
• Alarm reset button
• 24 VDC operation
8200 Series Door Control Consoles
System Components
8200 Series
SYSTEM DESIGN GUIDE
There are a number of applications where and 8200
Series Console is used to monitor and control multiple
door openings. It is ideal for use at a guard or nurse
station. (An example of a riser diagram for a two door
nurse’s station console is shown below.)
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM OPERATION
Two single doors, each normally closed and secured by
a magnetic lock. Magnetic lock to include Magnetic
Bond Sensor (MBS) for remote monitoring of secure/
not-secure condition. Legal access to be provided by
keypad system. Egress to be provided by touch sensitive
exit bars. Remote control and monitoring to be by
a slope front desktop console. Each of two stations
shall provide a momentary pushbutton switch for legal
release, a red indicator for “not-secure” condition and
a green indicator for “secure” condition.
Specifications
Switches
(momentary or maintained)
1.0 amps 24 VDC
Lamps #85 Red/Green
04 amps @24 VDC
Terminal Block
18/22 gauge wire
Alarm output
0.5 amps @ 24 VDC (breaker protected)
Temperature Range
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Input Voltage
24 VDC, ±15%
Console
Power Supply
Controller
Riser Diagram
Controller
Mag Lock
Mag Lock
Reader/
Key Card
Reader/Key Card
Exit Device
Exit Device
ORDERING INFORMATION
Last Digit Indicates Number of Zones
4 Station Console
8204
8 Station Console
8208
PUSHBUTTON FUNCTION
Select pushbutton function by zone.
Select M (momentary) or A (alternate action, maintain) for each zone.
8204
8208
1
_
_
2
_
_
3
_
_
4
_
_
5
6
7
8
_
_
_
_
ACCESSORIES
Field Installable Push Buttons
8200MS – Momentary Switch Assembly
8200 MA – Alternate Action (Maintained) Switch Assembly
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5983
07/11
Passive Infrared
Motion Sensors
Overview
The Scan II™ is a Passive Infrared Detector specifically designed
for “request to exit” applications. It has an adjustable relay
latch time, is internally pointable, and provides two Form “C”
sets of relay contacts.
The enclosure design consists of a three piece, high impact ABS
plastic enclosure with fresnel lens and is available in white or
black. The coverage area of Scan II™ is up to 8 by 10 feet (2.4m
by 3m). Coverage is dependent upon mounting height and
pattern angle. Pattern Pointability is ± 14° @ vertical. Surface
mounting height range is from 7 to 15 feet (2.1m to 4.5m). The
unit also features an externally visible activation LED.
Features and Benefits
• Output – Two Form “C” relay contacts rated 1A @
30 VDC for DC resistive loads
• Relay Latch Time is adjustable up to 60 seconds
• The relay mode can be programmed by the installer to
reset when the timer expires or to remain activated until
motion stops. The fail safe/fail secure mode can also be
selected.
• 12/24 VDC, 26 mA @ 12 VDC or 24 VDC
• Output Two Form “C” relay contacts rated 1A @ 30 VDC
for DC resistive loads
• Operating Temperature -20°F to 120°F (-29°C to 49°C)
• Size 1-1/2” (38mm) H x 6 1/4” (159mm)
W x 1-1/2” (38mm) D
• UL Listed
Scan II Motion Sensors
System Components
Scan II™
Front View
Side View
Standard Pattern
Shown wall mounted, angled 14° down.
Standard Pattern
Shown wall mounted, angled 14° down.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Scan II – B Scan II – W 877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Black
White
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5984
07/11
Overview
Electric horns are designed for use as an immediate local
audible warning device incorporated in a security system. 1910
Selica Horns have eight combinations of volume, tone, and
code that are easily user configurable. Strobe and latching
combinations are also available.
Units are flush and surface mountable using a standard one or
two gang electrical box. Surface and flush mounting kits are
included with all horns.
Features and Benefits
• All horns are off white in color and come with a
skirt for a clean finish.
• Designed for indoor use only.
• Available in four models:
-- 1910-1 Horn 12/24 VDC
-- 1910S-1 Horn with Strobe 24 VDC
-- L1910-1 Horn with Latching 24 VDC
-- L1910S-1 Horn with Strobe and Latching 24 VDC
• Current Draw:
-- Less than 14 mA @ 12 V
-- Less than 28 mA @ 24 V
-- Less than 71 mA @ 24 V, with strobe
• Operating Temperature: 32ºF to 120ºF
• Anechoic Room @30 V 102 dba
• UL Reverbrant Room @30 V 88 dba
Electric Horns
System Components
Electronic Horns
ORDERING INFORMATION
1910-1
1910S-1
L1910-1
L1910S-1
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
12/24 VDC Horn
24 VDC Horn with Strobe
24 VDC Horn with Latching
24 VDC Horn with Strobe and Latching
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5985
07/11
Overview
Door position switches are used to detect the open or closed
status of an opening and then send this status to a control panel.
They come in a variety of shapes and sizes and are designed for
monitoring door positions, roof hatches, gates etc.
Concealed SPDT Magnetic Switches
For Wood Doors and Frames
0.3 Amps @ 30 VDC
679-05
For Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
0.3 Amps @ 30 VDC
679-05 HM
For Wood Doors and Metal Frames
0.3 Amps @ 30 VDC
679-05 WD
Concealed/Flush Mount
Magnetic Switches
For aluminum, wood and hollow
metal doors 0.25 Amps @ 30 VDC
UL Listed
7764
Surface Mount Magnetic Switches
For aluminum, wood and hollow metal
doors 0.25 Amps @ 30 VDC UL Listed
7766
Overhead Door, Floor Mount
Magnetic Switch
674-OH
Door Position Switches
System Components
Door Position
Switches
ORDERING INFORMATION
674-OH
679-05
679-05HM
679-05WD
7764
7766
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
Overhead Door Floor Mount
Wood Door and Frame
Hollow Metal Door and Frame
Wood Door and Metal Frame
Concealed/Flush Mount
Surface Mount
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-5986
07/11
with Caps
Overview
Used when installing electric exit devices or electric locks,
armored door cords provide a simple and economical solution
for transferring power from frame to door.
Armored Door Cords
System Components
Armored Door Cords
Specifications
Acceptable Wire Size Combinations
• Five 18 gauge
• Two 18 gauge and four 20 gauge
• Two 18 gauge and seven 22 gauge
• Seven 20 gauge
• Twelve 22 gauge
5/16” interior diameter;
3/8” outside diameter flexible door cord
Model
Description
788-12 788C-12 788-18 788C-18 12” x 3/8” less wires (inswinging)
12” x 3/8” with 20” 4-Conductor wire,
20 gauge wire
18” x 3/8” less wires (outswinging)
18” x 3/8” with 26” 4-Conductor wire,
20 gauge wire
3/8” interior diameter;
1/2” outside diameter flexible door cord
Acceptable Wire Size Combinations
Model
Description
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
798-12 798C-12
798-18 798C-18 12” x 1/2” less wires (inswinging)
12” x 1/2” with 20” 4-Conductor wire,
20 gauge wire
18” x 1/2” less wires (outswinging)
18” x 1/2” with 26” 4-Conductor
wire, 20 gauge wire
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005006
02/12
Electrified Dead Bolt Locks
Overview
The PB405 PowerBolt is a mortise, right angle deadbolt with
a .61” bolt and a .67” throw. It is available fail safe PB405 or
fail secure PB405S.
NOTE: Electromechanical locks not recommended where life
safety may be compromised, or where panic bar hardware is the
only means of egress.
Mortise mount electric bolts furnished in Satin
Aluminum Finish.
Features
• 12/24V DC
• Magnetic door sensor
• Built in relocking option
• Fail-safe, or fail-secure
PB405 & PB405S Power Bolts
System Components
PB405 and PB405S
Specifications
PB405 Electric Dead Bolt Lock (Fail Safe)
1. Door sensor
2. 12V/24V DC
3. Current Draw: 0.9A @ 12 VDC, 0.45A @ 24 VDC;
12/24 VDC dual voltage, field selectable
4. Fail-safe type (Power to lock)
5. Built-in Relocking option
6. Operation delay time: 0 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec., 9 sec.
7. Bolt diameter: 0.61 in
8. Bolt throw: 0.67 in
9. Weight: 1.9lbs
10. Dimension: 7.87 in (L) x 1.26 in (W) x 1.57 in (D)
PB405S Electric Dead Bolt Lock (Fail Secure)
1. Door sensor
2. 12V/24V DC.
3. Current Draw: 0.9A @ 12 VDC, 0.45A @ 24 VDC;
12/24 VDC dual voltage, field selectable
4. Fail-secure type (Power to open.), MOV surge protection.
5. Operation delay time: 0 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec., 9 sec.
6. Built-in relocking option
7. Bolt diameter: 0.61 in
8. Bolt throw: 0.67 in
9. Weight: 1.9lbs
10. Dimension: 7.87 in (L) x 1.26 in (W) x 1.57 in (D)
ORDERING INFORMATION
405 - Rectangular Front, Fail Safe
405S - Rectangular Front, Fail Secure
Fail Secure Lock – Requires power to unlock
Fail Safe Lock – Requires power to lock
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
005011
12/11
This section of the Electronic Access Control catalog includes:
• Resource Guides
• Solution Sheets
• Wiring Diagrams
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand 005138 09/11
AD-Series Resources
Literature
–
Location:
Utilize “search” on AD-Series page to locate
each piece using the description in parentheses
• Benefits Brochure (Benefits Brochure)
• Selection Guide (Selection Guide)
• Mini-Brochure (ES-5542)
• Market Application Sheets
– Higher Education (ES_5528)
– K-12 (ES_5529)
– Healthcare (ES_5527)
Selection Guide
Web & Interactive Tools
•
•
•
•
www.schlage.com/ad-series
CLICK HERE
• Datasheets
– AD-200 (004442)
– AD-250 (004436)
– AD-300 (004448)
– AD-400 (004446)
– AD-301 FIPS 201-1 Compliant (004869)
– AD-401 FIPS 201-1 Compliant (004870)
– SUS on HHD (004443)
Mini-Brochure – Proximity or Smart Keyfobs (004227)
– Exit Trim Companion Sheet
(found in technical library)
– Software Feature Compatibility Matrix
(found in technical library)
Location:
www.schlage.com/ad-series
Service and Support: includes Contact Us page, 150 FAQ’s, & Technical Library
Interactive Benefits Overview: Learn about the flexible, scalable, and adaptable features
Interactive Product Tour: View product highlights and features in the 360° tour
Interactive Product Selector: Configure an AD-Series lock to fit your needs
Product Selector
Training
Benefits Overview
Location:
CLICK HERE
Product Tour
YouTube and IRU
CLICK HERE
•
AD-Series e-Learning Courses on IRU
– Today Meets Tomorrow - value proposition
– Explore the Details - product information
– Make the Case - return on investment
http://schlage.com/onlinecourses
For guest access enter your username and password.
First time users click on “Don’t have a login?” for registration.
• 27 AD-Series “How to Videos” are now available to view on the
AD-Series YouTube Channel
– http://www.youtube.com/user/SchlageAD
• Specialty formatted videos are available to download to your HHD at:
– www.schlage.com/ad-series
> Service & Support > Download “How To” Videos
AD-Series Resources
Technical Documents
Location:
www.schlage.com/support
• The Technical Library contains:
• Templates
– Organized by Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise Deadbolt, and 993/Exit
– Retrofit Overlay Template available
• User Guides (found under Installation Manuals)
– Organized by AD-400, AD-300, AD-250,
AD-200, AD-Series Exit Trim, PIM400-TD2,
PIM400-485, HHD, SUS, and PIB300-2D
• Installation Manuals
– Organized by Cylindrical, Mortise, and Exit
• Application Notes/Technical Bulletins
• Firmware & Software
– AD Firmware Package
– Schlage SUS Software
– Note: Check for updates on a regular basis
• Also found within Technical Library
– Brochures/Sales Materials
– Datasheets and Solution Sheets
– How To Videos
– A&E Specs and More
CLICK HERE
Web & Interactive tools Distributor & Channel Partner Tools
Location:
PartnerLink
– Registered Users: http://partnerlink-admin.ingersollrand.com/Pages/AD-Series.aspx
– New Users: Go to http://partnerlink.ingersollrand.com and click on the new user link
• AD-Series can be found at: PartnerLink > Product Info > Access Control &Video > AD-Series
– Tools not available on the public web:
• Parts Guides
• Cross-Reference Tools
• Weights & Dimensions
• Pricebooks
• PartnerLink Connection Newsletter
• And more
CLICK HERE
Additional Resources
• EAC Catalog
http://epub.securitytechnologies.com
• “How To” App for AD-Series
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
• Security Technologies Page:
http://w3.securitytechnologies.com/irst/Pages/default.aspx
• AD-Series Software Integrations:
http://partnerlink-admin.ingersollrand.com/ProductInformation/
AccessControl/AD-Series/Pages/AD-Series.aspx
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004085
06/12
CO-Series Resources
Literature
•
•
Location:
www.schlage.com/support
CLICK HERE
Brochures
• Flipbook (004122)
• Mini Brochure (ES-5916)
Data Sheets
• CO-100 (004186)
• CO-200 (004185)
• CO-250 (004184)
• Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on Handheld Device (HHD) (004443)
• Proximity or Smart KeyFobs (004227)
• Exit Trim Companion Sheet (004183)
• Software Feature Compatibility Matrix (004074)
Flip Book
Mini Brochure
Web & Interactive Tools
•
•
•
•
Location:
www.schlage.com
CO-Series web page can be found at: schlage.com > For Your Business > Products > Locks >
Electronic Locks & System Components > CO-Series
Interactive Product Selector
Service and Support: Includes Contact Us page, FAQ’s & Technical Library
Interactive Product Tour: View product highlights and features in the 360° product tour
Product Selector
Training
FAQ
schlage.com/onlinecourses
For guest access enter your username and password.
First time users click on “Don’t have a login?” for registration.
360° Product Tour
Location:
• CO-Series e-Learning Courses on Ingersoll Rand University (IRU)
• Get to Know the CO
CLICK HERE
IRU and CO Web Page
• CO-Series How To Videos
CLICK HERE
CO-Series Resources
Technical Documents
Location:
www.schlage.com/support
• The Technical Library contains:
• Templates
• Organized by Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise Deadbolt, and Exit Trim
• Retrofit Overlay Template available
• User Guides (found under Installation Manuals)
• Organized by CO-100, CO-200, CO-250, CO-Series Exit Trim,
Handheld Device (HHD), and Schlage Utility Software (SUS)
• Installation Manuals
• Organized by Cylindrical, Mortise, and Exit Trim
• Application Notes/Technical Bulletins
• Firmware & Software
• CO-Series Firmware Package
• Schlage SUS Software
• Note: Check for updates on a regular basis
• Also found in Technical Library
• Brochures/Sales Materials
• Data Sheets
• How To Videos (Coming Soon)
• And More
Distributor & Channel Partner Tools
CLICK HERE
Location:
PartnerLink
CLICK HERE
• Registered Users:
http://partnerlink-admin.ingersollrand.com/ProductInformation/AccessControl/ElectronicLockingPortfolio/CO-Series/Pages/CO-Series.aspx
• New Users: Go to http://partnerlink.ingersollrand.com and click on the new user link
• CO-Series can be found at: PartnerLink > Product Info > Access Control & Video > Electronic Locking Portfolio > CO-Series
• Tools not available on schlage.com:
• PowerPoint Presentations
• Image Library
• Marketing Documents
• Technical Bulletins
• PartnerLink Connection
Newsletter
• And More
Additional Resources
Location:
www.schlage.com
CLICK HERE
• “How To” App for CO-Series
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
• Security Technologies Page:
http://w3.securitytechnologies.com/
irst/Pages/default.aspx
• EAC Catalog
http://epub.securitytechnologies.com
Electronic Access Control Catalog
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
004084
06/12
Credential Resources
CLICK HERE
Credentials Knowledge Guide
Smart Credentials
Overview
Schage Contactless Smart Credentials put you in control
by delivering smarter solutions. These credentials protect
your most sensitive data by utilizing extra layers of security
protection, and can be used for many other applications
including transit, cashless vending, and cafeteria point of sale.
You can’t make a decision
about anything until you
have a clear
everything
understanding of
Features & Benefits
• Open architecture design is built on ISO 14443A
standards, providing for a faster data transfer speed
• Offered in clamshell, ISO style cards, key fobs, and
adhesive patches
• Utilizes MIFARE or MIFARE DESFire EV1 technology
cards
cards
The contactless smart credential by Schlage operates on a
13.56 MHz frequency, and utilizes high security encrypted data,
which is mutually authenticated in communication between the
card and reader, providing optimum security. Schlage offers the
choice of 2.5k, 8k, 16k, 32k, and 64k bits of storage, which will
meet the most demanding storage requirements.
Credentials
Knowledge
Guide
Smart Credentials
Smart Cards Data Sheet
codes
codes
Credentials Knowledge Guide
Readers and Credentials Brochure
Data Sheets
• Flexible Options Smarter Choices Chart
• Smart Card Credentials (004992)
• Multi-Technology Credentials (004994)
• Proximity Credentials (004996)
• Proximity & Smart Keyfobs with iButton Option
• Wiegand Cards (SWIEG)
www.schlage.com
Keys
Keys
•
•
•
Location:
Credentials
Literature
biometrics
biometrics
multi
multi
004992_Smart_Credentials_Rev1_082511.indd 1
Articles & White Papers
8/25/11 4:40 PM
Location:
www.schlage.com
• Articles
– Why Smart Cards and Multi-Technology Readers are a Smart Choice
– Why Smart Cards and Multi-Technology Readers are a Smart Choice for Integrators
• White Papers
– Basic Overview of Smart Card Technology
– Harnessing the Power of Multi-Technology Readers
– Key Management Systems: A Vital Element
– Proximity Technology Provides Limited Security
– Sorting Through Credential Technology Choices
Training
Location:
CLICK HERE
IRU
• Credentials e-Learning Courses on IRU
• How Smart is Your Card?
• Credential Choices
CLICK HERE
http://mylearning.ingersollrand.com/lmt/xlr8login.login?site=st-dist
For guest access enter your username and password.
First time users click on “Don’t have a login?” for registration.
Web & Interactive Tools
• Service and Support
• Technical Library
– Brochures
– Data Sheets
Location:
www.schlage.com
CLICK HERE
Credential Resources
Distributor & Channel Partner Tools
•
•
•
Location:
PartnerLink
CLICK HERE
Registered Users:
http://partnerlink-admin.ingersollrand.com/ProductInformation/ReadersandCredentials/Credentials/Pages/Credentials.aspx
New Users: Go to http://partnerlink.ingersollrand.com and click on the new user link
• Credentials can be found at: PartnerLink > Product Info > Readers & Credentials > Credentials
Tools not available on the public web:
• Sales PowerPoints
• Webinar PowerPoints
• Cross-Reference Charts
• Technology Charts
• Catalogs & Pricebooks
• And more!
A & E Specifications
Location:
www.schlage.com
CLICK HERE
• aptiQ™ Smart Cards Using MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
– SXF8420 16k bit aptiQ™ Smart Clamshell Card
– SXF8440 32k bit aptiQ™ Smart Clamshell Card
– SXF8480 64k bit aptiQ™ Smart Clamshell Card
– SXF8520 16k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card
– SXF8520M1 16k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
– SXF8540 32k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card
– SXF8540M1 32k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
– SXF8580 64k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card
– SXF8580M1 64k bit ISO aptiQ™ Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
– SXF8720 16k bit aptiQ™ PVC Patch
– SXF8740 32k bit aptiQ™ PVC Patch
– SXF8780 64k bit aptiQ™ PVC Patch
• MIFARE® Smart Cards
– SXF9420 2.5k bit Clamshell MIFARE® Smart Card
– SXF9520 2.5k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card
– SXF9520MS 2.5k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
Additional Resources
– SXF9551 8k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card
– SXF9551MS 8k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
– SXF9558 32k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card
– SXF9558MS 32k bit ISO MIFARE® Smart Card with
Magnetic Stripe
– SXF9651 8k bit MIFARE® Smart Keyfob
– SXF9751 8k bit MIFARE® PVC Patch
– SXF9758 32k bit MIFARE® PVC Patch
• Proximity Cards
– SXF7410 Clamshell Proximity Card
– SXF7510 ISO Proximity Card
– SXF7510MS ISO Proximity Card with Magnetic Stripe
– SXF7610 Proximity Keyfob
– SXF7710 Proximity PVC Patch
• Dual-Technology Keyfobs
– IBF-110 Combo Keyfob, 125 kHz Proximity and iButton
– IBF-151 8k bit MIFARE® Combo Keyfob with iButton
– IBWB-110 Combo Keyfob, 125 kHz Proximity
without iButton
– IBWB-151 8k bit MIFARE® Combo Keyfob without iButton
Location:
www.schlage.com
CLICK HERE
• Security Technologies Page: http://w3.securitytechnologies.com/Products/credentials/Pages/default.aspx
877-671-7011 • schlage.com
©2011 Ingersoll Rand
ES-6047
07/11
Biometric HandKey Resources
Literature
Location:
• Utilize “search” on HandKey page to locate each piece using
the description in parentheses
• Biometrics Brochure (ES-5524)
• Antimicrobial brochure (IR-GN-1562)
• Quick Reference Sheet (ES-5367)
• HandKeyII (104535)
• HandKey ID3D-R (IR AC-1487)
• HandReader Accessories (ES-5370)
• Enclosure Options (ES-5278)
• HandNet for Windows (104933)
securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
CLICK HERE
Real Security Sets You Free.™
Providing Added
Biometrics
Protection
Antimicrobial
Protection
for the HandReader
Schlage HandReader platens now come with the power of
silver!
Silver is a natural, yet powerful antimicrobial that has been
used for many centuries. The agent will not change the
look or feel of the platen, nor does it require special
cleaning; instead it protects surfaces 24 hours a day
against bacteria, mold and fungi.
This antimicrobial technology will neither wear out nor rub
off of the HandReader, making it effective for the lifetime of
the product.
To get the best results the antimicrobial agent should be
Ingersoll Rand’s Security Technologies Sector is a leading global
provider of products and services that make environments safe,
secure and productive. The sector’s market-leading products
include electronic and biometric access-control systems, time
and attendance and personnel scheduling systems, mechanical
locks, portable security, door closers, exit devices, architectural
hardware, steel doors and frames, and other technologies and
services for global security markets.
www.biometrics.schlage.com
408-341-4100
used in conjunction with good hygiene practices.
schlage-final-br.indd 1
11/23/09 4:42:49 PM
©2009 Ingersoll-Rand Company IR-GN-1562 rev 0409
Web & Interactive Tools
Location:
• Service and Support: includes Contact Us page and Technical
Library
• Case Studies: Learn about applications using HandReaders
Training
Location:
• Training Services and Available Course Information
• HandKey Hardware Course
• HandNet for Windows Software Course
• Schlage Biometrics videos are now available to view on the
Biometrics Playlist on SchlageSecurity’s You Tube Channel
securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
CLICK HERE
YouTube and securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
CLICK HERE
Biometric HandKey Resources
Technical Documents
Location:
www.schlage.com/support
• The Technical Library contains:
• Installation Manuals
• Organized by reader series type
• Application Notes/Technical Bulletins
• For our most common requests
• Training information
• Brochures and Sales Materials
• Datasheets
Distributor & Channel Partner Tools
CLICK HERE
Location:
PartnerLink
• Registered Users: Biometrics information can be found at: PartnerLink > Product Info > Biometrics > Access Control
• New Users (PartnerLink is only accessible by registered distributor-partners): Go to http://partnerlink.ingersollrand.com
and click on the new user link
• Tools not available on the public web:
• Sales PowerPoints
• Webinar PowerPoints
• Pricebooks
• Whitepapers
• And more!
CLICK HERE
Additional Resources
• “How To” App for Schlage Electronic Security - includes Biometrics,
AD-Series and CO-Series Products. Features include:
• How-To Videos
• User Guides
• Installation Guides
• Datasheets
• Tech Notes
• Security Technologies Page:
http://w3.securitytechnologies.com/irst/Pages/default.aspx
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
FREE DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand Company
005223
07/12
Networked Access
Control Solution
bright blue® and
AD-Series Electronic Locks
Looking for a security solution that is affordable, flexible and
easy to install and manage? Schlage has combined intelligent
web-based access management with integrated electronic locks
to deliver a cost-effective solution ideal for small to medium
sized facilities.
With the bright blue® access control system from Schlage,
changes such as adding or deleting users can be made from
virtually any laptop or desktop computer. The bright blue®
system features a user friendly interface, standardized reports
and video integration; your system can be up and running in
no time at all.
Installation of the hardware is simplified since Schlage AD-Series
integrated locks combine all of the components typically found
around the door, such as the credential reader door position
switch and the request-to-exit switch. Designed to be modular,
Schlage AD-Series locks can easily be upgraded in the future to
meet your changing security and technology requirements.
By electronically scheduling lock and unlock times you will
improve security and productivity. By issuing electronic
credentials, like aptiQ™ smart cards from Schlage, you not only
know who gained access where and when but you reduce the
costs associated with re-keying. When you invest in electronic
access control within your facility you increase security, add
convenience and save money over time.
System Overview
• bright blue® supports up to 32 doors and up to 5,000
users
-- Convenient web-based application
-- Remote access and administration
-- No software to install and no dedicated PC required
-- Holiday and event scheduling
-- Video management options
• For AD-400 Wireless applications:
-- Communicates to the bright blue® controller via
PIM400-485-SBB (RS485); each supports up to 16
devices
-- 900 MHz communication between AD-400 and
PIM400 for secure, encrypted transmission
-- Patent-Pending Wireless Lockdown feature
(10 seconds or less) preserves 2 year battery life
• For AD-300 Hardwired applications:
-- Directly communicates via RS485 connection
to the bright blue® panel
• AD-Series available with seven reader options
-- All card readers available + PIN (4-digit)
• Supports Classroom/Storeroom function
-- Office function supported with RS485
connection only
• Available chassis options: Cylindrical, Mortise, and
Exit Trim
• AD-Series: ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA
Grade 1, UL 294, UL 10C
bright blue® access control system by Schlage supports up to 32 online devices including Schlage’s
AD-Series hardwired and wireless electronic locks as well as standard readers and video management.
SYSTEM LAYOUT
SBB - Schlage
bright blue® controller
Web Browser/Video Client
L AN
ANY COMBINATION OF UP TO 32 DEVICES
RS485
RS485
SEVMS-SBB
Network Video Recorder
DIRECT VIA
RS485
PIM400-485-SBB
SBB-RI
WIEGAND
Schlage AD-300
Hardwired Lock
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16 Devices per
PIM400-485-SBB)
Schlage Reader
SIPCAM-100
IP Mini Dome Camera
NOTE: Complete specifications and certifications are detailed on individual data sheets which can be found on www.schlage.com/support
 Connect multiple facilities that
 Keep an eye on your facility with integrated
reside on the same LAN :
Extend the reach of your
system with the bright
blue Network Reader
Interface (SBB-NRI). The
SBB-NRI is IP-based and
connects directly to your
network so it can be
located at any remote
opening or facility that is
on the same network as
your bright blue®
controller.
video management.
L AN
Video security is a powerful crime and theft deterrent, and gives you
a visual record of every person who comes in and out of your facility.
Our video options can be easily integrated in your bright
blue system, giving you the utmost in safety and security.
ETHERNET
SBB-NRI
WIEGAND
Schlage Reader
Video Management System Features:
• Supports up to 8 cameras
• Remote multi-user video management software included
• View video of card transactions at any door
• Quickly search for video by cardholder name,
credential ID, or transaction type
• User friendly; allows for advanced search, playback
and save capabilities, video motion detection by
camera and more
SIPCAM-100
IP Mini Dome Camera
SEVMS-SBB
Network Video
Recorder
Schlage bright blue® and AD-Series System Capabilities:
Schlage bright blue® and AD-Series System
Connection to bright blue® system
AD-400
AD-300
PIM400-485-SBB
Direct RS485
32
32
System Capacity At The Controller
Number of Doors
System Capacity at the Lock
Number of Users
5,000
5,000
Holidays
100
100
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
Time Zones
Degraded Cache Mode in Lock**
100
100
Yes**
Yes**
Yes
Yes

Readers (see supported card formats to the right)
Keypad Only
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Yes
Yes (Smart Card
up to 32 bit)
Yes (Smart Card
up to 32 bit)
No
No
Up to 4 digit
PIN*
Up to 4 digit
PIN*
Request to Exit
Yes
Yes
Door Position Switch
Yes
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Yes
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position*
Yes*
Yes*
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)*
Yes*
Yes*
Request to Enter
Yes
No
Multi-Technology 125 kHz Proximity & 13.56 MHz Smart Card
PIV & PIV-I Card Compatible
Card + PIN Code *
Status Monitors
Deadbolt Position
No
No
Low Battery Status
Yes*
N/A
Battery Voltage Level*
Yes*
N/A
Communication Status
Yes
Yes
Yes (<10 secs)*
Yes
No
Yes
Yes*°
Yes*°
Yes
Yes
Remote Lockdown (from host)*
Remote Unlock (from host)
Interior Push Button* °
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Office/Toggle*°
Yes*°
Yes*°
Privacy
No
No
Apartment
No
No
Credential Attributes
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Yes
Pass Through Credential
Yes
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
No
No
Freeze Credential
No
No
Lock Down Credential
Yes
Yes
Supported Proximity Card Formats
in bright blue® access control system:
· 26-bit standard format
· 34-bit Geoffrey/ Schlage
· 35-bit XceedID® Proximity (site code
and Badge ID compatible with C-1000,
parity calculated differently)
· 35C - 35-bit XceedID® Proximity format
compatible with corporate 1000
· 37-bit XceedID® Proximity
· HID® 35-bit (Corporate 1000)
· MIFARE® 32-bit serial number without
parity bits
Supported Smart Card Formats
in bright blue® access control system:
· 26-bit standard format
· 34-bit Geoffrey/ Schlage smart cards
· 35-bit XceedID® smart cards (site code
and Badge ID compatible with C-1000,
parity calculated differently)
· 35C - 35-bit XceedID® smart cards
compatible with corporate 1000
· 37-bit XceedID® smart cards
· 40-bit XceedID® smart cards
· HID® 35-bit (Corporate 1000)
· MIFARE® 32-bit serial number without
parity bits
· HID iCLASS® 40-bit (CSN Only, 32-bits
only, no site code)
* Enhanced features that are only available in the
upgraded versions of bright blue® v2.1 or higher
** If enabled, grants access to last 113 unique user
IDs, option to expand to 1,000. Or, use facility/
site codes instead of user IDs. No events are
captured in audit trail when operating in cache
mode.
° Requires RS485 Connection to bright blue®
controller
Customize Your AD-Series
AD-Series Electronic Locks from Schlage are built from the ground up to provide more options, more functionality and more compatibility
than any other solution on the market today. Designed to suite with the most popular lever styles and finishes, Schlage AD-Series can be
configured to accept most major key systems.
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
(key-in-lever 6 pin)
Full Size
(key-in-lever7 pin)
FSIC
(6 & 7 pin)
SFIC
(6 & 7 Pin)
Schlage
l
l
Falcon®
s

Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
s
s
Corbin Russwin®
s
Yale® (also includes
s
Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)
Best®
l = with cylinder or less cylinder options
 = less cylinder only, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
l
s
s
s
Exit Device Trim (AD-300/400-993):
The AD-300 and AD-400 exit trims are
exclusively compatible with exit devices made
by Ingersoll Rand when using the low current
request to exit switch (RX-LC part # 050281
for98/99 & Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR
devices & part # 650359 for Falcon 25 Rim
devices)
s
s
s = less cylinder only
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Configure Your Lock:
AD-Series Chassis and Functions
Classroom/
with bright blue® access control system Storeroom
Office
Privacy
Apartment
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim
Yes*
Yes*
N/A
No
No
No
N/A
No
No
No
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
We have created a web-based product selector
tool that can help you configure your AD-Series
lock to meet your needs. To check out the tool,
please visit www.schlage.com
* Requires RS485 connection Note: See pricebook for function descriptions
AD-Series Credential Reader Compatibility:
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Proximity
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
• Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe • Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
Networked Solutions
Complete Your System
At Schlage, we understand that each facility has
unique security requirements. Our extensive line
of products, flexible options and ability to adapt
to your existing environment make it easy to find
a solution that will fit your security needs.
HHD
Complete your access control system with readers and
credentials, biometric hand geometry readers, system
components, HHD programming device and other wireless
accessories including the TK400 Wireless Portable Signal Test Kit.
Readers and Credentials
TK400
HandKey II
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon, bright blue,
and aptiQ are trademarks of Ingersoll Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries.
GE, CASI and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks
of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. AWID is a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications
Group. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin, Inc. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company.
Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best is a trademark of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA
Door Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005082 03/12
Enterprise
Security Solution
Security Management System (SMS)
with AD-Series Electronic Locks
Are you looking for a high security access control solution that
is both flexible and scalable? Schlage’s SMS Enterprise system
paired with Schlage’s AD-Series electronic locks is the right
solution for you.
Schlage SMS delivers a fully integrated access control
solution including alarm monitoring, photo ID badging and
video surveillance. It’s perfect for large, multi-site or global
organizations and provides you with an unparalleled level of
flexibility by supporting an unlimited number of users, readers,
credentials and other devices. We make it affordable by
including multiple modules such as badging, visitor management
and reporting in a single software package. In addition, there
are no annual licensing fees and no software fees when you add
more doors or users to your system. Further accelerate your ROI
by combining SMS with Schlage’s AD-Series electronic locks.
Schlage AD-Series integrated locks combine all of the
components typically found around the door, such as the
reader, door position switch and the request to exit switch
into one device which simplifies installation and saves money.
Schlage AD-Series integrated locks are available in hardwired
and wireless configurations which can be outfitted with seven
(7) credential reader options. Designed to be modular, Schlage
AD-Series locks can easily be upgraded in the future to meet
your changing security and technology requirements.
System Capabilities – Summary
• Security Management System
-- Fully integrated access control, video surveillance,
alarm monitoring, visitor management and photo ID
badging
-- Supports offline and online devices within the same
environment
-- Manage multi-site facilities either centrally or individually
-- One, Five, Ten or Twenty-Five client packages
• For AD-400 Wireless applications:
-- Communicates to the controller (SSRC or SRCNX-R)
via PIM400-485-SMS (RS485); supports up to 16
devices per PIM400
-- 900 MHz communication between AD-400 and
PIM400 for secure, encrypted transmission
-- Patent-Pending Wireless Lockdown/Unlock feature
(10 seconds or less) preserves 2 year battery life
• For AD-300 Hardwired applications:
-- Communicates to the controller (SSRC or SRCNX-R)
via direct RS485 connection; SSRC supports up to
8 AD-300 devices while SRCNX-R can support any
combination of up to 16 devices
• AD-Series available with seven reader options; all card
readers available + PIN (4-digit).
• Supports Classroom/Storeroom function
• Available chassis options: Cylindrical, Mortise, Mortise
Deadbolt, and Exit Trim
• AD-Series: ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA
Grade 1, UL 294, UL 10C
Schlage Enterprise Solutions
Schlage delivers a powerful, client-server based solution that meets the security needs and budget of any facility.
• Manage online and offline solutions in the same system including CO-200 and AD-200
• Integrated access control, alarm monitoring, digital video, photo ID badging, visitor management and more
• Multiple hardware options for a solution that is flexible, scalable and affordable
• Supports an unlimited number of cardholders, devices and video recorders
• Customizable reports provide you with comprehensive information about your users, doors and system
• Card transactions can be associated with video clips and badging photos for fast incident recognition and/or resolution
SYSTEM LAYOUT
Client Workstation: System available with 1, 5, 10, and 25 client licenses.
Each client license enables 1 concurrent user.
Client software must be installed on workstation
File Server: Houses SMS server
software and all system processes
L AN / W A N
Enterprise Video
Management System
(SEVMS)
Smart Reader Controller
(SSRC)
New Reader Controller
(SRCNX-R)
UP TO 1 READER OR 8 AD-300's OR 16 AD-400's
RS485
ANY COMBINATION OF UP TO 16 DEVICES
RS485
DIRECT VIA
RS485
RS485
DIRECT VIA
RS485
PIM400-485-SMS
SRINX
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16 Devices per
PIM400-485-SMS)
Schlage
Reader
WIEGAND
PIM400-485-SMS
Up to 32 analog or
IP cameras per DVR/NVR
Schlage
Reader
Schlage AD-300
Hardwired Lock
AD-200 Standalone Locks
• Manage access rights, time zones and holidays
with SMS Enterprise Software
• Utilize HHD Handheld Device to configure locks and
transfer updates & audits between software and locks
Schlage AD-300
Hardwired Lock
Schlage AD-400
Wireless Lock
(Up to 16 Devices per
PIM400-485-SMS)
Schlage Enterprise Video Solutions:
• Multiple hardware and storage configurations
• SMS supports an unlimited number of NVR/DVRs
• Automatically associate digital video to access transactions
• Optional encoder converts analog cameras to streaming
digital video
NOTE: Complete specifications and certifications are detailed on individual data sheets which can be found on www.schlage.com/support
Schlage Enterprise Solutions System Capabilities:
AD-200
(Standalone)
Number of Doors
AD-300
AD-400
Unlimited
Unlimited
System Capacity At The Controller
Number of Devices per SSRC
N/A
8 (Direct via RS485)
16 (via PIM400-485-SMS)
Number of Devices per SRCNX-R
N/A
Any Combination of up to 16 devices
5000
Unlimited
Holidays
32
Unlimited
1st Person In
Yes
Yes
8
Unlimited
N/A
Yes*
System Capacity At The Lock
Number of Users
Time Zones
Degraded Cache Mode in Lock*
 Supported Proximity Card
Readers (see supported card formats to the right)
Keypad Only
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
Multi-Technology - 125 kHz Proximity
& 13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes (Smart Card up to 32 bits)
PIV & PIV-I Card Compatible
Card + PIN
Formats in SMS Enterprise:
· 26-bit standard format
· 34-bit Geoffrey/ Schlage
· 35-bit XceedID® Proximity
(site code and Badge ID
compatible with C-1000,
parity calculated differently)
· 35C - 35-bit XceedID®
Proximity format compatible
with corporate 1000
· 37-bit XceedID® Proximity
· HID® 35-bit (Corporate 1000)
· MIFARE® 32-bit serial number
without parity bits
No
3 to 6 Digit PIN
Up to 4 digit PIN
Request to Exit
N/A
Yes
Door Position Switch
N/A
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
N/A
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
N/A
Yes
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
Yes
Yes
Request to Enter
N/A
Yes
No
Low Battery Status
Yes
N/A
Yes
Battery Voltage Level
N/A
N/A
Yes
Communication Status
N/A
Yes
Yes
Remote Lockdown (from host)
N/A
Yes
Yes (<10 secs)**
Remote Unlock (from host)
N/A
Yes
Yes (<10 secs)**
Status Monitors
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
Yes
Supported Smart Card
Formats in SMS Enterprise:
· 26-bit standard format
· 34-bit Geoffrey/ Schlage
smart cards
· 35-bit XceedID® smart cards
(site code and Badge ID
compatible with C-1000,
parity calculated differently)
· 35C - 35-bit XceedID® smart
card compatible with corporate
1000
· 37-bit XceedID® smart cards
· 40-bit XceedID® smart cards
· HID® 35-bit (Corporate 1000)
· MIFARE® 32-bit serial number
without parity bits
· HID iCLASS® 40-bit (CSN Only,
32-bits only, no site code)
Office/Toggle
Yes
No
Privacy
Yes
No
Apartment
Yes
No
Normal Credential
Yes
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
No
Pass Through Credential
Yes
No
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
No
Notes:
Freeze Credential
Yes
No
Lockdown Credential
No
No
*If enabled, grants access to last
113 unique user IDs, option to
expand to 1,000. Or, use facility/
site codes instead of user IDs. No
events are captured in audit trail
when operating in cache mode.
Credential Attributes
Note: Shaded boxes indicate enhanced features that are only available in SMS v5.3.5 or higher
**Wake-up Radio over PIM400485 on up to 16 doors requires
implementation of specific RSI
commands. Also available on
PIM400-TD2.
Customize Your AD-Series
AD-Series Electronic Locks from Schlage are built from the ground up to provide more options, more functionality and more compatibility
than any other solution on the market today. Designed to suite with the most popular lever styles and finishes, Schlage AD-Series can be
configured to accept most major key systems.
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
(key-in-lever 6 pin)
Full Size
(key-in-lever7 pin)
FSIC
(6 & 7 pin)
SFIC
(6 & 7 pin)
Schlage
l
l
Falcon®
s

Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
s
s
Corbin Russwin®
s
Yale® (also includes
s
Medeco 31*0100 FSIC)
Best®
l = with cylinder or less cylinder options
 = less cylinder only, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers
AD-Series Chassis
and Functions
Cylindrical
Mortise
Mortise Deadbolt
Exit Trim
l
s
s
s
Office
Privacy
The AD-300 and AD-400 exit trims are
exclusively compatible with exit devices made
by Ingersoll Rand when using the low current
request to exit switch (RX-LC part # 050281 for
98/99 & Von Duprin 22/22F Rim/SVR devices &
part # 650359 for Falcon 25 Rim devices)
s
s
s = less cylinder only
Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Classroom/
Storeroom
Exit Device Trim (AD-300/400-993):
Configure Your Lock:
We have created a web-based product selector
tool that can help you configure your AD-Series
lock to meet your needs. To check out the tool,
please visit www.schlage.com
Apartment
Yes Yes* (AD-200 Only)
Yes Yes* (AD-200 Only)
N/A Yes* (AD-200 Only)
Yes
No
No
No
* Requires RS485 connection. Note: See pricebook for function descriptions.
AD-Series Credential Reader Compatibility:
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Proximity
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
• Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe • Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
Networked Solutions
Complete Your System
At Schlage, we understand that each facility has
unique security requirements. Our extensive line
of products, flexible options and ability to adapt
to your existing environment make it easy to find
a solution that will fit your security needs.
HHD
Complete your access control system with readers and
credentials, biometric hand geometry readers, system
components, HHD programming device and other wireless
accessories including the TK400 Wireless Portable Signal Test Kit.
Readers and Credentials
TK400
HandKey II
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are
trademarks of Ingersoll Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. MIFARE is
a trademark of NXP B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin
Russwin, Inc. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best is
a trademark of Stanley Black & Decker. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
005104
03/12
Standalone Access
Control Solution
SMS Express and AD-200,
CO-200 or CT5000
Schlage’s standalone access control solutions deliver the
convenience and efficiency you desire at a fraction of the
cost of a networked system. With the Schlage SMS Express
solution, system installation, set-up and management are a
breeze. And, if you decide in the future that you need real
time access control, alarm monitoring, visitor management or
video recording – Schlage offers a selection of powerful online
integrated solutions to fit your budget.
Save even more time and money on installation with AD-Series
and CO-Series electronic locks. Their innovative integrated
design combines components typically found around the door,
such as the credential reader, request-to-exit switch and door
position switch. Therefore there are no wires to run and labor
is greatly reduced. An easy-to-use handheld device transfers
information from the system to the lock. The handheld device
can also be used to retrieve audits from devices.
SMS Express
• S upports up to 2000 Users/Audits with 50 Locks or 1000
Users/Audits with 100 Locks
• Supports up to 8 times zone and up to 16 holidays
• Set up to 16 auto unlock schedules per system (up to 8 per
lock)
AD-200
• Upgradable
credential and communication modules
• Available with choice of keypad, magnetic stripe and
multi-technology readers (reads both 125 kHz proximity
and 13.56 MHz smart)
• All card readers available with keypad for dual authentication
(card + PIN)
• Classroom/Storeroom, Office, Apartment and Privacy functions
• UL 294 listed, ANSI/BHMA A156.25 and ANSI/BHMA Grade
1 certified
CO-200
Need help deciding between the AD-Series and CO-Series?
The AD-Series is the ideal solution if you want flexibility. The
modular design of the AD-Series allows you to upgrade from
standalone to networked if your needs change in the future.
The AD-Series also allows you to upgrade credential readers.
The CO-Series is preferable if you do not expect your needs to
change. CO-Series options are factory orderable rather than
upgradable like the AD-Series.
For applications that require an around-the-door solution,
the CT5000 offline single opening controller is available. It is an
ideal solution for narrow stile applications because it can support
up to two separate Wiegand readers as well as interface with
peripheral devices such as automatic operators, electric strikes,
and electromagnetic locks. If networked functionality is required
in the future, the CT5000 can be upgraded to a WRI400.
• Available
with choice of keypad, magnetic stripe and
proximity readers (125 kHz)
• All card readers available with keypad for dual authentication
(card + PIN)
• Classroom/Storeroom, Office and Privacy functions
• UL 294 listed, ANSI/BHMA A156.25 and
ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified
CT5000
• S upports up to two Wiegand reader inputs
• Has three form C relay outputs for strike,
auxiliary and alarm
• Can be upgraded to WRI400 if networked
capability is required in the future
• UL 294 listed
SYSTEM LAYOUT
System Diagram
Handheld Programming Device
Used to configure locks and
transfer audits from locks to
the software.
PS902
Power Supply
Interior Facility Doors
AD-200, CO-200: Integrated offline locks
store time zones access rights and audits.
CT5000 Offline
Controller
Automatic Operator
SXF1550
Proximity Reader
LCN
856 Push Button
Credentials
SMS Express 4.0 or higher
Software running on computer.
Perimeter Facility Door
* Example shown is a typical
standalone access control opening
with an automatic operator.
Benefits
• Cost-effective, simple means of controlling access within your facility.
• Online solutions available if your needs should change.
• New users or access points can be entered into the system in seconds.
• Comprehensive reporting on audit trails retrieved, access attempts, etc.
Complete Your System
• The Schlage Utility Software (SUS) on the Handheld Programming Device (HHD)
provides an easy way to retrieve audits and transfer information between your access
control software and electronic locks.
• The combo proximity keyfobs with iButton® option is available which allows you to
manage proximity and iButton® technologies in the same facility.
• Schlage offers many contactless, keypad and magnetic stripe readers that
are compatible with the CT5000.
• We offer a complete portfolio of credentials including smart, proximity and
magnetic stripe. Multi-technology credentials are also available.
Readers and Credentials
Combo iButton® & Proximity Keyfob
NOTE: Complete specifications are detailed on individual data sheets which can be found on www.schlage.com/support
System Capabilities:
SMS Express**
Standalone/Offline Solutions
Offline Controller
CT5000*
Integrated Standalone Electronic Locks
CO-200
AD-200
System Capacity
Number of Doors
Number of Users/Audits
50
100
50
100
50
100
2000
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
Holidays
16
1st Person In
Yes
Time Zones
8

Readers
Keypad Only
Yes
Magnetic Stripe Card
Yes
125 kHz Prox Card
Yes
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes†
No
Yes†
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
Yes†
No
Yes†
PIV II (FIPS 201) Card
No
Card + PIN
Yes (3-6 digit PIN)
Status Monitors
Request to Exit
Yes - Locally
No
Door Position Switch
Yes - Locally
No
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
No
Yes - Software
Battery Status (Normal, Low, Critical)
N/A
Yes - SUS
Battery Voltage Level
N/A
Yes - SUS
Yes - Locally
No
Classroom/Storeroom
N/A
Yes
Office/Toggle
N/A
Yes
Privacy
N/A
Yes
Apartment
N/A
Remote Release
The following readers are
UL 294 list for use with
CT5000:
· Essex Electronics model
KTP-162
· Mercury Security models
MR-5 and MR-20
· XceedID models XF-1050,
XF-1100, XF-1500, XF-1550
and XF-2100
Lock Functions
No
SMS Express Supported
Card Formats
· 26 Bit
· 34 Bit
· 35 Bit
· 35 Bit XceedID®
· 36 Bit XceedID®
· 37 Bit XceedID®
· 37 Bit
· 37 Bit No FC
· 40 Bit XceedID® (EV1)
Yes
Credential Attributes
Normal Credential
Yes
Toggle Credential
Yes
Pass Through Credential
Yes
Visitor/One Time Use Credential
Yes
Freeze Credential
Yes
Legend
Yes-Locally: This capability is available locally at the controller
Yes-Software: This capability is monitored and reported in the SMS Software audit
Yes-SUS: This capability is monitored by the SUS
† Additional card formats may be supported. Verify compatibility by using the CRP-2 enrollment reader or by calling technical
support for verification
*CT5000 is an offline single opening controller that can support up to two seperate Wiegand reader inputs; grid references system
capacity of access control software-- this may be limited by choice of reader.
** Features such as the expanded number of users and audits are only available in the updated SMS Express v4.0. Previous versions
did not include AD-Series and CO-Series lock type labels.
AD-Series & CO-Series Compatibility
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Sparta Rhodes
Athens
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
Tubular
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
Cylinder Compatibility
Exit Device Compatibility
Key-in lever design accepts many popular models of standard,
SFIC and FSIC cylinders.
Exit trim utilizes universal hardware to simplify installation of offline
trim to a variety of exit devices
Cylinder Compatibility
Full Size
(key-in-lever
6 pin)
Schlage
Falcon®
Sargent® (10L + 11L
Full Size)
Corbin Russwin®
Yale® (includes Medeco
31*0100 FSIC)
Best®


Full Size
(key-in-lever
7 pin)
FSIC
(6 & 7 pin)
Rim
SVR
CVR
Mortise
3
3
Von Duprin® 98/99 and 98/99XP
3
3


Von Duprin® 22/22F
3
3
25
3

Corbin Russwin® 5000
3


Precision™ 21 (2100 converts to 21
with Precision's BP21 kit)
3


Yale® 7000
3

Dorma® 9300
3
80
3



Cylinder Compatibility
SFIC
(6 & 7 Pin)

Falcon® 
= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder only

= less cylinder, only with Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Sargent® Sparta and Rhodes levers
Available
AD-200
Readers
• Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Smart Card
• Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Smart Card
• Magnetic Stripe
• Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
+ KEYPAD
+ KEYPAD
Available
CO-200
Readers
• Keypad
• Proximity
• Proximity
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic
Stripe
(Swipe)
• Magnetic
Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and bright blue, are
trademarks of Ingersoll Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. HID and iCLASS are
trademarks of HID Corporation. Von Duprin, Falcon, IR, the IR logo and Ingersoll Rand are trademarks of Ingersoll Rand plc, its
subsidiaries or affiliates. Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin, Inc. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing
Company. Yale is a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best and Precision are trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma is a
trademark of DORMA Door Controls, Inc. Essex Electronics is a registered trademark of Essex Electronics, Inc. Mercury Security is
a registered trademark of Mercury Security Corp. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 005105 03/12
Open Architecture
Solution
OEM Software with AD-Series
Wireless and Hardwired Locks
The AD-Series Electronic Locking platform is designed to be
open and flexible. With its open architecture, the AD-Series
can be seamlessly integrated into most access control systems.
Schlage AD-Series electronic locks combine all of the
components typically found around the door; such as the
reader, door position switch and the request-to-exit switch
into one device; which simplifies installation and saves money.
Schlage AD-Series electronic locks are available in hardwired
and wireless configurations. The AD-300 locks are hardwired
and provide the benefits of a traditional access control solution.
The AD-400 locks are wireless and provide many of the key
benefits without having to run wires directly to each opening.
The AD-Series can be customized with seven (7) different
credential reader options including keypad, magnetic stripe,
and multi-technology which reads both proximity and smart
cards. All card readers are available with keypad for multi-factor
authentication, support is dependent on a ccess control software.
Designed to be modular, readers can easily be upgraded in the
future to meet your changing credential needs.
System Capabilities – Summary
• System Capabilities:
-- As determined by OEM software provider
• AD-400 Wireless Applications:
-- Communicates to the controller via PIM400-TD2
(Wiegand or Clock & Data); each supports up to 2
devices
-- 900 MHz communication between AD-400
and PIM400 for secure, AES-128 bit encrypted
transmission
-- Patent-pending Wireless lockdown feature (10
seconds or less) preserves up to 2 year battery life
• AD-300 Hardwired Applications:
-- Communicates to the controller via PIB300-2D
(Wiegand or Clock & Data); each supports up to
2 devices
• AD-Series available with seven reader options including
-- Keypad
-- Magnetic Stripe
-- Multi-Technology (reads both 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz)
-- All card readers available + PIN (if supported by
access control software)
• AD-Series chassis options: Cylindrical, Mortise, Exit Trim
• ANSI/BHMA A156.25, ANSI/BHMA Grade 1,
UL 294, UL 10C
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
AD-300 Hardwired System utilizing Wiegand Protocol Port or RS485 Port
WIEGAND OR
CLOCK & DATA
PROTOCOL
READER DATA
REQUEST TO EXIT
DOOR POSITION
L AN
RSI
PROTOCOL
TROUBLE
LOCK RELAY
PIB300-2D
(Panel Interface Module)
OEM Controller
with Wiegand
Protocol Port
OEM System
AD-300 Hardwired Devices
(up to 2 Devices)
WIEGAND OR
CLOCK & DATA
PROTOCOL
READER DATA
REQUEST TO EXIT
DOOR POSITION
OEM
PROTOCOL
PORT
L AN
TROUBLE
RSI
PROTOCOL
LOCK RELAY
RS485
OEM READER
INTERFACE
OEM Controller
OEM System
PIB300-2D
(Panel Interface Module)
AD-300 Hardwired Devices
(up to 2 Devices)
AD-400 Wireless System utilizing Wiegand Protocol Port or RS485 Port
WIEGAND OR
CLOCK & DATA
PROTOCOL
READER DATA
REQUEST TO EXIT
DOOR POSITION
L AN
900 MHz
TROUBLE
LOCK RELAY
PIM400-TD2
(Panel Interface Module)
OEM Controller
with Wiegand
Protocol Port
OEM System
AD-400 Wireless Devices
(up to 2 Devices)
Wireless range up to 200' in building
construction, up to 1000' line of sight.
WIEGAND OR
CLOCK & DATA
PROTOCOL
L AN
READER DATA
REQUEST TO EXIT
DOOR POSITION
OEM
PROTOCOL
PORT
900 MHz
TROUBLE
LOCK RELAY
RS485
OEM System
OEM Controller
OEM READER
INTERFACE
PIM400-TD2
(Panel Interface Module)
AD-400 Wireless Devices
(up to 2 Devices)
NOTE: Complete specifications and certifications are detailed on individual data sheets which can be found on www.schlage.com/support
System Capabilities
AD400
AD300
PIM400-TD2
PIB300-2D
Up to 2
N/A
Device Capacity at the PIM400:
Number of Wireless Devices per PIM400
Number of Locks per PIB300
N/A
Up to 2
Other Requirements
RLBD Dry Contact Relay Board**
Consult your access control system provider
for capability
Reader Interface/Gateway

Readers (see supported credential formats to the right):
Keypad Only
Magnetic Stripe Card
Consult your access control system provider
for capability
Multi-Tech - 125 kHz Prox &
13.56 MHz Smart Card
PIV & PIV-I Card Compatible*
Supported Smart Cards (13.56 MHz):
• MIFARE®
• aptiQ™ smart cards using
MIFARE DESFire™ EV1
• PIV & PIV-I Compatible*
Card + PIN
Status Monitors:† †
Request to Exit
Yes
Door Position Switch
Yes
Interior Cover Tamper Guard
Yes
Lock/Unlock Status Clutch Position
No
Mechanical Key Override (ATK)
No
Request to Enter
Supported Smart Cards (13.56 MHz) Reads Card Serial Number Only:
• MIFARE DESFire®
• HID iCLASS®
Consult system provider
Low Battery Status
Consult system provider
N/A
No
N/A
Battery Voltage Level
Communication Status
Yes
Remote Lockdown (from host)
Yes (<10 secs)†
Remote Unlock (from host)
Yes (<10 secs)
Yes
Deadbolt Position
No
Interior Push Button
No
Lock Functions
Classroom/Storeroom
All of the above as supported by OEM Access
Control System
Notes:
Yes
†
Supported Proximity Cards (125 kHz):
• AWID® Proximity
• GE/CASI® ProxLite™
• HID® Proximity
• Schlage
• XceedID®
Yes
* FIPS 201 Compliant Option Available: The AD-Series
can be used in applications which require approval by
the U.S. Federal Government under HSPD-12 for FIPS
201 Compliance. Specific components are required,
please see the AD- 401 data sheet or AD-301 data
sheet for complete details.
** Requires RLBD Dry Contact Board for supervised inputs.
If supervised inputs are required our optional plugin
relay board (RLBD) is required for the PIM400-TD2 and
PIB300-2D. If unsupervised inputs are allowed then the
RLBD is not needed (however, it can still be used if the
client requires supervised inputs for the installation).
† Wake-up on Radio over PIM400-TD2 on up to 2 doors
requires configuration via SUS. † † Chart represents default functionality in AD-Series devices
AD-Series Credential Reader Compatibility:
• Multi-Technology • Multi-Technology
• Proximity
• Proximity
• Smart Card
• Smart Card
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe • Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
+ KEYPAD
• Magnetic Stripe
(Swipe)
• Keypad
AD-Series Electronic Locks from Schlage are built from the ground up to provide more options, more functionality and more compatibility
than any other solution on the market today. Designed to suite with the most popular lever styles and finishes, Schlage AD-Series can be
configured to accept most major key systems.
Exit Device Trim (AD-300/400-993)
The AD-300 and AD-400 exit trims
are exclusively compatible with exit
devices made by Ingersoll Rand when
using the low current request to exit
switch (RX-LC part # 050281 for Von
Duprin 98/99 & Von Duprin 22/22F
Rim/SVR devices & part # 650359 for
Falcon 25 Rim devices)
Mortise Lock
(AD-300/400-MS)
Cylindrical Lock
(AD-300/400-CY)
Cylinder Compatibility
Configure Your Lock:
We have created a web-based product selector tool
that can help you configure your AD-Series lock to
meet your needs. To check out the tool, please visit
www.schlage.com.
Schlage
Falcon®
Sargent® (10L + 11L Full Size)
Corbin Russwin®
Yale® (also includes Medeco
31*0100 FSIC)
Best®
Full Size
(key-in-lever
6 pin)
Full Size
(key-in-lever
7 pin)




FSIC
(6 & 7 pin)
SFIC
(6 & 7 pin)











= with cylinder or less cylinder options = less cylinder only

= less cylinder, only with Sparta and Rhodes levers Note: See pricebook for specific configurations.
Lever styles
Warm tone finishes
Standard cylinders shown, SFIC and FSIC also available.
Sparta Rhodes
Athens
Tubular
605
606 612
643e
Bright Brass Satin Brass Satin Bronze Aged Bronze
Cool tone finishes
619
Satin Nickel
625
626
626AM
Bright
Satin Chrome Satin Chrome
Chrome
with Antimicrobial
Open Architecture Solutions
Complete Your System
At Schlage, we understand that each facility has
unique security requirements. Our extensive line
of products, flexible options and ability to adapt
to your existing environment make it easy to find
a solution that will fit your security needs.
--
HHD
Complete your access control system with readers and
credentials, biometric hand geometry readers, system
components, HHD programming device and other wireless
accessories including the TK400 Wireless Portable Signal Test Kit.
Readers and Credentials
TK400
HandKey II
INGERSOLL RAND, the Ingersoll Rand logo, SCHLAGE, the SCHLAGE logo, XceedID, Von Duprin, Falcon and aptiQ are
trademarks of Ingersoll Rand plc, its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the United States and other countries. GE, CASI
and ProxLite are trademarks of General Electric Corporation. MIFARE and MIFARE DESFire EV1 are trademarks of NXP
B.V. HID and iCLASS are trademarks of HID Corporation. AWID is a trademark of Applied Wireless Identifications Group.
Corbin Russwin is a trademark of Corbin Russwin, Inc. Sargent is a trademark of Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale is
a trademark of Yale Security, Inc. Best is a trademark of Stanley Black & Decker. Dorma is a trademark of DORMA Door
Controls, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
877-671-7011 • securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll Rand
000076 03/12
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Ingersoll Rand (NYSE:IR) advances the quality of life by creating and sustaining safe, comfortable and efficient
environments. Our people and our family of brands—including Club Car®, Ingersoll Rand®, Schlage®, Thermo King® and
Trane®—work together to enhance the quality and comfort of air in homes and buildings; transport and protect food
and perishables; secure homes and commercial properties; and increase industrial productivity and efficiency. Ingersoll
Rand Security Technologies’ market-leading products include electronic and biometric access control systems; time-andattendance and personnel scheduling systems; mechanical locks; portable security; door closers, exit devices, architectural
hardware, and steel doors and frames; and other technologies and services for global security markets. Ingersoll Rand is a
$14 billion global business committed to a world of sustainable progress and enduring results.
securitytechnologies.ingersollrand.com
We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.
ingersollrand.com
©2012 Ingersoll-Rand Company
005129
06/12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement